Wca-21 Rolls Royce - Umas V PDF

-- -
AKER AUKRAAS
Search Pg/Word
YARD NO. 110
UNIT NO. 7126-1
I Exit & Back

1nstr.man.
- UMAS V I
SYSTEM DRAWINGS 01
DIMENSION SKETCHES 02
INTERNAL WlRlNG ALARM

CABINETS 03
INTERNAL WIRING PUMP &VALVE

CONTROL CABINET 04
INTERNAL WIRING TANKSOUNDING

CABINET 05
INTERNAL WIRING LOCAL CONTROL

CABINET 06
TERMINAU WlRlNG DIAGRAMS PANELS1

POWER SUPPLY 07
110 LIST 08
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 09
UMAS V SPECIFICATIONS 10
- RolIs-Royce
UMAS V
AUTOMATION SYSTEM
DATE OF DRAWING
REVISION DATE
PROJECT NO
ORDER NO
CUSTOMER : Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Ship Technology

Ulstein, Ulsteinvik
YARD NO. : Aukra Industrier AS, Yard no. 110
OWNER : Lister Management
VESSEL NAME
VESSEL TYPE : UT 755L
THIS MANUAL IS NOT FOR THIRD PARTY DISTRIBUTION. NOT TO BE COPIED WITHOUT W R l V E N CONSENT
FROM ROLLS-ROYCE MARINE AS.
Rolls-Royce Marine As
Dep.: Automation Longva
- Rolls-Royce
MAIN COMPONENTS PIECES UNIT NO. SERIAL NO.
LOCATED IN ENGINE CONTROL ROOM ECR :

Main Cabinet
-Operator Station 1 Consisting of:

Maritime PC
Monitor 1
Keyboard
Pointing Device
Alarm Printer
Monitor 2
UPS With LF Filter
Terminal List Power Supply
Colour Printer
Patch Box
Patch Cable
-Additional Equipment Mounted in ECR Console:

ECR Alarm Panel 1
LOCATED ON BRIDGE:
-Operator Station 2 Consisting of:
Maritime PC
Monitor 1
Keyboard
Pointing Device
UPS With LF Filter
Terminal List Power Supply
Patch Box
Patch Cable
-Equipment Mounted in Bridge Consoles:

Terminal list
Bridge Alarm Panel 1
Bridge Alarm Panel 2
LOCATED IN CABINS:
Chief Engineer Alarm Panel
Buzzer Panel
1. Engineer Alarm Panel
Electrician Alarm Panel
Mess Room Alarm Panel 1
LOCATED IN ENGINE ROOM:

Dead Man On/Off Panel 1
Dead Man Reset Panel 1
Dead Man Reset Panel 2
- RolIsmRoyce
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
P=PRODUCTION MANUAL, E-ENGINEERING MANUAL, C=CLASS DOCUMENTATION, I=INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SECTION 1, SYSTEM DRAWINGS

Unit no. Name: Type of d~awing. Drawing no. Distr.
One-Line System Configuration block diagram 38038301 PECl

Cable Diagram Operator Stations cable diagram 3E355950 PECl
Cable Diagram Alarm and Dead Man Panels cable diagram 3E355951 PECl
Cable Diagram Communication Networks cable diagram 3E355952 PECl
Piping Diagram Datasound piping diagram 3R071301 PECl
Cable Specification documentation cablesp.doc ECI
SECTION 2, DIMENSION SKETCHES

Unit no. Name: Type of drawing. Drawing no. Distr.
Details for Earth Connections lay out 4Ml443Ol EC I

Operator Station Maritime PC lay out 3M144331 ECI
Operator Station Monitor 15'' Flat Screen lay out 3M144330 ECI
Operator Station Keyboard lay out 3Ml44339 ECI
UPS lay out 3Ml44338 ECI
Low Frequency Filter For UPS lay out 3Ml4434l ECI
Alarm Printer lay out 3M144307 ECI
Colour Printer lay out 3Ml44308 ECI
Alarm Panels ECR/Bridge/Chiefls Cabin lay out 3M144325 EC I
Alarm Panels CabinsIMess Room lay out 3M144335 ECI
Dead Man OnlOff lay out 3M144312 ECI
Dead Man Reset Panel lay out 3M144312 ECI
SECTION 3, INTERNAL WIRING ALARM CABINETS

Alarm System Main Cabinet lay out 3M327001 PECl

Fuse lndex List Main Cabinet index list 4G175101 PECl
Fuse lndex List Main Cabinet index list 4G 175102 PECl
Power Distribution circuit diagram PECl
Power Distribution circuit diagram PECl
Communication Distribution circuit diagram PECl
Internal Digital In/Output Module circuit diagram PECl
Pocket Paging System Module circuit diagram PECl
Digital lnput Module circuit diagram PECl
Analogue 4-20mA lnput Module circuit diagram PECl
Analogue Pt-100 2-wire lnput Module circuit diagram PECl
PARTS LIST parts list PECl
lnm3
RolIsmRoyce
TABLE OF CONTENTS
P=PRODUCTION MANUAL, E=ENGINEERING MANUAL, C X L A S S DOCUMENTATION, I=INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SECTION 4, INTERNAL WIRING P&V CONTROL CABINET

Unit no. Name: Tlpc of drawing. Drdwing no. Distr
P&V Control Cabinet lay out PECl

Distribution Board index list PECl
PLC survey lay out PECl
Electronics Cabinet wiring diagram PECl
PARTS LlST parts list PECl
SECTION 5, INTERNAL WIRING TANKSOUNDING CABINET

Unit no. Name: T y ~ of
e drawing. Drawing no Distr.
UN980 Umas V Tanksounding lay out 4M327201 PECl

UN980 Tank list index list 46175301 PECl
UN980 Electronics Cabinet wiring diagram 3E356101 PECI
UN980 Electronics Cabinet wiring diagram 3E356102 PECl
UN980 Electronics Cabinet wiring diagram 3E356103 PECI
UN980 Electronics Cabinet wiring diagram 3E356104 PECl
PARTS LlST parts list 210633 PECl
SECTION 6, INTERNAL WIRING LOCAL CONTROL CABINET

(Y\uau_sOOI'dok dnk mlkn auknl 1O.umns nln111A7IZ6~u1nnsalnrn~.doc)

I'agc 415
1Rolls-Royce a
TABLE OF CONTENTS
P=PRODUCTION MANUAL, EzENGINEERING MANUAL, C=CLASS DOCUMENTATION, I=INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SECTION 7, TERMINAL / WIRING DIAGRAMS PANELS 1 POWER SUPPLY

UN914 Power Supply Operator Station wiring diagram 3E155619 ECI

UN921-25 Peripheral Alarm Panel wiring diagram 3E155621 ECI
UN923.1 Terminal List, Peripheral Alarm Panel wiring diagram 3E155622 ECI
UN970 Dead Man OnlOff wiring diagram 3E155605 ECI
UN975-76 Dead Man Reset Panel wiring diagram 3E155605 EC I
UN925.1 Buzzer Panel wiring diagram 3E155603 EC I
SECTION 8, FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

Unit no. Name: Type of dnwing. Drawing no. Disk.
Test Procedure Alarm documentation Fatproc.doc C

Test Procedure Pump & Valve documentation 7126pv-fat C
Test Procedure Tanksounding documentation AU-82 C
SECTION 9, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Unit no. Name: T p e of dnwing. Drawing no. Distr.
Amos Maritime PC data sheet

Hatteland Industrial Monitors data sheet
PEP IUC-32 System-CPU data sheet
PEP CMX-PFB12 data sheet
PEP Smart 110 data sheet
SlOX Analogue Module S48 data sheet
SlOX 64 Dl IDO Module S27 data sheet
SlOX Digital I10 Module S45 data sheet
LAUER Panel LCA 3001320 data sheet
Astec Power LPS255-CF data sheet
VICTRON FLAX Voltage Switch data sheet
MASTERVOLT Inverter MASS 241500 data sheet
SECTION 10, UMAS V SPECIFICATIONS

Unit no. Name: T p e of drawing. Drawing no. Distr.
UMAS V Alarm System User's Manual documentation urnsvo-35 CI

UMAS V Pump&Valve User's Manual documentation 7126PVOM I
UMAS V Pump&Valve Sewice Manual documentation Sewman03 I
UMAS V Tanksounding for Tanktender documentation DSF612 CI
Page 515
OPERATOR STATION 2
LOCATED ON BRIDGE
BRIDGE BRIDGE
ALARM PANEL 1 AIARM PANEL 2
UN923 UN924
TERMINAL LIST
BACKUP SUPPLY 2 4 V DC
BACKUP SUPPLY 2 4 V OC
CHIEF ENGINEER CHIEF ENGINEER 1. ENGINEER ELECTRICIAN MESS ROOM I

BUZZER PANEL ALARM PANEL ALARM PANEL ALARhl PANEL ALARM PANEL
UN925.1
OPERATOR STATION 1
LOCATED IN ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
COLOUR
PRINTER
UN9 1 1.9
II
ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

ALARM PANEL 1
UN91 1 . 3 UN91 1.4
UMAS V UMAS V UMAS V TANKSOUNDING

ALARM SYSTEM PUMP AND VALVE MAIN ELECTRONIC
UN900 MAIN CABINET I CONTROL CABINET UN940 CABINET U N 9 8 0
DEAD MAN SYSTEM P'O''b"S
ROlAllNG
LIGHT
mmtTrrrr mmtmm mrrrtrmTl

PIPING TO TANKS
SIREN WIRING TO WIRING TO WIRING TO
FIELD INSTRUMENTS FIELD INSTRUMENTS FIELD INSTRUMENTS
AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS UMAS AUTOMATION SYSTEM
--
YARD NO. 1 10
Draw. TAA 2 4 . 0 3 . 0 3
Reference: mm3 Rolls-Royce ONE-LINE
Drow.
DIAGRAM
Rev. 7126-1
-------- cantr. l&\
K< Rolls-Royce Marine AS N-6293 LONGVA "0.
.,A
,, griq. I&/?05
. Dept. Automation Longva - NORW.~Y
3503830 I - 210633
lnlormolion conloincd herein is lhe properly o l Rolls-Royce Marine AS and may no1 be copicd or communicoled l o any third party.
Rev. Dale Dcscriplion Draw, Appr. or used, lor any purpose olhcr than thal lor ~ h i c hil is suppled wilhoul lhc express wrillcn consenl o l Rolls-Royce Morinc AS.
OPERATOR STATION 1
LOCATED IN ENGINE CONTROL ROOM OPERATOR STATION 2
LOCATED ON BRIDGE
MONITOR 1
UN 911.2 UPS - F FILTER MONITOR 1
UN911.7A UN911.78 UPS -LF FILTER
KEYBOARD -UN 914.7A UN 914.78
TERMINAL
I
UN 911.3
LlST TERMINAL
UN 911.8
LlST
POINTING DEVICE
$
OUTLETS
VOLTAGE WATCH OF SUPPLY UN 914.8
OUTLETS
TO OPERATOR STATION VOLTAGE WATCH OF SUPPLY
P C V CONTROL ALARM TO OPERATOR STATION 7------7 sOcK"
P C V CONTROL ALARM
I ALARM I ! WATCH / !
ALARM PRINTER
UN 911.5
MONITOR 2
UN 911.6
UN 911.9
tUN911.9 FROM EMERGENCY

FROM EMERGENCY
CIRCUIT. SUPPLY
CIRCUIT.
2 2 0 - 2 4 0 VSUPPLY
AC
FROM EMERGENCY 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V AC
CIRCUIT. SUPPLY 50/60Hz. I = 3 A -
50/60H1. I=3A
2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V AC
50/60Hz. l = l A
CONTROL OUTPUT
ROTATING LIGHT I'
+""
- 2rZr0.5qrnm
V
V / V
I+ tUN900 tUN940 tUN940 tUH980
\ UMAS V -X900 -XI0 UMAS V 'It -XB1 -X2 UMAS V
tUN9W
41, ALARM SYSTEM 51 -- 27 PUMP & VALVE I
-- 1
TANKSOUNDING
-X -x9m
MAIN CABINET I
52 -- 30 2 -- 2
t24V -- I13 -- CONTROL CABINET 3 -- 3
MAIN ELECTRONIC
OV -- 114 -- (TANKTENDER) 4 -- 4 CABINET
CONTROL OUTPUT
SIREN
UN 900
I
Nor!
NO POLR IS TO BE APPLIED 10 U i Y ff IHL UNITS
YlHLWl CWUllllHG RRUA'S YRUCI CNUNCCR.
CL8lES BCTNIH PRINICR. UWITW. KilBOUID. ULWP AND PC

AK NLIKRED BY RRUA UI SlANOARO LCHGTHS. l i OIHER
LlHGlHS RCWREO. YARD 9JPPLY.
YARD 10 YOUHI THE DIiIEREHI IlEUS DELIKRED ACCORDlNG

TO lHlS DRAYNG AND BELWOHG DEIAIL DRAYNGS.
FROM EMERGENCY SUPPLY FROM SUPPLY SIREN SUPPLY ROTATING LIGHT FROM EMERGENCY SUPPLY FROM SUPPLY FROM UhERAL!
CIRCUIT. SUPPLY 2 4 V DC BATTERIES 2 3 0 V AC 2 4 V OC CIRCUIT. SUPPLY 2 4 V OC BATTERIES 2 4 V DC BATTERIES ALL U B L K 10 BL USED. UUST B[ Ci WIELDCO 1PE (RCW W 9U:LAR)
2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V AC 1=1OA 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V AC I=16A I=5A Yi,iiO UUSl BC COHHCCIED 10 (RCUND IN WE EHD CHLY
50/60Hz. I = 3 A 50/60Hz, I=10A
U , ~ I U U UDlslAua BCIYEN YWAL CANE AVO HIM POW IS TO BC O J UCIER
AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS UMAS V ALARM SYSTEM

YARD N o . 1 10
Draw. TAA 24.03.03 Reference:
RoI IS-Royce POWER DIAGRAM
CABLE
Orow.
SUPPLY/INTERNAL WATCH
Rev. 7126-1
--- rb ?T8jLq Rolls-Royce Marine AS .-
Conlr.
APP~ e. ,A
&@as Dept. Automation - Longva

N-6293 LONGVA
NORWAY "O' 3E.355950 - 210633
kv. Dale Dcscriplion Draw. Appr Inlormalion conlaincd herein is Ihe propcrty of Rolls-Roycc Marine AS and may not be copied or communicalcd l o any third party.
or used. l o r any purpose other lhan that lor which i l is supplied wrlhoul Ihe exprcss wrillcn conscnl o l Rolls-Roycc Marinc AS.
NOTE!
NO P O K R IS TO BE APPLIED TO ANY OF M E UNITS
W H O U T CONWLnNG RRNA'S K R M C E ENGINEER.
YiWD TO MOUNT M E DIFFERENT I K M S DELIVERED ACCORDING

TO M I S ORAMNG AVO BELONGING OEThL DRAINGS.
/\U CAQLES 1 0 BE USED. MUST BE OF 9ilIELDED W E (RCOP).

W E L D MUST BE CCUNECliD TO GROUND IN CUE END ONLY.
MINIMUM DISTANCE BEIIIEEN SIUIAL CAELES I W D H I M P O K R IS TO BE 0.3 METER.
FOR PROFIBUS CAQLE RECOMMENOAnON, PLEASE CONFER OUR SEPAQAIE

'CABLE w m c A n m ' OONMENI
[ Rolls-Royce
spp
ALARM AND DEAD MAN PANELS

YARD NO. 1 10
-- CABLE DIAGRAM
TAA 2 4 . 0 3 . 0 3 Reference:
Draw. mrm Draw. Rev. 7126-1
~on~~ ~ L ~ T . c ~ . ; . ~ Rolls-Royce Marine AS
r.
APP~. m. &/3 C$ Dept. Automation - Longva
N - 6 2 9 3 LONGVA
NORWAY
no.
3E.35595 I - 210633
-~
Rev. Dale Description Draw Appr. Inlormalion c o n l a ~ n c d hcrcin is l h e properly o f Rolls-Royce Morine AS and rnoy no1 bc copied or cornrnunicolcd l a any lhird porly,
or uscd, for any purposc othcr l h a n l h o l for which i l is supplied withoul l h c express wrillen conscnl of Rolls-Royce Morinc AS.
CABLE REWIRLMENTS!
FO8 CABELING OF THE DIFFERENT CCMUUNICATIW NETWORKS.
OPERATOR STATION 2
LOCATED O N BRIDGE /
/ - - --. \
PLEAY CONFER OUR SEPARATE 'CABLE SPECIFICATION' DOCUMENT. / NETWORK PORTS
\
/ 8 PINS MODULATION CONTACT
GENERAL!
/ CATEGORY 5. 10BASE-T CABLE
\
UlNlUUM DISTANCE BETWEEN SIGNAL CABLES AND HIGH POWER IS TO BE 0.3 METER.
NOTE : STRAIGHT-THROUGH \
OPERATOR STATION 1
LOCATED IN ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
ETHERNET
TWISTED PAlR
ETHERNET TWISTED PAlR ETHERNET TWISTED PAlR
UMAS V RS422
UMAS V UMAS V
ALARM SYSTEM PUMP & V A L E CONTROL SYSTEM TANKSOUNDING
MAlN ELECTRONIC CABINET I MAlN CONTROL CABINET I MAlN ELECTRONIC
(TANKTENDER) CABINET
UN 9 8 0
I I I I I AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS UMAS V ALARM SYSTEM

I 1 I I I YARD NO. 1 10
Draw. TAA 24.03.03 Reference:
Rolls-Royce COMMUNICATION NETWORK
CABLE DIAGRAM
Draw.
--Conlr. 'il&,,
4-q,L7;.Lq Rolls-Royce Marine AS N-6293 LONGVA
Dept. Automation - Longva NORWAY
?ev I Datc I Dcscriplion Drow. Appr. Informalion conlaincd hcrcin is the properly of Rolls-Royce Marine AS and may not be copied or communicoled l o any third poily.
or used. for any purpose olher lhon thol lor which it is supplied withoul Ihc cxprcss writlen conscnl o f Rolls-Royce Moiine AS.
UMAS, TANKSOUNDING
(ELECTRONICS)
MANUAL SOUNDING
TEST INDICATOR BLOCKING MANOUETER
,@
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
WE/DW F.W. F.W. WB/DW WE/DW F.O. F.O. F.O. F.C. BASE OIL EASE OIL F.O. F.O. F.W. F.W. F.W. F.W. F.W. MUD/BRINE
n-
- -
o o@,
@,
- -
Chonnel n o 2 0 Chonnel no.21 Chonnel "0.22 Channol "0.23 Chonnel "0.24 Channel n o 2 5 Chonncl n o 2 6 Channel n o 2 8 Chonnel n o 2 8 Channel no29 Channel n o 3 0 Chonnel "0.31 Chonnel n o 3 2
- -
Channel n o 33 Chonnal "0.34 Chonnel 00.35 Chonncl no.36 Chonnel
37 Chonnal
38
20
Tonk 1 PS.
71 2lA
Tonk 3 SB.
22
lank 2 PS.
22A
Tank 3 PS.
23
Tonk 4 58.
24
l o n k 4 PS.
25 26 27 TANK 8 2 8 STAN 29 STAB 29 STAB 3 0 FO SEITL. 31 FO SEWICE 3 7 FC OWERFL. 51 FO SEWICE - -
MUD/BRINE MUD M ~ E MUD MUD MUD
Tank 5 SB
MUD
Tonk 5 PS. C~ntCl
F.W.
Tank 1 Tonk 2 SB Tank 2 PS T0"k Tank PS- - Tmk l a n k SB DEPTH
FCRW
DEPTH
ASTERN
MUD WB/DW WE/OW WB/DW F.O. F.O. F.O. F.O.
WE/OW WB/CW 47 48
A u k r o I n d u s t r i e r AS
Y o r d no. 1 1 0
Draw. O.M. 2 5 . 0 3 . 0 3 Reference:
- -Conlr: I
.i%c1).i.5
C3rr3 3E356101/ -04
Rev. Dale Description Drow *PPr 4G 1 7 5 3 0 1
A p p r . ~
UMAS TANKSOUNDING SYSTEM
Rolls-Royce
% UN980
Eur. P r o ; PIPING DIAGRAM
ETm Drow. Rev. 7126
Rolls-Royce Marine AS no.
Dept. Automation - Longva
N-6293 LONGVA
NORWAY 3R071301 - 21063J//7
I n f o r m o t i o n c o n t a i n e d h e r e ~ n i s t h e p r o p e r t y o f R o l l s - R o y c e Marine AS a n d m a y n o l b c c o p i e d o r c o m m u n i c o t c d l o a n y t h i r d p a r t y .
o r used. l o r a n y p u r p o s e o t h c r t h o n tho1 f o r w h i c h i l i s supplied without I h c express w r i l l c n c o n s c n l o f Rolls-Royce Morinc AS.
- Rolls-Royce
[
Cable Specification UMAS Autonlatiorr System
UMAS
AUTOMATION SYSTEM
CABLE SPECIFICATION
Date Issued Status

29.05.98 go0 First issue
29.10.98 go0 Ethernet twisted pair added
1 29.02.00 I
1 go0
I
I Cable data on Ethernet and Profibus modified. 10.2

1 09.01.01 I
1 go0
I
I Cable data on Profibus modified. 10.3 I
06.07.01 go0 Cable data on CAN bus added. 0.4
17.01.02 f.r. Cable data on VALVESlFEEDBACWANALOG signal added. 0.5
25.01.02 f.r. Installation added. 0.6
07.03.02 taa Cable data on Ethernet modified 0.7
Rolls-Royce Marine AS
Dep. Automation - Longva
m
RolIs-Royce
Cable Specification UMAS Automation System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION
2 ETHERNET COAXIAL
3 ETHERNET TWISTED PAIR
4 PROFIBUS
5 SlOX BUS
6 CAN BUS
7 RS-4221485 TRANSMISSION
8 CONTROL OF SOLENOID VALVES
9 DIG. FEEDBACK SIGNAL (FROM VALVES I STARTERS).
10 ANALOG SIGNAL (FROM VALVES I TRANSMITTERS)
11 INSTALLATION
Rolls-Royce Marine A S
-
Dep. Automation Longva
1Rolls-Royce
Cable Specifcation UMAS Automation System
1 INTRODUCTION
This cable specification is guidance for the selection of cables between different
communication network node points within UMAS V Automation System. Cable type and
requirements are listed up below.
2 ETHERNET COAXIAL
For coaxial Ethernet it is recommended to use a "Thinnet" or "Cheapernet" cable for LAN 10
base 2. Cable shield must be connected to ground at the computer end (UN 900), and
terminators must be used at both ends.
Cable Data:
Type: LAN 10 base 2 DEC Coaxial

Cable outer diarn.: 4.65 mm
Impedance: 50 R
Capacity (nom): 88 pF/m
3 ETHERNET TWISTED PAIR

For Ethernet with twisted pair it is recommended to use a 10BASE-T of S-FTP (Braid and foil
screened Twisted Pair) cable of category 5 or higher.
Cable Data:
Type: 2x2x0.5mm2
Impedance: 100 5 15 R (1-100MHz)
A recommended category 5 cable is Indzatrial Etlzernet FC Marine Cable from Siemens:
Type: Twisted pair, shielded, 2 ~ 2 ~ 0 . mmz

75
Cable inner sheath: 3.9 mm
Cable outer diam.: 6.5 mm
Impedance: 100 R * 15 R (1-100MHz)
A recommended catego~yG cable is LAN~nark-6F2TP Cat.6 LSZH from Nexans
Type: Twisted pair, shielded, 4x2x0.55 mm2

Cable inner sheath:
Cable outer diam.: 6.5 mm
Impedance: 100 R 5 15 R(1-100MMz)
- Rolls-Royce
[
4 PROFIBUS
For ProfiBus it is recommended a cable from Siemens named SIENOPYR-FR PROFIBUS or a

cable from Lappcabel named UNITRONIC-BUS FD P L2lF.I.P. For ProfiBus, terminators
must be used in both ends.
Cable Data SIENOPYR-FR PROFIBUS M-02Y(ST)CHX:
Type: 2 5 (22 AWG)

Twisted pair, shielded, 1 ~ 2 ~ 0 . 3 mrn2
Cable inner sheath: 0 8.0 mm
Cable outer d i m . : 0 10.0 mm
Impedance: 150+ 1 5 R
Capacity (800MHz): max. 30 pF/m
Cable Data UNITRONIC-BUS FD P L2lF.I.P:
Type: Twisted pair, shielded, 1x2x0.64 mmz

Cable outer d i m . : max. 8.5 mm
Impedance: 1 5 0 h 50 R
Capacity (800MHz): max. 30 pF/m
5 SIOX BUS
For the SIOX bus, it is recommend using a shielded twisted pair cable. This type of bus do not
require any special type of cable, so most common twisted pair cables available can be used.
Cable Data:
Type: Twisted pair, shielded, low capacity, 0.5 rnrn2min.

Cable outer d i m . : -
Resistance: max. 100 R totally on bus
Capacity: max. I00 pF/m
Pngc 4
1Rolls- Royce
cmm
6 CAN BUS
For the CAN bus, it is recommend using a shielded twisted pair cable. According to the I S 0
11898-2 standard, cables to be chosen for CAN bus lines should have a nominal impedance of
120 Ohm, and a specific line delay of nominal 5 ns/m. Line termination has to be provided
through termination resistors of 120 Ohm located at both ends of the line. The length related
resistance should have 70 mOhm/m. All these mentioned AC and DC parameters are suitable
for a 1 Mbitls transmission rate at 40 m segment length. With increasing se,ment length, a
higher cable cross-section must be used (see recommended values of I S 0 1 1898).
This type of bus do not require any special type of cable, so most common twisted pair cables
available can be used.
Cable Data:
Type: Twisted pair, shielded, low capacity, 0.5 mm2 min.

Cable outer diam.: -
Impedance: 120 R (min. 108 SZ, max. 132 R)
7 RS-4221485 TRANSMISSION
For wiring of RS-4221485 signals, it is recommend using a shielded twisted pair cable. As for
the SIOX bus, RS-4221485 signals do not require any special type of cable; so most twisted
pair cables can be used. On the other hand, the transmission range will increase if a cable with
lower capacitance and larger diameter is used.
Cable Data:
Type: Twisted pair, shielded, low capacity, 0.5 mm2 min.

Cable outer diam.: -
Resistance: Max 100 Ohm totally on bus.
Capacity: 42pFlm maximum.
Range: Max 1200m.
For instance, use cables of TCX-type, RCOP-type, IFOI-type, PFOP-type or similar.
- Rolls-Royce
Cable Specifcation ( " UMAS Automation System
8 CONTROL OF SOLENOID VALVES

For control of solenoid valves, it is recommend using a shielded cable.
( Coil max. 36W / 24V / 110V / 230V )
Cable Data: Pair, shielded, 0,75 mmz min. ( 60 or 250V )
( For cable length over 75m 1,0 11,5mm2)

TCX- pair cable can be supplied in 1 , 2 , 4 , 7 , 10, 14, 19 and 24 pair. (Acc. to data sheet)
9 DIG FEEDBACK SIGNAL (FROM VALVES / STARTERS).
For dig. feedback signal, it is recommend using a shielded pair cable.

( 24V DC )
Cable Data: Pair, shielded, 0,5 rnrnzmin. ( 60V )

TCX- pair cable can be supplied in 1,2,4,7, 10, 14, 19 and 24 pair.(Acc. to data sheet)
10 ANALOG SIGNAL (FROM VALVES 1 TRANSMITTERS)
For analogue signal, it is recommend using a shielded pair cable.

( 0-24V )
Cable Data: Pair, shielded, 0,5 mm2 min. ( 60V )

TCX- pair cable can be supplied in 1, 2,4, 7, 10, 14, 19 and (24) pair. (Acc. to data sheet)
11 INSTALLATION
Cabinet to be grounded.
Communication cable (Item 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6 and 7) see drawing (3E----52).
Signal cable (Item 8, 9 and 10) cable shicldcd grounded in one end only (in cabinet).
NOTE! A L L CABLES USED FOR E X T E R N A L CONNECTIONS
MUST B E OF SHIELDED TYPE. SHEELD TO BE CONNECTED
TO GROUND IN ONE END ONLY. B Y PREFERENCE IN CABINETS.
C u SHIELD ON CABLE TRAY
/ CABLE G L A N D S / E N T R A N C E -
INTO M A I N U N I T .
I*". ', 1-1?

Rev. I Dole I Description / ~roiv / ADW I dnnr L.2 8..
Rolls-Royce Marine AS I!-6723 LOIIG'.; I

::CJ:./,Y
dep.: Automation - Longva
Free spoce
for plugs
min. 50mm
, ..ww,
UMAS AUTOMATION SYSTEM

)A.oS
I 1 EJEASURE
A-3,014 MARITl6E C O M P I T E R I.!SK
SKETCH
Rolls-Royce Marine AS I : - 6 ~ : LX.:.

dep.: Automation - Longva I.(=;,;*
BACK VIEW
SIDE VIEW
TOP VIEW
I Dote 1
-
Dcscr,~hn
Rolls-Royce
1
-- 1
ART.NO. 7 0 0 1 7 (7081 1 W/CABINE7
ART.NO. 7 0 6 3 2 (TOUCH)
Draw. GOO 28 02 0 0 Relerencc.
Rol!s-Royce Marine A S \-i:i: LC..:.:.

I rlen r Automation - Lonova
MAIN DIMENSIONS
282x132~24
I I I I
Rev. Dale Descripl;on

M A I N D!MENSIONS
88x483~520
1R o ~ R o ~ c ~
m Rolls-Royce Marine AS
dno.: Automation - Lonova
N-6291 LOI:GVI
NoW;Y
1 :Proi
I"'-
Drow.
n&
5
IMEASURE SKETCH POWER SUPPLY
UNINTERRUPTIBLE
3 M 144338 1 I
Rev.
-
USY
Front:
Frcc swcc
lor plugs
min. 100 mrn
MAIN DIMENSIONS:
49x483~131
Back:
msa3
Rolls-Royce
Rolls-Royce Marine A S N-62% LONW:
deo.: Automation - Lonava NOWAY
OK1 MICROLINE 280
MAIN DIMENSIONS
WxHxD 3 8 5 x 8 0 ~ 2 7 5
WEIGHT 4.5kg
M A I N DIMENSIONS
WxHxD 4-36x199~405
I 1 1 ART.NO. 7 0 1 28
B 16.11.01 Endrel lypebelegnelse
A 11.02% Compony name modified GOO Drow. COO 05 02.97 Reference
Rev. Dole Descriplion Dm"

scc'c
--
APP'.
c o t .
A
UMAS
~ \Ch /6
~
YO
~ .
i/.:l,.‘7
//Of
A U T O M % T I O ~SYSTEM
RoIIS-Royce cur. %proi MEASURE

PRINTER HP COLOR PRINTER
SKETCH !,,5
I:/
LEl23 Drac,~
Rolls-Royce Marine AS 11-6293 LC:JGY:
-
dep.: Automation-~- Longva
~
It0RilA.l
3 M 144308 -
PANEL DIM. WxH: 275 x 145
MATERIAL : 4UI.I AL. SEAWATER RESISTANT
PANEL TOPCOATING : FIOL. PBTQ. BAYFOL C R 6 - 2
COLOUR : PMS 2 8 2 (RALSOI 1)
DERGREE OF PROTECTION : IP 5 4
MAX DEPTH : APPROX. 1 0 0 MM
CUT OUT IN DESK : 2 3 0 x 1 2 5 (WxH)
1
I
- 06.5 I N DESK
7
I1 PANEL DIM. WxH: 150 x 1 1 4
r FUNC. -
REDUCE
BRIDGE
-
COMMON
-
ALARM DUTY
- ACKNOWLEDGE
C
i
1Rolls-Royce
C2Ia
TEST
I
Reference:
/ s:aje / -UMAS - .. -
. -. . . AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Rolls-Rovce Marine AS
I dep.: Automation - Longva
I 1 ART.NO. 63086
B 2<.01.01 Compony name modified JPU
A 04.02.98 Compony name chon
1Rolls-Royce Rev. Dole Descr#pl#on
DM,
1RO11s- Royce
Cl?m3
M-6293 ~
A
G
,!
Scole
Fu1
r :p)r a j
I Era.,..
M no.
/
MEASURE SKETCH
DEADMAN
3M 1 443 1 2
PANEL
Rev.
B
,151
AUKRA INOUSTRIER AS
I I YARD NO 110
Dale Oercrplion
- . - . - .. - -
Rcr
E S 5080 I Srclc 1 l l .U.A, ,< V .Al. ARM'
,. . , T Y. T T. F M
...
, -
MAlN DIMENSIONS
I000 x I800 x 400
11 1 Rolls-Royce
*
. ,
UN900 MAlN CABINET I
DIMENSIONAL SKETCH
I ^ I - .. -
1 :'1 Elp
h x
-
I ..-.~ -1 I @XEJ Rollr-Royce Marine AS
Dent Automation - Lonava
,
voi;,rl 3M32700 I
No. CIRCUIT Volt. Fuse Fuse N o .
UC RACK 2 4 V DC 4.0 A F1
;IOX ADAPTER K 3 2
'ERIPHERAL ALARM PANELS
SPARE
5 4 5 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE INTERNAL UNlI
\JETWORK SWITCH MAIN SUPPLY U8
3EAD MAN SYSTEM
5UPPLY SUB 1/0 UNITS
NPUT SUPPLY 2 2 0 - 2 4 0 V AC
ZABINET TEMPERATURE CONTROL
NTERNAL WATCH OF 2 3 0 V AC POWER SUPPLY
INTERNAL WATCH OF 2 4 V DC SUPPLY
NETWORK SWITCH BACKUP SUPPLY U8
SIREN ENGINE ROOM
ROTATING LIGHT ENGINE ROOM
DIGITAL MODULES
5 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE UN14
POWER DISTR. STRIP CHANNEL 1 - 1 6 UN14
POWER DISTR. STRlP CHANNEL 1 7 - 3 2 UN14
S 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE UN15
5 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE UN16
- ~p

, AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS
YARD NO. 1 10
Contr.
Rev. I Date I Descriplion I Draw. I Appr.
1~~~~~~Royce
I
Scale uMAS V ALARM SYSTEM
UN900 MAlN CABINET I
Eur.%pro;. FUSE INDEX
m
Rolls-Royce Marine AS N - 6 2 9 3 LONGVA
- NOR~YAY
I I I . -
Information conloincd herein i s lhe properly a f Rolls-Royce hlcrine AS ar;d may n o l be capicd or cornrnuntcaled l o ony lhird party.
or used. lor aov w r m s c alher l h o r l h a l i o i which it i s s u ~ ~ l i cGlhsb:
d lhc c x g r c s s wril:cn canscnl a i Rolls-Ro.ce hlorinc AS
CIRCUIT
S 4 8 ANALOGUE 4 - 2 0 m A
ANALOGUE MODULES
INPUT MODULE U N 1 7
32_
--
Volt.
4- Fuse No.
5 4 8 ANALOGUE 4 - 2 0 m A INPUT MODULE U N 1 8 --

S 4 8 ANALOGUE 4 - 2 0 m A INPUT MODULE UN19
- --
S 4 8 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN20
--
S 4 8 ANALOGUE P t - 1 0 0 INPUT MODULE UN21
--
5 4 8 ANALOGUE P t - 1 0 0 INPUT MODULE U N 2 2 --
5 4 8 ANALOGUE P t - i 0 0 INPUT MODULE U N 2 3 --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
-.
-.
--
--
--
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS
YARD NO. 110
Draw. TA4 24.03.03
Rev. Dote Description

- Contr.
Appr, &
,
'
+&:
; A+ 71 :
Sca'e UMAS V A L A R ~ SYSTEM

~
UN900 MAIN CABINET I
c ~ m
Rolls-Royce Eur. %pro;.
Drow.
FUSE INDEX
Rev. 7126-1
Rolls-Royce Marine AS N-6293 .. .. -- -
Dept. Automation - Longva NORI'IAY

--
", 4G175102 - 7 0 6 3 3~-
Information c o n l o i n e d herein i s I h c p ' c 2 e r t y c! Rolls-Royce I.lorinc AS and m a y not be copied or comrnunicaled to ony third p a r t y .
o r uscd. f o r m y F u r p o s e o:hcr l h i - Lhol f o r which i t is supplicd wilhoul I h c c x q r c s s * i ; t t c i i c o n s c n l of Rolls-Royce hloi;ne AS.
IUC RACK
I
r-T-7-1 S1OX ADAPTER K 3 2
I + - [
I RECTIFIER I V1 PERIPHERAL A U R M PANELS
I BRIDGE I
I - - I POWER DISTRIBUTION SPARE
,
L - t - i - J
I
24V DC 8 4 5 DIGITAL I/O MOOULE U N l l . FOR INTERNAL V!ATCH
++
TEST POINT NETWORK SWITCH MAIN SUPPLY UB
DEAD MAN SYSTEM
I SUPPLY S U B I/O UNITS
/ 2.1
I
D,rEz VIATCH OF
, - { 23OV AC POWER SUPPLY
+24V:B1 / 4,1
I N i E R N A L WATCH OF 2 4 V OC POWER SUPPLY
NETWORK S\YITCH BACKUP SUPPLY U 8
IUC RACK
J
SIOX ADAPTER K 3 2
OVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION
PERIPHERAL ALARM PANELS
SPARE
8 4 5 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE U N 1 3 . FOR INTERNAL WATCH
NETV!ORK SWITCH UB
DEAD MAN SYSTEM
SUPPLY S U B I/O UNITS
NOTE! DURING MEGGER TEST ON 2 4 V DC SUPPLY.

DISCONNECT CONNECTION TO GROUND ON FILTER 23
(MAX. MEGGER VOLTAGE IOOV)
1:
Y . NOTE! CA3LES FOR POVIER SUPPLY
5 f ? 51 2?OV AC AND 24" DC MUST BE AS SHORT
DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE ANALOGUE 1/0 MODULE
/ 6.1 5 2 7 DIGITAL I/O MODULE UN14 / 7.1 5:8 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN17 4-2Omi
/ 6.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRIP FOR CHANNEL I- 1 6 MODULE UN14 / 7.1 5 4 8 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN18 4-20mA
/ 6.1 POknlER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 1 7 - 3 2 MODULE U N l 4 / 7.1 5'8 ANALOGUE INPUT MOOULE UN19 4-20mA
1 POi4!ER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 3 3 - 4 8 MODULE UN14 / 7.1 S i 8 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN20 4-20mA/P1100-2
POWER OlSTRlBUTlON STRIP FOR CHANNEL 4 9 - 6 4 MODULE UN14 / 8.1 5'3 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN21 PL100-2
/ 8 1 S 1 5 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN22 PL100-2

/ 6.1 5 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 MOOULE UN15
I 5La ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN23 P1100-2
/ 6 1 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 1 - 16 MODULE U N l 5
/ 6.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 1 7 - 3 2 MODULE UN15
/ 6.1 POI1!ER DISTRIBUTION STRIP FOR CHANNEL 3 3 - 4 8 MODULE UN15
/ 6 1 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 4 9 - 6 4 MODULE UN15
/ 6.1 5 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE UN16
/ 6.1 POYIER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 1 - 1 6 MODULE UN16
/ 6.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 1 7 - 3 2 MODULE U N i 6
/ 6.1 POVIER DISTRIBUTION STRlP FOR CHANNEL 3 3 - 4 8 MODULE UN16
/ 6.1 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRIP FOR CHANNEL 4 9 - 6 4 MODULE UN16
/ 7.1 s'a ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE U N I ~ 4 - Z O ~ A
7.1 S:S ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN18 4-20mA
/ 7.1 5'8 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN19 4-20mA
6.1 5 2 7 OlClTAL 1/0 EAODULE UN14 7.1 SCS IWrLOGUE INPUT MODULE UN20 4-2QmA/P:100-2
-
1.8 / 4.0A
/ 6.1 5 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 MODULE UN15 1 8 1 5 4 3 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN21 Pl100-2
4.OA OW31
/ 6 1 5 2 7 DIGITAL 1/0 LIODULE U N l 6 1 8 . 1 5;s ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN22 P1100-2
1 8 . 1 8 : s ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE UN23 PLIOO-2
-P
COYI.ECTION TABLE
IUC
RACK $1 ) I
R S232
SIOX
ADAPTER
I PROFl8US COSNECTOR
000 I TO BEE CCNNECTEO 1 0 9-PIN
U W H PROFIEUS 0-SUB ON C X U - P ~ ~ I ~
0 0 I
RS1 19 I
I
@ FUSE I
I
I
I
I NOTE!
I YELLOW m o r l a u s
I CONNECTOR ONLY TO BE
USE0 AT THE END ON
I THE PROFIBUS CABLE
,
/
0V6
+24V:83
CO\!I!ON OV
BACYUP SUPPLY ( + 2 4 V a )
I I / 5.1
Y SlOX sus
/ 5.1
VI I I
IELWR4h.C AB SWEDEN
UN13 INPUTS
ACTYE + 24Y s45 DIGITAL I/O C
OUTPUTS
+ 2 i Y 500rn.h
ACTWE
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A
-X13A
I
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 B 7 6 5 3 2 1
I -
INTERNAL 'WAiCH OF 1 1 1 7;;
2 3 0 V AC POWER SUPPLY
CABINET
I
AlARM 3 3
3.I / LL LL
WATCH DOG
INTERNAL WATCH OF
24V DC POWER SUPPLY 3.1 / Z I/
TANK LEVEL PREWARNING

TO ECR AiCD BRIDGE
5.8 / / 6 1
SIOX BUS Jul
C.8 / / 6 1
UMAS V ALARM SYSTEM

1 AUKRA INOUSTRIER A S U N 9 0 0 MAIN CABINET I
I !
! --
YARD NO. 1 10
Tw
RolIs-Royce CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 5 ~p .-
7i?6-1
1 I Dror. 24.0303
'7h2y,&1;
Reference: Em33
Dra* Re,
1
CO~I,.
~ppr.&[.
N-€291 LOVG'II,
NORJIIY 3E355905 - 2iOh3j
ri / ~c:c 1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ , i ~ ~ Draw. Appr.
ti^^ C O ~ I O ~ ~ C ~ is m e
or lor any purpolr
ol ~ o ~ > r - R a , c euorine AS on6 moy no, be r a p i d or cornmunicatrd lo onl lhlrd porly.
olhar thon tnol lor ~ h i i hI i i r u p p l i d wlhoul ~ h cc l p r m d l ! m canrcnt o l R a l i r - R q c t Marine AS
/ 7 1
SIOX BUS J L ~ L
/ 7 1
v
TELLFRANC AB SWLDEN
S 2 7 6 4 DI/DO
1 6 4 PINS I
MODULE INTERFACE
WITH LED INDlCATOh
I ALARM SENSORS
I
I
-
I 1 YARD NO.
1D T
110
2.: 0 0 I R c ~ ~ ~ E N P
RolIs-Rovce d
U N 9 0 0 MAIN CABINET I
CIKCUIT DIAGRAM 6
., . ,
1:;
o Dr3r 8
t.-i?9: LONCJA
soR:.Ay 1 3E355906 7.;:Ej[-
Inlarmolnn c o n l o r l d herfin ,r the prooer\y 01
O r u ~ C E lor onr ournn-r nlher lhon f h o l lor
6.8 /
SlOX BUS
6.8 /
I .) NOTE!
O N MODULE UN2O
4-20mA TRANSDUCERS
TERMINALS 2-9
I
ARE FOR P I - 1 0 0
I
REMOVED ON MODULE U N ~ Q - ONLY ON

MODULE U:!?O
/
/
SIOX aus
v
r J T SloX BUS -
0 11 21
s ~ o xeus
UV~UR1ZIO
0 mswm 0
16 17
PWL* U P Y T
21 V L 3 D C SIox 0
~
I
I
I
!
1
i
1
I
I
--con1r.
I AUXRA INDUSTRIER AS
YARD 1\10. 1 10
Drar. TA.~ 2 1 , 0 3 0 3
'r&2yrC'j
&
f 2 &j
'I)
Rdemce:
1Rolls-Royce
Em133
N-6213 LONGYA
~JOWAY
UUAS V ALARM SYSTEM
uN9oo MAIN CABINET I
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 8
0ro.i
3E.355908
Rev.
-
7 176- I
21063~
, 03
""
ACPC.
?c, / ~c!e 1 ~:icr;,l,~~ Draw. Appr 1 ~ n t o r m o ~ icontained
Or tor
o~ neren ir IX proper\y 01 R O I I - R ~ ~~ (~a r~i n cAS a n d moy not be c o p e d or romrnuniiakd to any lhird parly.
other lhon l h c l lar * h , i h ,I .r s ~ p p l i r d r4noul ~ h cc z p r r r r w l l c n c a n r m l a1 R o l l s - R o w Uorinc AS
~ u l t l +03.03.25 i6:26 Engineer Partslistside 1
Main Order No. : 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername : AUKRA 110
Order No. : 210633#1&1 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 67665 Description : OPERATOR STATION 1 ECR Quant : 1.0 ?CS
Instr.10~ Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Drasi.ref
61910 PRINTER OK1 280 M/lOM KABEL 1.0 PCS OK1

506550 OK1 ML280 M/PAR. INT
67389 MITS MELSEC-A TCP/IP IC-008: 1.0 PCS 67389
TCPIP/MITSUBISHI DRIVER MELLOM
6765.1 INTOUCH 7.1 RUNTINE 01-ooal 1.0 PCS INTOUCH
70592 PC MARITIME AMOS A31OM: 1 . 0 PCS SPECTEC

BESTAENDE AV:
72506 PRINTER HP DESKJET 3820 1 . 0 PCS HP
Multii 0 3 . 0 3 2 5 1 6 : 2 6 Engineer Partslistslac 1
4- 2
Main Order No. : 7126 Description : AUKRA 1 1 0 Ordername : AUKRA 1 1 0
Order No: 210633#2&1 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRii 110
Item No. : 67669 Description : OPERATOR STATION 2 BRIDGE Quant : 1.0 PCS
Instr.loc Ref I t e m n o . Degcription/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Dra.i.ref
................................................................................................................
67651 TNTOUCH 7 . 1 CLIENT 0 1 - 0 0 8 1 1.0 PCS INTOUCH

70592 PC MARITIME AMOS A310M: 1.O PCS SPECTEC
BESTAENDE AV:
Multi+ 01.03.2s 1 6 ~ 2 6Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e 1
Main Order No.: 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername : AUKPA 110
Order No. : 210633#3&1 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 67665 Description : EQUIPMENT FOR ECR CONSOLE Quant : 1.0 PCS
Instr.10~ Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw.ref
......................................
UMAS V PHERIPHERAL PANEL 1.0 PCS lM144325

LMAS V TERMINAL LIST P.SUPPLY 1.0 PCS 3E155619
CABLE PATCH 1M 4P UTP CAT.5 1.0 PCS MORE ELEKTRO
TRACK-BALL LOGITEC MAREL-MOUSE 1.0 PCS LOGITECH
MONITOR JH 15 TO3 MMD-A1: 2 . 0 PCS FJITTELAND
TFT FLAT SCREEN W/DIMMER AND VIDEO OPTION
TERJYINAL BOX FL CATS 1 . 0 PC5 PHOENIX
LOW FREQ.FILTER F/MGE UPS : 1 . 0 PCS MGE
MGE.NR.5102174900
UPS MGE PULSARlSOOC U/FILTER: 1 . 0 PCS MGE
RACK MARINE U/LOW FREQ.FILTER
KABEL NETT IEC F/M CEE2x22 2M: 1 . 0 PCS EILAG
FOR TILKOBLING AV UTSTYR TIL UPS.
Multir 0 3 0 3 . 2 5 1 6 ~ 2 6Engineer P a r t s l i s t s ~ d e 1
4 4-
Main Order No. : 7126 Description : AUKRR 110 Ordername : AUKRA 110
Order No.: 210633E3&2 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : A U 110
~
Item No. : 67669 Description : EQUIPMENT FOR BRIDGE CONSOLE Quant : 1.0 ?CS
Instr.loc Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw.ref
................................
....................................................
...................................
UMAS V PHERIPHERAL PANEL 2 . 0 PCS 3M144325

UMAS V TERMINAL LIST P.SUPPLY 1.0 PCS 3E155619
CABLE PATCH 1M 4P UTP CAT.5 1.0 PCS M0RE ELEKTRO
UMAS V TERMINAL LIST UN923.1 1 . 0 PCS 38155622
T R W K - B A L L LOGITEC MrIRBL.MOUST 1 . 0 PCS LOGITECX
MONITOR JH 1 5 TO3 MMD-A1: 1.0 PCS HATTELAND
TFT FLAT SCREEN U/DIMMER A??D VIDEO OPTION
TERMINAL BOX FL CAT5 1 . 0 PCS PHOENIX
LOW FREQ.FILTER F/MGE UPS: 1 . 0 PCS MGE
MGE.NR.5102174900
UPS MGE PULSAR1500C U/FILTER: 1 . 0 PCS MGE
RACK MARINE U/LOII FREQ.FILTER
~ u l t l +03.03.25 i6:2i. Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e 1
Main Order Plo.: 7126 Description : U K R A 110 Ordername : AUKRA 110

Order No. : 21063315Ll Description : UMAS INTEGR4TED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 68771 Description : MAIN CONTROL CABINET W 9 0 0 18 Quant : 1.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref I :em no ~escrlption/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw.ref
-.
.............................................................................
WIRE OLFLEX 3X0.75MM2 5.0 M MILTRONIC

ELECTRONIC FILTER HP1-20 1.0 PCS HENACO
FUSE 5X25MM 500MA e o ~ c sSIBA
MEDIUM TIME-LAG
FUSE 5X25MM 2,OA MED 10 0 PCS SIBA
FUSE 5X25MM 4,OA MED 10.0 PCS SIBA
FUSE 5X25MM 6.3A MED 2.0 PCS SIBA
CONNEC.25PIN DSUB MALE SOLD. 1.0 PCS HATTELAND
RELAY-BED SY2S-05C ao PCS IDEC IZUMI
ELECTRONIC FILTER GAlB-10 1 . 0 PCS HENACO
RECTIFIER 26MB 60A 25A 1 . 0 PCS International
TKERMOSTAT RITTAL SK 3110000 2.0 PCS RITTAL
REPLACE TYPE SK3112
FAN SK 3150 1.0 PCS RITTAL
CABLE 4X0.34 W/SCREEN COLOUR 2.5 M MILTRONIC
FOILSTREAMER 1 . 0 PCS BARRA
GITTER FOR VIFTE 4394 (PLAST) 1.0 PCS ZIEHL
FILTER UTGANG SK 3322.200 1.0 PCS RITTAL
RELAY RYZS-L 220VAC 1 . 0 PCS IDEC IZUMI
RELAY RYZS-LD 2aVDC 3.0 PCS IDEC IZUMI
COVER 25-PIN D-SUB 3357-6525 2.0 PCS 3M
FAN 4394 24V DC 1 . 0 PCS ZIEHL
AVSTANDSTK M5X20 ENINT 6 . 0 PCS ELRA
TERMINAL FUSE US1 6 1268834 34.0 PCS WEIDMULLER

END PLATE UAP 2.5-10 10.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
ENDSTOP WEW 35/2 WDU 2.5-10 14.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
TERMINAL WDU 2.5 38.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
DIGITAL SIOX 1/0 MODULE 545 1.0 PCS TELEFRANG
MODULE WITH 7 DIGITAL OUTPUTS AN0 14 INPUTS.
SERIAL SIOX ADAPTER MODULE K32 1 . 0 PCS TELEFRANG
RS232 SIOX ADAPTER K32. CONVERTING RS232 TO SIOX BUS
POWER LPS255-CF 230V/24VDC 10A 1 . 0 PCS POWERBOX
PLUG ISDN SPIN F/RUND CABLE 1 . 0 PCS M0RE ELEKTRO
IC M27C400l 2 . 0 PCS HATTELAND
CABLE PATCH 3M 4P UTP CAT.5 1 . 0 PCS M0RE ELEKTRO
CONNECTOR PROFIBUS 1036;; YLOW 1.0 PCS ERN1
BWlCKET F/SIOX ADAPTER K32 1.0 PCS 3A117803
BRAKETT FOR MONTERINGSKINNE 7 .O PCS 3A117804
CABINET ES5080 1000X1800X400 1.0 PCS RITTAL
MONTERINGSPLATE RITTAL ES5084 1.0 PCS 3A117809
FOR UMAS V ALARM SYSTEM
MONTERINGSPLATE UlliXS V POWER 1 . 0 PCS 37~117817
MONTERINGSBRAKETT G-SKI>>XE 21.0 PCS 3A117818
ASMC-IUC32TP AD400-q19 1.0 PCS AD ELEKTRONIKK
DEKSEL FOR UMAS V POWER 1.0 PCS 3A117825
iDili<SEL !
'
O
!
: U:.lAS V 23OV FiLTER 1 . 0 FCS 3All/OZG
SOKKCL PT BE/FN FOR PT 2 PC/S 1 . 0 PCS PHOBNIX
FILTER PT 2 PE/S~24AC-ST 1 .0 PCS PHOENIX
~ u l t l +03.03.2s 1 6 ~ 2 6Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e 2
Order No.: 210633#5&1 Description : LMRS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 68771 Descrlption : MAIN CONTROL CABINET UN900 18 Quant : 1.0 PCS
Instr.loc Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer D r a w ref
.....................................................................................
71873 ETHERNET SWITCH HIRSCH RS2-TX: 1.0 PCS HIRSCHMANN

HIRSCHMRNN RS2-TX, 8 PORT 10/1008ASE-TX,
72004 JUMPER ZQV 2.5/10 16089~ 40.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
72021 TERMINAL BOX FL CATS 3.0 PCS PHOENIX
72311 IWSEL PATCH 0 5 M UTP CAT.5 3.0 PCS TELEGARTNER
Mu?Li+ 0 3 0 3 . 2 5 16:26 Engineer Partslistslde 1
Ma:n order N o . : 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername :

4?-
AUKRA 110
Order No. : 21063315&2 Description : UMAS INTEGUTED Ordername . AUKRA 110
Iten No. : 68838 Description : 1/0 MODULE 527 M/TILBEHBR Quant : 3.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw.ref
................................
FUSE 5X25MM 500MR 3.0 PCS SIBA

MEDIUM TIME-LAG
FUSE 5X25MM 1. OA FAST 12.0 PCS SIBA
FUSE 5X25MM 4 , O A MED 3 - 0 PCS SIBA
CONNECTOR IDC 64PIN F L C . 3.0 PCS FCI/BERG
FLAT CABLE G4L N0.3M3365/64 - 6 M 3M

TERMINAL FUSE WSI 6 1268831 18.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
END PLATE MAP FOR WDK 3 . 0 PCS WEID>IULLER
END PLATE WAP 2.5-10 3.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
ENDSTOP WEW 35/2 WDU 2.5-10 1 8 . 0 PCS WEIDMULLER
FLKM64ILA FLATKAB-TEBY.LED: 3.0 PCS PHOENIX
FLKM 64/LA ART NR. 2281539
64 DIGITAL SIOX 1/0 MODULE 527 3.0 PCS TELEFRANG
INDIVIDUALLY SELECTABLE DI OR DO
CONNECTOR G4PIN FLATC. HARTING 3.0 PCS HARTING
FEMALE CONNECTOR
REKKEKL IiDK 2.5/ZQV 96.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
Multi+ 0 3 . 0 3 . 2 5 1 6 ~ 2 7Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e 1
Main Order No. : 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername : AUKRA 1 1 0

Order N o . : 210633E5&3 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUK- 110
Item No. . 6 8 8 4 0 Description : 1 1 0 MODULE 5 4 8 MITILBEHBP Quant : 7.0 C S
Instr.loc Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Dra:;. ref
.....................................
FUSE 5X25MM 500MA 1 4 . 0 PCS SIBA

MEDIUM TIME-LAG
TERMINAL FUSE WSI 6 1268834 1 4 . 0 PCS PIEIDMULLEX
END PLATE I.JiP 2 . 5 - 10 7 . 0 PCS WEIDMULLEX
ENDSTOP I,IE:.l35/2 bIDU 2 . 5 - 1 0 7 8 . 0 PCS EIDMULLES
TEF'AINAL WDU 2 . 5 l G O . 0 PCS WEIDMULLER
ANALOGUE INPGT SIOX 8S48:011 7 . 0 PCS TELEFRANG
Multir 03.03.25 16:27 Engineer Partslistslde 1 4
Main Order No. : 7126 DescrirJtion : AUKRA 110 Ordername : AUKRA 110
Order No.: 210633#5&4 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 67664 Description : PERIPHERALIDEAD MAN PANELS Quant : 1.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref Item no Descriptlon/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw. ref
.................................
..................................................
......---....--...--.....-----..--
PANEL-PEBZFERI LITE 3 . 0 PCS 3M144312

BUZZER ?.i_UZL 1.0 PCS 3M144310
W S V P Z R I P P Z 3 A L PANEL 1.0 PCS 3M144325
CONXECTCZ. PROFIaUS 103649 YLOW 1 . 0 PCS ERN1
U W I S C A P I N PA?iX KOMPLETT 3 0 PCS 3h147103 .!
~ u l t l t 03.03.2s i6:27 Engineer Partslistside 1
50
Order No.: 210633#5&5 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : A U L W 110
Item No. : 67672 Description : UMAS V ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS Quant : 1.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref Item no. DescripKion/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Dra':!.ref
.............................................................................................
54221 SIRENE 212.10.220 220V 1.0 PCS DEIF

59980 FLASH LIGHT WBS 24VDC YELLOW 1 . 0 PCS MARIN SUPPLY
M u l t i + 01.03 . 2 5 1 6 : 2 7 Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e I
Main O r d e r No. : 7126 Description : AUKRA 1 1 0 O r d e r ~ a r n e : Am<%\ 110

Order No. : 210633P9&1 Description : UMAS I N T E G m T E D Ordername : AU:m 110
I t e m No. : 70680 Description : SPL9.E PARTS W S V Quant : 1.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref I t e m n o . D e s c r i p t i o n / T y p e No. Quantity Unit Producer Drail r e f
53105 FUSE5X25MM500MA 1 0 . 0 PCS S I B 2

MEDIlM TIME-LAG
53106 FUSE 5X25MM 1 , O A FAST 1 0 0 PCS S I B A
53107 FUSE 5X25MM 2 , O A MED 1 0 . 0 P C S SIB.>.
13109 FUSE5X25NM4,OHMED 1 0 0 PCS SI3.L.
53110 FUSE 5X25MM G . 3 A MED 1 0 . 0 ?CS S13A
CABLE ENTRY Al
BOTTOM OF CAB i T
BOTTOM FRAME
R i t t a l cabinet ES 5 2 0 5
WxHxD: l2OOx2OOOx5OO
C O L O U R CABINET : KIESELGRAU RAL 7032
UMAS V P&V DISTRIBUTION BOARD
:i:t(t I
--
I
CIRCUIT Volt. [ Fuse
-
- u s e No.
1 1 BHS P I -P2, CABINET FAN F1 K1
2 SERVICE SOCKET F2
3 PLC/EMERGENCY CONTROL F3 K3
4 SUPPLY LIMIT SWITCHES INPUT CARD A20-A23 F4 K4
5 1 SUPPLY LIMIT SWITCHES INPUT CARD A24-A25 F5 K5
6 1 OUTPUT CARD NO. A1 0 ( 1 - 1 6 ) F6 K6
7 1 OUTPUT CARD NO. A 1 0 (1 7 - 3 2 ) F7 K7
8 1 OUTPUT CARD NO. A1 1 ( 1 -1 6) F8 K8
9 1 OUTPUT CARD NO. A1 1 ( 1 7 - 3 2 ) F9 K9
10 OUTPUT CARD NO. A 1 2 (1 - 1 6 ) F10 K10
11 OUTPUT CARD NO. A1 2 (1 7 - 3 2 ) F11 K11
I
12 1 SPARE F12 K12

13 1 BUZZER ALARM F13 Kt3
14 1 DIG. INPUT CARD F14 K14
15 BHS HIGH LEVEL F15 K15
16 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE U 1 0 - U 1 3 F16 K16
- - -
17 PULSE CATCH, FLOWMETERS F17 K17

18 PURGE VALVES. TRANSMITTERS F18 K18
19 1 PLC POWER MODULE U1.1A F19
20 1 PLC POWER MODULE U1.1 B F 20
Aukro Industrer AS
Yard no. 1 10
~- -
Oron. D.M. 26.03.03 Reference:
Rev. Dale Descriplion orow

Sc~'e
Contr.,&C;i
n p p r . e .
O '&(I
PC/<
i.5
1-j 3 E 3 5 6 0 0 1 / -20
3G175202. JM3271Ol
UMAS PUMP & VALVE CONTROL
Rolls- Royce
% Moin electronic cabinet, UN940
Eur. P% DISTRIBUTION BOARD
lzm3 Draw Rev. 7126
N-6293 LONGVA
NORWAY
no.
4G175201 - -210;=3E
Inlormotion contained herein is the property of Rolls-Royce hlorine AS ond r a y not b e copied or communicated to ony lhird parly,
or used. lor o o y purpost othcr lhon l h o l lor which it is suppl:cd nithou! I ~ cc
r p r c s s n.i:l~? c m s e n t 01 Rolls-Rovce hlai;nc AS.
U1.9 U1.10
x
u u
x
m
0 m
0
L.
L. u
L
z 5 z s:
0 0
0 0
CO-DF EO-FF
UITSUBISHI FRAME 2: 8 1/O art: ,0082
1 MlTSUBlSHl FRAME 3: POWER + 8 1/O i,t:wm~
Aukro lndustrier AS
Y o r d no. 110
oils P l / P 2
ClRCUlT 140. 1
LI.ICRC COI4IR.
To X 4 0 G2 S i l l 0
EMERGENCY CONTROLL O N
PLC/EM.CONTROL OUTP CARD A I O - A 1 2
C
I
1I
I !
7 A,
g K 2
INP.CARD NO. A 2 0 - A 2 3
v
I +EL
N P . CARD NO.A24-A25
OUTP. CARD NO. A 1 0 ( 1 - 1 6 )
OUTP. CARD NO. A1 1 ( 1 - 1 6 )

CIRCUIT NO. 8 &V DC
I I
-
x
2u
c
0UTP.CARD NO. A1 1 ( 1 7 - 3 2 )
1
0UTP.CARD NO. A 1 2 ( 1 - 16)
X
OUTPCARD NO. A 1 2 ( 1 7 - 3 2 ) --\-
F- -
-\-
.,
,w
I , rn
+EFil
SPARE
ri
CIRCUIT NO. 1 2 24V DC 6 JI.
BUZZER ALARM
ClRCUlT NO. 1 3
DIG. INPUT CARD

CIRCUIT NO. 14
BHS HIGH LEVEL
RELAY OUTPUT MODULE U 1 0 - U 1 3

ClRCUlT NO. 1 6
I
PULSE CATCH. FLOWMETERS
-
x
t m t
CIRCUIT NO. 1 7 2LV DC
-- + ri7
PURGE VALVES. TRANSIIITTCRS

CIRCUIT NO. I 8 24V DC
4.4
I -+
-
x
POWER MODULE U I . I A ZmE
CIRCUIT NO. 1 9 24V DC
+OFI~i*
POWER MODULE U l . l B
CIRCUIT NO. 2 0 24V DC
p aF20 I
INPUT Cord No. A 2 0
1 ~3 ( 2 6 pins 1
Card No. 1
VALVE VALVE VALVF VALVE VALVE
0 0
OUTPUT Cord No. A 1 0

0 0
/ YARD U S E I I/O CARD

AIBXBI
PLS
AI5YBI
INPUT OUTPUT
Volve no. Valve no. Volve no.

AlSXEl AlS"8l
VOlve nome Valve n o ' b r n OllnClosed I -
MlTSUBISiil MiTSUBlSHl
DIGITAL DIGITAL
INPUT U N l i OUTPUT UNIT
10 12 1 5 6
VI 4 113 14 16 1 7 8
V15
V16 6
'1
17
21
10
22
20
24
1
1
'112
9 10
-I
W7 7 125 26 28 1 13 14
W8 1293032 1516
X5'- I
B 00 9 OPEN 10 9 CLOSED
2 0 10 OPEN 3 0 10 CLOSED
5 0 11 OPEN 5 0 11 CLOSEO
A 0 14 OPEN 8 0 14 CLOSED V = VENTILATION
CO 1 5 OPEN DO 15 CLOSED
EO 16 OPEN , F 0 16 CLOSED
lI 1~ A v k r o l n d u s l r i e r AS
Yard P O . 110 R o 1s-
~ Royce UL!AS PUVP & VALVE CONTROL
M c i l eleclronic cabinet. ~ ~ 9 1 0
.-
. ~
.--
~ ~ - - - ~ - ~ .
uEi3
Rolls-Royce Marine AS W - i 1 9 ~l~::l.:
W:il'?C DlP4RAM ~- ~-
I h \ !,I.
~ ~
I ;:.'I,
- -
:li~~s~.i,!i
I Dept. Automation Longva - 1:or ;.;,Y
"' 3E356002 -
-. .~.
I -L ~- -
.-
e, 1 >2:c 1 2 < ~ c ;:,on
r Diax Appr 1 nlorrnol~on~ o n l o ~ n rherein
d ir Iha properly O I U O ~ I ~ - R O , C CI ' o l , n ~AS onJ -:I no: O L c o p e d 0, conlrnun,colcd l o oni ln.11: :",if
or urrd, lor onp purpare o l k r lhon lhal l o r * h k h I\ ,r ruppled ~ ~ l l > I'lc o ~ r! c p r c l ; li,llrn ronrrnl a, R a l l r - R q i c L ' 0 r . r ~ i',
s e e SH 01
VALVE VALVE
"0.29 "0.30
rzi r l i
YARD USE I/O CARD
CABEL SURVEY
Valve no Vdve no. Valve no.
' Y17'-
VTSUBISHl MITSUBISHI
DIGITAL DIGITAL
IN?UT UNIT OUTPUT UNIT
J
B 00 25 OPEN 1 0 25 CLOSED 1 8 0 25 OPEN
2 0 26 OPEN 3 0 26 CLOSED 9 0 26 OPEN
*O 2 7 OPEN 5 0 27 CLOSED I "0 27 OPEN L = U S E OIL
8 = WATER WLWSl/OillLL WATER
60 2 8 OPEN 70 2 8 CLOSED 1 a 0 28 OPEN R = BRINE
8 0 29 OPEN 90 29 CLOSEO I C 0 29 OPEN Y = VUD
A 0 30 OPEN 8 0 30 CLOSEO I DO 3 0 OPEN
C O 31 OPEN DO 3 1 CLOSEO 1 E 0 31 OPEN
F = FILL
D = DISCHARGE
V =
DF - YENTIG1:ON
DISCI-APGL/IILI
E 0 32 OPEN FO 32 CLOSED 1 F 0 32 OPEN
VXVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALV VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALV VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE q
See SH.01
EMERG. CONTROL
Cord No. 8
AISXBI
CABEL SURVEY VALVE LEGEND
1/0 CARD
1 1 , ,-
OUTPUT
1 615x81
Valve no.
INPUT
Yh.-
PLS
valve no.
I"~"~'OUTPUT
1
8
~ o v eno.
"10.-
'
1 I - 0
m
0
26
;
1V1ITSUBISHI
DIGITAL
N'UT UNlT
1 DIGITAL
1 A 0 0 17
2 0 18
OPEN
OPEN
10 17
3 0 18
CLOSED
CLOSED I
A 0 0 17
10 18
OPEN
OPEN /
OUTPUT UNIT
L, = MUD
BULK HANDLING SYSTEU
F = FILL V = VENTILATION
I D
A
= DISCHARGE
= LIE
DF = DISCHARCE/FILI
i --
A u k i o l n d u s l r i c r AS
Y a r d no. 110 R d IS-Royce U M S PUMP & VALVE C O N l R O L
k'oin c l cDIAGRAM
\WlllN(; clron;c C O ~ ; ~ CU~N .9 1 0
~- - ~ ~ Rolls-Royce Marine AS i,:x Lo~r,~,~,

VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE IALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VaLVi VALVE VALVE TI
EMERG. CONTROL
Card No. 1 0
/ YARD USE I I/O CARD
Volve no. Volve no. Volve no.
,\,syal
b'ITSU3ISHI
DIGITAL
INPUT U N I T
A :s y a I
'V'ITSUBISill
DIGITAL
OUTPUT UNIT
I A 0 0 1
2 0 2
40 3
6 0 4
OPEN
OPEN
OPFN
- .
OPEN
10 1
3 0 2
5 0 3
7 0 4
CLOSEO I
CLOSED
CLOSED
------
CLOSED
I
:/ 0 0 I
10 2
20 3
30 4
OPEN
OPEN
~ -
OPEN
1 14
8 0 5 OPEN 9 0 5 CLOSEO I 40 5 O?EN
A0 6 OPEN 8 0 6 CLOSEO I 5 0 6 O?EN
CO 7 OPEN DO 7 CLOSEO I 6 0 7 OPEN
EO 8 OPEN FO 8 CLOSED I 70 8 OPEN
XD'- I I
B 0 0 9 OPEN 10 9 CLOSED 1 80 9 O?EN
2 0 10 OPEN CLOSEO
4 0 11 OPEN
3 0 10
5 0 11 CLOSED I
9 0 10
A 0 11
OPEN
OPEN
L - BASE OIL
8 = WATER BALVIST/DRILL WATER
6 0 12 OPEN 7 0 12 CLOSEO 1 8 0 12 OPEN P = BRINE
8 0 13 OPEN 9 0 13 CLOSED I CO 1 3 OPE14
A 0 14 OPEN 8 0 14 CLOSED DO 14 OPEN
I F = FILL V = VENTILATION
CO 15 OPEN 0 0 15 CLOSED EO 15 OPEN
D = DISCHARGE DF = DlSCHIRtE/FlLL
E 0 16 OPEN , F 0 16 CLOSED I i O 16 OPEN A = AIR
I I or "red, lor .ny purparr olhcr I - . -. .. .. .

INPUT Cord No.A25
~2 ( 26 pins 1 ~3 ( 26 pins
EMERG. CONTRO
Cord NO. 1 1
See SH 01
VALVE VALVE VALVi VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VAlVF
0 0
/ XT2- OUTPUT Cord No. A 1 2
EMERG. CONTROI
Cord No. 1 2
YARD USE 1/0 CARD
CABEL SURVEY VALVE 1 INPUT

~25- 1 OUTPUT
~ , 2 -
VOIVC no.
26
AlSX81 A lSY81 Valve name Valve no!com. opm clo..d ' + - XE'- ' Y1 B'-
0 0
VITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI 28
DIGITAL DIGITAL
18 I 5 6 8 1 3536
I X P U T UNlT OUTPUT UNlT 19 1 9 1 0 12 1 37 38
'3940
DF I
DF2
20
21
22
'1
1 13 14 16
17
21
1 8 20 1
22 24 1
4 1 42
4 3 44
23 1 25 26 28 I4546
DF4 24 1 29 3 0 3 2 '4748
-I
L = EASE 01L
E = WATER aALLAST/DRILL WATER
-I BULK HANDLING SYSTEM

F = FILL
D = OISCHARCE
V = VENTILATION
DF = OISCHIRCE/FIL
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
.
-
i
L a .ol lnpul Card
PLC lOOlA
XlO* I
I
I
Xll
I l l l l l I I I l l I 1 I I l l I I I I I I I I I I
I I I
I I I I I I I I l l I l l I l l I I I I I I I I I I
I I I
I I I I I I I 1 I l l I l l I l l I I l l I I I I I I
I l l
l l l l l l I I I l l I l l I l l I I I I I I I I I I
I I I
l l l l l l I I I l l I l l I 1 I I l l l l l l l l
l l l
l I ! I I I I 1 I l l I l l I l l I I I I I I I I I I
I I I
I I I I l l 1 1 I l l I l l I l l I I I I I I I I I I
I I I
1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I l l I l l I l l I I I I I I I I I I
I I I
u
E 1 I I I I I I
1
I
1
I
1
I
1
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 1 I
I
I
l
I
I
l
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I l l l l l l l i l l 1
I
. ,
I
I
.
_
I
, I I I I
I
I
I
m
ffl
7
ci
a
S
7
e 0
A A m J J O_l 0
Y 'A
z2 *Y 5Y YY Y Ln
<
+ A ti:
+ a
L Y 5Y
L 5y
6 I
m
P
+
W
OI
a
C
ffl
P
- .- - -- .
Digilal I n p u l Cord / X15'
I
I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l l l i l l l l l l l l l l l l l l I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l l l l l l
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I l I I I I I I I I I I I I l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
I I I I I
1 L"'
.,
. ,
- - .~. - .. -.
4i I I RolIs-Rovce M a i n eleclronic c a b i n e t . UN 9 4 0
WIRING DIAGRAM
8
I vI 1 * i - - - - _ -1-----
& START
r--
:* 21
0 - - -I - _STOP
-----L--
I
NC WHCN I
PLC RUN
CD
0
no Y
0
NO 5
D
C
-C
TO UMAS ALARM PLANT
0 SYSTEM/POWER FAILURE ,
NC W H I M 0
PLC RUN 7
a
TO UMAS ALARM PLANT
NO X900-51/-52 51--?--
u
NO
r
0
(BUZZER ALARM)
02-: r
2
0
0
UI
I I C WHEN
PLC RUN , -INCREASE
----- - ---.
NO
-- I DECREASE
-------
m .
NO
I DECREASE
D
TO STARTER COMhlON
-- ---- --
MUD PUMP 2 ~- -O- - P-
NC W E N
STnRT- - -1-
I 47
5 '
% PIC RUN
L-5 2 - 7
CIRCUIT N o . 1 2 2 0 V AC 1 I
CIRCUIT No. 16 2 1 V DC +
-
TO STARTCR - - - ..-. -
DRlNE PIIMP STOP
( J S ~ - O ~ ~ J - - _1
I
-START
-- - - -I
TO STARTER -----
M U D AGITATOR I
TO STARTER -----
MUD AGITATOR 3 SLOP - -
7
TO STARTER -----
MUD AGITATOR 4
TO STARTER -----
TO STARTER -----
200-2 1 ' A 1 SP60
MlTSUBlSHl SW. I
Pulse C o t c h Module
5
I i .2C
220-23;
MlTSUBlSHl
ON
Anolog Input OFF
CH. 1 CH.2 CH.3 CH.4 CH.5 ON

OFF
+ sw.3 ON
OFF
0 0
PRESSURE PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
- +
TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER
PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
] ":-I.!
TRANSMITTER
PRESSURE
TRANShllTTER
PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
1
I
I
I
-
Orav
Aukro lndustrier AS
Yard no. 110
CON^.
>A
DM. Z ~ O J O J
,.,~.;p!, c:,
C-
//,-. ?
Rdemce.
J'.'32710'
<GI75201
1Rol ls-Royce
~ m m
D e ~ t Automation
. - Lonqva
:1-5293 LCNW
,
I
;
V U A S PUMP& V A L V E CONTROL
!.'sin e l e c t r o n i c cobinel. UN 940
WIillNG DIAGRAM
Drci;
-0
3 E 3 5 60 1 6
Rev 1
- =.1!/6
7 176
~-
~
C I R C U I T No. 18 24V DC +
P Y
SUCTION
WB/DW PUMP
( 4 m A = - Ibor, 2 0 m A = l . 5 b a i )
-
-
2
5
I+
corn
PRESSURE
FW CARGO PUMP
(omA=Obar. 20rnA= I 6 b a r ) -
II+
9
corn
SUCTION
F\Y CARGO PUMP
(4rnA=- 1 bor, 20rnA= 1.5bor) -
& I+
10
corn
PRESSURE
BRINE PUMP
(smA=Obar. 20mA=25bor)
-
-
II
13
I+
corn
SUCTION
-
12
BRINE PUMP -- +
I
14
(4mA=- l b a r . ZOmA= 1 . 5 b o r ) corn
PRESSURE
GI15 COMPRESSOR I
(irnh-Obor 2 0 m k lobar)
PRESSURE
GHS COMPRESSOR 2
(.lmA=Obor. ZOmA=lObor) -
18_ I +
20
corn
A A A b
8 7 10 9
1 RESISTOR 16
CONVERTE2
i-
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE

TRANSMITTER
'1
PRESSURE
TRANSMITER
PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER
~ u l t l +03.03.26 1 0 ~ 4 5Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e 1
2 >-
Main Order No.: 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 0rderna-r.e : A U m 110
Order No.: 210633#6&1 DeSCriptlon : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : A U W 110
Item No. : 70650 Description : MAIN ELEKTRONIC CABINET UN940 Quant : 1.0 PCS
Instr.10~ Ref Item no Description/Type No. Quantlty Unic Producer Dra.4.ref
..................................... ....................................
KORT PLClOOl-A (INPUT) MITS. 3.0 PCS UME

R0R-4.KT. FOR TAVLE 1937MM: 1.0 PCS SIEMENS
ART. NO. 670.010.01
FLATKRBELFESTE DER-038-0500/5C 3 . 0 PCS 53819
CABINET ES5205 1 . 0 PCS RITTAL
THERMOSTAT RITTAL SK 3110000 2 . 0 PCS P.ITTAL
REPLACE TYPE SK3112
FAN SK 3150 1 . 0 PCS RITTAL
AVSTANDSTK PLAST 0lOX3O.M+/3,3 1 8 . 0 pcs 4A146601
GRIP S22450+522468 1 . 0 PCS RITTAL
CONN.DSUB 37PIN HDF-20 7473031 5 . 0 PCS AMP
FILTER UTGKNG SK 3322.200 1 . 0 PCS RITTAL
KONTAKT IDC 40PIN IDSClOPK-TR 10.0 PCS FCI/BERG
FCI/BERG
KORT PLC1005 RELEKORT MITS. 3.0 PCS UME
PLUG SOCKET EMG 90-2SD-D/LA 1 . 0 PCS PHOENIX
CABLE PATCH 3M 4P UTP CAT.5 1.0 PCS M03E ELEKTRO
DRAWING POCKET RITTAL DINAd.: 1.0 PCS RITTAL
BEST.NO.:2514.000
MONT.PL. ES5205 P&V 4 KORT 1.0 PCS 3A126302
ETIKETT RR 3D 100x30 MM : 1.0 PCS BARRA
ETIKETT ROLLS-ROYCE 3D 100X30MM
TERMINAL BOX FL CATS 1.0 PCS PHOENIX
~ u l t i +0 3 0 3 . 2 6 1 0 ~ 4 5Engineer P a r t s l i s t s l d e I
76'
Order No.: 210633%&2 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 70653 Description : RELAY CARD 32 VALVE lCOIL Quant : 3.0 PCS
Instr.loc Ref Item nc Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer D r a w ref
....................................
...................................................
-------------.....-......~
KORT PLC1001-A (INPUT) MITS. 6 . 0 PCS UME

KORT PLClOO2-A (REL.O)l,ZA MIT 3.0 PCS UME
MOLINTING BRACKET RACK 4 . 0 PCS 4A044601
CARDGUIDE 360670 24.0 PCS RITTAL
pk. k 10 stk.
FLATKABELFESTE DEK-038-0500/5C 3 . 0 PCS 53819
CONNECTOR 26PIN IDS FEMALE 21.0 PCS FCI /BERG
IDC 622 FEMALE SOCKET W/STRAIN RELIEP
FLATKABELFESTE 038-0250/5C 6 . O PCS 54990
CONTACT BLOCK AT2 1.0 PCS SCHLEGEL
CONNECTOR 14PIN IDC FEMALE 2 4 . 0 PCS FCI/BERG
FCI/BERG 71600-014
RACK 6HEX160 DOUBLE 1.0 PCS RITTAL
KORT PLC1003 (EMERG)1SPO. 12.0 PCS UME
KEY SWITCH QXJSSAl4 (LOW) 1.0 PCS SCHLEGEL
BORDER-TE N0.360495 4 . 0 PCS RITTAL
p k , i 4 stk.
AVSTANDSTK PLAST 0lOX30.M?/3.3 66.0 PCS 4A146604
RAIL RITTAL 366384 FRONT 4.0 PCS RITTAL
pk. i 2 stk.
CONN.DSUB 37PIN HDF-20 7473031 9 . 0 PCS AMP
KONTAKT IDC 4OPIN IDSC40PK-TR 9 . 0 PCS FCI/BERG
FCI/BERG
PANEL FRONT N0DKJ.9KORT T.TEND 2.0 PCS 3A097006
KORTSTOPPER TANKTENDER RACK 2.0 PCS 3A117829
M U ~ ~ I03.03
+ .26 10:45 Engineer Partslistside 1
Main Order No. : 7125 Description : AUKRA 110

2%- Ordername : AUKRA 110
Order No.: 210633#6&3 Descrlption : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item NO. : 70658 Descrlption : FUSES RELAYS Quant : 1 .O PCS
Instr.loc Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer D r a w ref
RELAY UF3B 220V AC 1.0 PCS KUNKHE

RELAY UF3B 24V DC 3 . 0 PCS KrnKHE
FUSE 5X25MN 6 ,3A MEh 20 0 PCS SIJA
TERMINAL FUSE PJSI 6 1268834 60.0 PCS IIEIDMULLE?.
TERMINAL W/DIO WTR 1270861 2 . 0 PCS WZIDVULLER
INCLINOMZTER HL PLANA NS-45/PI 1 . 0 PCS METRIC
MA BESTILLES FOR EKSTERN E L ~ L E M O T S T ~ D
250 om
BRAKETT N0.1 INCLINOMETER 1 . 0 PCS 4A124701
BRAKETT N0.2 INCLINOMETER 1 . 0 PCS 4A124702
RELE PLC-R SC-24DC/1 16.0 PCS PHOENIX
2966223
ENDEPLATE FOR PLC-R,PLC-ATP BK 2.0 PCS PHOENIX
CONVERTER MOTSTAND 0-1K LM-50 1.0 PCS C-MAC
2 KAXALS
RELE-SOKKEL KUHNKE 2393 4.0 PCS KUNKHE
rlultl+ 03.03.26 10:52 Engineer Partslistside 1
Main Order No.: 7126 Description : AUKRA 110

Order N o . : 210633P6&4 Description : UMAS INTEG-TED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 70660 Description : PLC EQUIPMENT Quant : 1.0 PCS
Instr.10~ Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Dra,:,.ref
...........................................
PLC M POWER AlS63P: 2 . 0 PCS MITSUBISHI

PLC M EXP.CABEL AlSC03B: 2.0 PCS MITSUBISHI
PLC M FRAIYC AlS38B-E: 1 . 0 PCS MITSUBISHI
PLC M FRAilE AlS58B-S1: 1 . 0 PCS MITSUBISHI
?LC M COHMODUL AlSJ7iC24 3,' - 1.0 PCS MITSUBISfII
PLC M DIG IN MODUL AlSX81: 9.0 PCS MITSUBISHI
PLC M DIG OUT MODUL AlSY81: 5.0 PCS MITSUBISf!I
?LC M ANA INP. A1S68AD: 4 0 PCS MITSUBISHT
PLC M FRAIYC AlS68BSl: 1.0 PCS MITSUBISHI
?LC M PULS MODUL AlSP60: 1 . 0 PCS MITSUBISHI
PLS M CPU AZASCPU-S6O 1.0 PCS MITSUBISHI
PLS M KOM. AlSJ71E71N-B5T 1.0 PCS MITSUBISHI
/
68 p c . f i t t i n g s f o r C u - p i p e O.D. 8rnrn
CABLE INLET '
1 p c . f i t t i n g f o r C u - p i p e O.D. 1 O m r n (AIR SUPPLY)
A
WARNING!
ALL PIPES MUST BE CLEANED BEFORE CONNECTION
METALL CHIPS FROM CUTTING PIPES WITH i.e. HACKSAW
WILL CAUSE MAILFUNCTION IN VALVES INSIDE CABINET.
PREFERABLY USE PIPE CUTTER.
....
.... 1,
0 0
-....i.
0 1
-.
0 0
0 /
/,
1 0
\
/;;
- C a b i n e t : R i t t a l AE 1 1 1 4
'3 C5-
WxHxD: 1 0 0 0 x 1 4 0 0 x 3 0 0
IP 6 5
FREE SPACE IN FRONT : MIN. 5 0 0 m m
COLOUR : KIESELGRAU RAL 7 0 3 2
I
I Aukra lndustrier AS
Yard no. 110
b o w . D.M. 25.03.03 Reference:
iev. Dole Descriplion

Conlr. ' 'cD 351'1113
A p p r . ~ ~ & c ? , ~ ~ : >
3€356101/ -04
4Cl753Ol
UMAS TANKSOUNDING SYSTEM
Cmm
Rolls-Royce %
cur. Pro;.
Drow.
UN980
MEASURE SKETCH
Rev. 71 26
Rolls-Royce Marine AS N-6295 LONGW no. ..
-
-.
Dept. Automation - Longva -
NORWAY
I
4M.327201 1
- 21063~~!7
Informalion conlained herein i s l h c properly o f Rolls-Royce Marine AS and moy not be copied or communicolcd to any third porly.
or uscd, for any purposc o:hcr l h o n l h o l f o r which ;I is supplied vr;lhoul lhe express wrillcn c a n s t n l of Rolls-Roycc !.lcrine AS
- SERVICE INDICATOR
QUICK RELEASE BOYNET BOWL

OPEN ( TURN ANTI-CLOCKWISE )
CLOSE ( TURN CLOCKWISE )
WEIGHT: 3,2 kg
1 SHUT OFF VALVE Art. 66666 T64T-4GB-PI N MAX. AIR PRESS: 17 b a r

2 AIR FILTER Art. 66664 F64G-NNN-AD3 OPERATING TEMP.: - 2 0 - -I-65'C
3 OIL SEPARATION Art. 66648 F64H-NND-ADO AIR FILTER : 4 0 pm
4 BRACKET Art. 66665 Y64A-4GA-N2N DBL OIL SEPER. : 0 . 0 1 pm
- FILTER ELEMENTS Art. 6 8 0 2 3 / 68024 F64G / F64H
FILTER ELEMENTS TO BE CONTROLLED

EVERY 2. MONTH, REPLACED EVERY YEAR
C 18.01 01 ADD. ART. NO. Art. no. 6 6 6 4 9

B 06.09 96 CORR. FILTER TYPE
A 02.03 91 ADD. WEIGHT (SEE ART. N0.59767) Reference:
Rev. Dote Description
1RoIIs-Royce
cmm
N - 6 2 9 3 LONGVA
NORWAY
D r a%pro;.
Eur. w.
FILTER UNIT W
LAYOUT
4M070501
/ AUTO DRAIN
Rev.
c
--
C u t : A-A
.D.28
PLUG
YARD DELIVERY
SET ON FLANGE
NS 2 5 5 8 - 1 0 0 PN16
Weight / Vekt: 1 0 , 6 K g
Motriol : S t e e l
A r t . no.: 591 4 0
A 25.01 01 NEW TITLE SECTION Draw. H.K. 3 1 0 87 Reference:
Rev. Dale Desi,ipt~on Draw. Appr
cantr.:q ,.Ti--; l..+
~ p p r .<f"-.&/?~--
Scale AIRBELL
~ ~ m 2
Rolls-Royce 1 %
D r o ,.v
L114-2851-St
j R c v r - - -
Rolls-Royce Marine AS 1,!-6793 LONCVA
NORWAY
dew.: Automation - Lonava
Conn. for
0 1 2 m m Ss pipe
Conn. for
0 1 2 m m Ss pipe
Weight / Vekt: 6,5 Kg
% LFD104- 12SS-Ss
- Rolls-Royce
? r - ~ s z xLOXVA
NOf?.',"
cur proj.
0:avi.
LAY OUT
I I
~ e v .
Conn. for Conn. f o r
0 2 8 m m St pipe 0 2 8 m m S t pipe
( recommended ) ( recommended )
Weight / Vekt: 6,O Kc]
MATRIAL : S I S 2 3 4 3
Art. n o . 6 4 3 6 5 --
Draw. H.R. 30.10 97
mI Rolls-Royce
GI,m3
- -
1 Drrv1
Eur Pro]
2 PCS. FLOATING VAl VF
,
TFLI 0 4 - z a s t - a c ~ - S s
LAY OUT
,
2
N ~ 6 ~ 1~ 3G V A
dep.: Automation - Longva NOi?'~~,lY
Weight / Vekt: 2,3 Kg
.- MATRIAL : S I S 2 3 4 3
Art. no. 6 4 3 6 0
A 25.01 01 NEW TITLE SECTION 1
D r a w . H.R. 3 0 . 1 0 97 Reference:
Rev. Date Descriptton Appr 25/<s,- I
C ~ n t r . ~ ~ ~ ' ~ ~ ~ < 4X1141501
~ G - [
4M114511
/
,'
5':?77
15iOl
@ RolIs-Royce
Scale AIRBELL W/ FASTENING BRACKET
% LF104-12Ss-Ss
pro]. MY OUT ... -
m
Rolls-Royce Marine AS FI-6295 LONGVA
dep.: Automation - Longva FIORWAY
UMAS V TANKSOUNDING SYSTEM
TANKLIST
Customer : Aukra lndustrier AS Unit no. : 7126

Yard : 110 Order no. : 210633
Vessel name : Program : DSF614
Unit no. : UN980
I CPC 8. J 2 UICROT. I
PART LIST
Llanulaclurer/lypc Arl no
SIBR 5 x 2 5 5 3 1 10
FUSE CARRIER
FUSE 2A 5184 5 x 2 5 53107
FUSE CAPRIER
55214
5:YlCH
55218
BY255 52607
IN5617 51806
POIYER SUPPLY
65201
WESTERUO LID-(5 LY
U2 1 INTERFACE ADAPTER Q ~ / R S ~ J ~ - C RS 1 2 2 71511
YIESTERLIO M D - 1 5 LV
U2A - INTERPACE ADAPTER ~ 2 4 / ~ ~ 2 3 2 - c RS i 2 2 71543
UI 1 CPU - 80-90 EU~OIOQ cPc8 52928
UI I I S P I 0 ADAPTER Euralog 1lS/P10 56790
U5 I LIlCROlERI.IlNAL B u r r Brown TM25DO 53931

NOTE!
U6 I $18 ANALOG INPUT Eurolog 11S/M161-211 54926
SIGNAL CABLES MUST
BE SEPARATED FROM
HIGH VOLTAGE AND
XI , RELAY
RELAY SOCKET
Kuhnle U F 3 B 2 e V DC
2-345
52281
52282
BIG CONSUMERS ulr/uls - so uoou~c UAU 1 8 0 1010 60663
U16/U17 - SILOUETER I EBH DC 2 1 67478/626;

PART LIST
I I I I
1 ~ 7UB 1 2 1 115 DIGITAL OUTPUT I Euroloo 11S/0016-2~ I GGBZI
K2 , RELAY
RELAY SOCKET
Kuhnke U i 3 B 24V OC
2-345
52283
52282
SSCKLT 5374;
YI.Y3LI-2 3 VALYE
WESTINGHOUSE 66830
I ov
119 CHAIN
11 1
PART LIST
Ref. Oly ~escriplion Llonulo~turer/Type A~I. no
"9. UIO 2 118 DIGITAL OUTPUT Euroloo 11S/D016-2A 66927

I '"".
I I I 5"
I n,,
PART LIST
hlanuloclurer/Type A r t . no.
U I I . U12 66927
5/ Aukra 1ndus:rier AS /mGl 1 UMAS TANK SOUNDING SYSTEM
1 r,x"72 Rolls-Royce I"."

UN980
L'IIRING DIAGRAM
Xain Order No. : 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername : AUKRA 110
Order N o . : 210633#7&1 Descrrption : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 71131 Description : FRONTEND STANDARD EL PARTS Quant : 1.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref item no Descrlption/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw.ref
.--
IC X28HC64P-20 EEPROM 8K : 1 . 0 PCS AVNET

ERSTATTER UTG~TTART.NR 57143 X2816CP-12 2K EEPROM
WIRE OLFLEX 2X0.75MM2 7.0 M MILTRONIC
NB!
CONNEC.25PIN DSUB FEMALE FLATC 1 .0 PCS H%TTELl\XD
CARDGUIDE 360670 6 . 0 PCS RITTAL
pk. a lo stk.
RACK CARD LOCK 360711 3.0 PCS RITTAL
STREKKAVL. 3448-8D25 FOR CONNE 2 . 0 PCS 53797
CONNECTOR 26PIN IDS FEMALE 2 . O PCS FCI/BERG
IDC 622 FEXALE SOCKET W/STRAIN RELIEF
CONNECT.15PIN POWER SOC.CO 1.0 PCS POI.IERBOX
09062152811
IC 62C64ALP-10 RRM 8K 1.0 PCS ERICSON COMPON
ALTERNATIV : SHARP LH5164A-10L
PROFILE-Z 366394 2.0 PCS RITTAL
pk, a 2 stk.
MELLOMSTK DSUB 4-40 STANDARD 2.0 PCS AMP
CONNEC.25PIN DSUB MALE FLATC. 1.0 PCS HATTELAND
DISTANCE PIECE M5X50 SPA 02-B 2.0 PCS TORP
THERMOSTAT RITTAL SK 3110000 1.0 PCS RITTAL
REPLACE TYPE SK3112
CABINET EARTH 1.0 PCS SX9-339
BRAKETT FOR RS422 FRONTEND 1 . 0 PCS 4M082901
60 PA PLATA
PLATE-FESTE FOR VIDEO TILKOPL. 1 . 0 PCS 4M082902
BIWKETT RACK KANALFESTE 1.0 PCS 3A094501
BRAKETT FOR SAMMENKOBL. 2 RACK 2.0 PCS 3A094501
KABEL EURDLOG/IIS 400MM 1.0 PCS UA40257
FILTER UTGANG SK 3322.200 1.0 PCS RITTAL
PLUG MALE HDE-20 9-PIN D-SUB 1.0 PCS AMP
CONXDSUB 25PIN HDE-20 7454962 1.0 PCS AMP
CONN.DSUB 25PIN HDE-20 7454955 1 . 0 PCS AMP

745495-5
SKRUE DSUB 205980-1 AMP 1.0 SET AMP
COVER 25-PIN D-SUB 3357-6525 1.0 PCS 3M
COVERL 9-PIN D-SUB 3357-6509 1 . 0 PCS 3M
TERMINAL FUSE WSI 6 1268834 4.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
END PLATE WAP 2.5-10 1.0 PCS WEIDMULLER
TERMINAL WDK 2.5V 1268904 2 . 0 PCS WEIDMULLER
HUNNPLUGG V42254-82302-C963 1 . 0 PCS EUROPA
VIFTE SK 3322.021 24V DC 1.0 PCS RITTAL

MONTERINGS PL DATASOUND AElll4 1.0 PCS 3A126310
CONVERTER MD-45 LV 12-45V DC 1 . 0 PCS INCOM
ETIKETT RR 3D 100x30 MPl : 1 0 PCS BARRA
TTII(E1'T ROLLS-ROYCE 30 100X301.1~K
RELE SOKKEL KUMNKE 2393 2 . 0 PCS KUNKHE
MulCii 0 3 0 3 . 2 6 12:18 Engineer Partslistside 2 42-
Order No. 21063387&1 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. 71131 Description : FRONTEND STANDARD EL PARTS Quant : 1.O PCS
Instr.loc Ref Item nc Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer D r a w ref
. - ........ ..................................................................................
RACK 3HEX160 RITTAL NR.363026 2.0 PCS RITTAL

PLUG 2.5/18-ST-5.08FRONT 1 4 . 0 PCS WEIDMULLER
150116
62721 KABEL EUROLOG/IIS 330MM 6 . 0 PCS UA40257
62724 POWER KABEL 5V EUROLOG/IIS 7 . 0 PCS UA40258 1 ?.? . :.:ODUL
66927 MODUL-OUT IIS/D016-2A VER.2 6 . 0 PCS MICROTRONICA

*3 PR.RACK 53006 MOUNTING BRACKET RACK 6 . 0 PCS 4A044601
l.PR.65207 62658 DEKSEL-SV FORDELING LEXAN 1 . 0 PCS 3M112001
CAB 54588 CABINET AE1114 1.0 PCS RITTAL
CAB 60570 SKINNE-ST0TTE FOR SKAP AE1114 1 . 0 PCS 4M134501
CAB 61004 GRIP S22450+S22468 1.0 PCS RITTAL
F3. F-1 53107 FUSE 5X25)LY 2 ,OA MED 2.0 PCS SIBA
NP 55214 CONTACT BLOCK AT2 1 . 0 PCS SCHLEGEL
NP 55218 PUSHBUTTON QXJliA BLACK 1 . 0 PCS SCHLEGEL
U1A 65207 MODUL-ANALOG IIS/PW32-1A 1.0 PCS DATA RESPONS
U5 54924 BRAKETT FOR MICROTERMI.TM-2500 1.0 PCS 4A099201
ordrestr.30 stk
CABINET DIODE BY255 1 . 0 PCS ITT SH.01
CABINET FUSE 5X25MM 6.3A MED 2 - 0 PCS SIBA SH.01
CABINET RELAY UF3B 24V DC 2.0 PCS KUNKHE SH.01
CABINET T W S O R B E R 1N 5647/6285 1.0 PCS SCHIVE SH.01
CABINET POWER EWI-210-CV/6 5V30A 1 . 0 PCS POWERBOX SH.01
CABINET IC 27C256-15 EPROM 32K 1 . 0 PCS MITSIBUSHI SH.01
CABINET CARD CPCB EUROLOG 1.0 PCS NETRON SH.01
NOT C-MOS ! ! ! !
CABINET ADAPTER IIS/HPlO-1A 1.0 PCS DATARESPONS SH.01
CABINET TERMINAL-MICRO TM-2500 1.0 PCS BURR-BROWN 5E115201
CABINET MODULE INPUT IIS/AI161-2A 1 . 0 PCS DATARESPONS SKOl
Multii 03.03.26 11. 3 Engineer Partslistslde I
Main Order No. : 7126 : AUKRA 110

Order No.: 210633#7&2 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 71132 Description : FRONTEND STANDARD PIPE PARTS Quant 1.0 PCS
I n s t r . 1 0 ~ Ref Item no. Jescription/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer Draw.ref
................................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-
..-.
-.-
.-.. . . . .
-.-.-
.-..
-.-.. . -
PLUGG I / < " MS 3.0 PCS 53697

KUPL.-HJZTIG 6 1 / 8 3.0 PCS MECMAN
KUPL.-VI>yKEL 8215-08-1/4" 8 . 0 PCS MECMAN
KUPL.-R3D 8235-08-100 1.0 PCS MECMAN
P!IPPEL 1/1 N P T UTV.-l/L R I W . 30 PCS GM FITTINGS
KUPLING-OVERG. MS.R1/Gu-08NYL 1 .o PCS cA115401
BRAKETT O N 5 WAY RESISTOR 1 . 0 PCS 3A124017
BRACKET 3iTRKERT3LOCK 3.0 PCS 3A124018
B U K E T T FOR DATLSOUNE 2 . 0 PCS 3A149701
GJENNOMFSXING W334 4-4 NYLON 1 .o PCS PARKER
2 muttere pr. gjennonfnrlng.
PLUGG FX234 (WfLONR@Ii) 1.0 PCS PARKER
TETNINGS RING FOR MAIXOMETER: 1 . 0 PCS UNICARDAN
FOR MANOYETERFORSKRUKING DKI 1/4"
NIPPEL F4PB4-1/4 NY 4 -R1/4 5.0 PCS PARKER
KUPL.-VINKEL C64SPB4-1/8 4-1/8 7 . 0 PCS PARKER
KUPL. - T JPB4 FOR NY 4 7 .o PCS PARKER
KUPL. - T J3B6 FOR NY 6 2.0 PCS PARKER
KUPL.-PLUGG VSTI R1/8-ED 6 . 0 PCS ERMETO pi FLOW/VE
VENTIL-Si(J0T 312-1003 4.0 PCS BURKERT
HYLSE-AVSTAND 010x15 DATASOUND 8.0 PC5 3A071601
DISTANCE PIECE X10X50 DATASOU. 3.0 PCS 3A071601
HYLSE-AVSTAND 010x85 DATASOLINE 3.0 PCS 3A071601
BRACKET FLOWMETER. BROOKS 3.0 PCS 3A083901 (SKINNE)
B!ZACKET CABINET M O W . BROOKS 6 . 0 PCS 4A083902
115 PR.PLATE
PRESSURE SW 0166-407-03-1-027 1.0 PCS SUCO
APEN KO~AKT
10 59088 VALVE M/50340/7 1.0 PCS NORGREN
11 68555 VENTIL-BLOKK. X9-190.FOR DSF 1.0 PCS SX9-190
12 53997 MANOM 8F3 96x96 R1/2 0-10000MM 1.0 PCS MONITROLS
13 51383 VALVE 5341080000 1.0 PCS WESTINGHOUSE
lXNP 50367 S K I V E R - W E R U G M16A4 1.0 PCS KOPPERNRS
162214
lXNP 53230 BULKH. COUPL. P-GSV 10L 16X1.5 1.0 PCS WALTERSCHEID
2 52333 VALVE REGULATOR R07-200-RNKG 1 . 0 PCS NORGREN
Leveres med festernutter
m N O M 0-63AR 063 R1/4"B+BEND 1.0 PCS VDO
STBPSEL SfP15737 FOR MAGNETVET 3 . 0 PCS NORGREN
VALVE 5772080220 W/PILOT 3 . 0 PCS REXROTH
TRANSMITTER 3051 CG3 A22AlAI: 1.0 PCS ROSEMOUKT
TRANSMITTER 3051 CD2A22AlBBII: 1.0 PCS ROSEMOUVT

KOMPLETT VARE NR3051CD2A22AlBB411L4
KUPL.-KRYSS 8227-08-080F.NYL 1 . 0 PCS MECMAN
i.lilTTCR-iL>>F'SELCll2X1/2" PIS 1 . 0 PCS DR4 12G
NIPPZI. LOD3iS 03/16'' 18 I N S O U N 1 . 0 I'CS UC*1305
IIYLSE-AVSTRND Bl2X170-M6+MG 5 . 0 PCS 4A071203
Multii 03.03.26 11: ; Engineer P a r t s l i s t s i d e 2
q4L
Main Order No.: 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername : AUKRA 110
Order No.: 210633#7&2 Description : UNAS INTEGRnTED Ordername : AUKRA 110
Item No. : 71132 Description : FRONTEND STANDARD PIPE PARTS Quant : 1.0 PCS
Instr.10~ Ref Item no. Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer D r a w ref
----------.~------....~-....
KUPL.VINKEL 8215-06-180 5 . 0 PCS MECMAN

KUPL.-RED LRED-0608 FOR.NYL 6 . 0 PCS MECMAN
NIPPEL-AVSLUTNING LANK 06-14 1.0 PCS MECMAN
B2AKETT FOR TR.BRYTER SUCO: 1.0 PCS 4A082402
SUCO 0166C07031027
N? PEWEL DATASOUND N0DP.1-2 TRSM. 1.0 PCS 3A071202
NP NIPPEL RETT R1-4-M5 NN2OOlO 2.0 PCS BURKERT
POS 1 4 VALVE 5630700100 1 . 0 PCS WESTINGHOUSE
POS 1.1 VRIDER SORT. PANELM. VM-34A 1.0 PCS SMC
POS 14 HYLSE-AVSTRND 010 05.5 8 2 . 0 PCS 4A146603
TR1/2 KUPL.-T LTK-08 2121108000 5.0 PCS M E C W
XXXXX VALVE-S. 3/2 DATAS. BL.8 : 1 . 0 PCS BURKERT
VALVE BLOCK W/ 8 VALVES, FITTINGS AND CABLE.
XXXXX VALVE-S. 3/2 DATAS. BL.10: 6.0 PCS BURKERT
VALVE BLOCK W/ 10 VALVES, FITTINGS AN8 CABLE.
GJ.F@RING TET 7/10C 4.0 PCS THORSlPIAN
B W K E T T FOR MUGNETVENTIL W . H . 2 . 0 PCS 4A102301
Multii 01.03.26 11: 3 Engineer Partslistside 1
4T-
Elaln order No. : 7126 Description : AUKRA 110 Ordername : A m 110
Order No. : 210633#7&3 Description : UMAS INTEGRATED Ordername : AUW 110
Item No. : 71682 Descrlption : FRONTEND MEASLRING POINTS Quant : 68.0 PCS
Instr.10~ Ref Item nc Description/Type No. Quantity Unit Producer D r a .ref
...
SKIVER-UNDERLAG M12 A4 6 8 . 0 PCS KOPPERNBS

162212
O-RING 7.65X1.78 136.0 PCS 51180
PALVING-RING CU 10.OX13.5X1.0 6 8 . 0 PCS 51220
VALVE H-1/8 A/1 3324 6 8 . 0 PCS FESTO
aACKNUT R 1/4" NT=17MM ii=5MiM 6 8 - 0 PCS HEGNA
KUPL.-MUTTER 08X14X1.5" MS 68.0 PCS ERMETO
MUTTER-IWPSEL 06X1/4" NYL . R 0 R 68.0 PCS 4A185701
KLEMRING D8LS MS 6 8 . 0 PCS ERMETO
KLEllRING 06MM FOR NYLONRDR MS 6 8 . 0 PCS <A146501
KUPLING-HULLSKRU 1631-01-1/8" 6 8 . 0 PCS TESS MDRE
GJ.F@RING 06-08 1/4R MS G8.O PCS 4A071501
FLOPMETER 2700/AIBIZ9B10 68.0 PCS BROOKSMITE
NIPPEL F4PB4-l/8 NY 4- R1/8 68.0 PCS PARKER
TERMINAL LIST U N 9 1 x . 8
T'!:0 SOCKET
POWER SUPPLY TO OPERATOR STATIOPI
A
-
OUTLETS FOR
'
POWER SUPPLY
TO UlbAS V
IN
OPERATOR STATION
ONLY
, ,
VOLTAGE \VATCH ALARE.4 OF SUPPLY AUDIBLE A L h R l l FRO!?
TO UMAS V OPERATOR STATIONS UIAAS V PUMP AND VALVE
CONTROL SYSTEM
- --
I ! ART N O 67671 I UldAS V AVTOlidATlON SYSTEld
- T
~ -~ IIlXldlNkL L l i i OPEWATOR SIATION
i i 2: 2 ; 3; j~~-~:-, -cr ;. :. :-;.ld
-..
J?X CIRCUIT
-- -. DIACRA!d
.- - - - FLS
-
. -
~ ~ ~
,,
1
,
r"": .- 1,;.?J ;cc?,,: . -:.
. . . ,,,. ' -. >P oron J ~ U2; '26 98 Fdmcnce .,rcv,
Rolls-Royce Marine AS o!% ,'c
.". I
33.e i ?es.--,r',cr
---
.
..
dcp.: Automation - Longva
.!-LX:
;:OW:,Y 3E1 556 1 9 -
PROFIBUS CONNECTOR
TO BEE CONNECTED TO 9-PIN I
PROFIBUS D-SUB ON LAUER PANEL I
I DISPLAY UNIT (Lauer Panel)
I
I + I
NOTE!
YELLOVI' PROFIBUS CONNECTOR
I
I
ONLY TO BE USED ON THE LAST
BUZZER I NOISE
SIJPRESSOR
I
II
PERIPHERAL PANEL ON THE PROF1 BUS
LCD I l i i E N S l M I LINE '
'
UN923.1 TERMINAL LIST
z3
OVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION
::ITCH BETWEEN IIAIN VOLTAGE WATCH OF t

AND BACKUP SUPPLY 2 4 V DC BACKUP SUPPLY
X923.1
200
EARTH CABLE LENGTH 0.5 METER
I I
1
I I I
EARTH CABLE LENGTH 0.5 METER
: 2:.0:.02 Chanqed bacw? supp!y conneclian TM

m
1 0903.02 ?,:>'xed volloqe I l e r 23 1M
: I-
2: O l ::
; C O - ~ C I ~ n l ~ ? r' x~ d ~ i ~ JPU I A R T N O . 69267 I UMAS A U I O M A I I O- N S-
Y S I-
I-M .
1
~-d- -- --
4 C33ii3 !o;c on 8 1 ' ! a ~ i;X C30
Rolls-Royce 1I.RMINAL L l S l B A C K U P S U P P L Y UN92.5 I
! W l ? l N G DIAGRAM,
,i !-
'
i / 2JCjS3 I\!o:loqe ;:a:ch o i 2:X DC bocup s u ~ p l yuddec D~OW. JPU 22.0598 Rehnce:
Rolls-Royce ~ a r i n ~
ASe
!".I Da:e ) Oercrip:;a, Drcw.
rnNFIGURATION OF DEADMAN R E S E T PANEL
c r
U
a U
- -
Z a
- -
n
g
L
k
O
z
0
Q
JP1: L A M P T E S T u
a+
5
+
xK 6
7
,
n
JP1: STRA?
J P l : STRA?
BETWEEN 1 - 2
BETWEEN 2 - 3
INTERNAL (KEYI) DEFAULT
EXTERNAL
>;
- 3
?
Y)
: !2
Y 1 P
LL
. .?
N +
OJ 3 W
2 Z Z Z m w
>c ,c n
J P 2 : FREQUENCY ( B U Z Z E R ) JrY Ea L -
JP2: STR4P BETWEEN 1 - 2 800 H Z
L C
L Z
3 W W
C W C J 3N W
Y) %<
W U P P Q r n C L J
JP2: STRAP BETWEEN 2 - 3 1240Hz
J P 3 : V O L U M E (BUZZER)
JP3: STRAP BETWEEN I - 2 HIGH
J P 3 : STRAP IILTWEEN 2 - 3 LOW
JP4: O S C i L L A T O R ( B U Z Z E R )
J P 4 : STRAP BETWEEN 1 - 2 INTERNAL DEFAULT
JPS: STRAP BETWEEN 2 - 3 EXTERNAL
@ K E Y PAD UME PPS 1014
I EV:DC: POWER SUPPLY

LAMP TEST (INTERNAL) CONNECTIONS:
RESET BUZZER FUNCTICN 1 RESET-FANEL
--- 1
DEADMAN SYST. ONCSWITCH) 2 4 V DC + POWER SUPPLY I 1 1
DEADMAN SYST. OFF(SW1TCY) ".
SPARE SWITCH RESET BUZZER
DEADMAN SYST. OFF SWITCH
BUZZER(1NTERNAL)
DEADMAN SYST. OFFCLAMP) RESET BOX
DEADMAN SYST. ON SWITCH I
DEADMAN SYST. OFF INDICATlON
DEADMAN SYST. 0NCLAMP)RESET BOX
DEADMAN SYST. ON(LAMP)ON/OFF BOX
DEADMAN s Y x T . ON !NDKATION i
!
DEADMAN SYST. OFF(LAMP)ON/OFF BOX

ALARt',(LAMP)
N- 6293 LONGVA. k'ORWAY

--
.: ',
:
~ ^.".i.
..-, . '
. c ~ ~ a "c,r,
r j x:.:
'j JSU
UldAS AUTOldATlON S f S l E M
BUZZER PANEL
iLC
.
... , . , ..
, :.: C ~ T ~ C .n~ : ~~ . ,--,:,',eq GO3 Rolls-Royce Marine AS 1 . - r x .r.w;
cs7.r
I,:V D C . ~ 8 o ~ ~ ~ ~ , ~ : ~ ~ ~ dep.: Automation - Longva
- Rolls-Royce
1
Alarm List 7126 ' "MAS Alarm System
ALARM LIST
Project no.: 7126
Aker Aukra AS
Yard no. 110
Date Issued Status Rev.

02.06.03 TAA First issue 00
16.06.03 TAA Added a l m s 3.8 and 3.18 01
Rolls-Royce Marinc As
dcp.: Automation Longva Page 0.1
mm3
RolIs-Royce -
Alarm List 7126 D UMAS Alarm System
Abbrevations:
Prefix notation: Postfix notation:
P Pressure E Element
S Speed H High
U Stand by start I Indication
V Viscosity L Low
X Abnormal and miscellaneous (electrical) S Switch
Z Position T Transmitter
I I x (Converter I
Example:
PIAH Pressure indication and alarm high.

PIAL Pressure indication and alarm low.
PAH Pressure alarm high.
DPAH Differential pressure and alarm high.
PAL Pressure alarm low.
TIAH Temperature indication and alarm high.
TIAL Temperature indication and alarm low.
TAH Temperature alarm high.
TAL Temperature alarm low.
LAH Level alarm high.
LAL Level alarm low.
LIAHL Level indication with high/low alarm.
VAH Viscosity alarm high.
VAL Viscosity alarm low.
FAL Flow alarm low.
XA Abnormal and miscellaneous alarm (Electrical).
Rolls-Royce M:lrine As
dcp.: Automation 1.ongva Page 0.2
mm3
RolIs-Royce
Alarm List 7I26 1.0 3 UMAS Alarm System
T ~ Nos.
E :
The number before the full stop indicates to which system the alarm belong to. The number after
the full stop indicates the serial no.
Blocking and action groups

Cooling water system
Fuel oil system
Lube oil system
Bilge systems
Exhaust gas & compressed air system
Electrical system
Miscellaneous systems
UMAS system failure
2.001 PIAL Fuel oil pressure

(Low fuel oil pressure wlindication)
dcp.: Automation Longvs Page 0.3
1RolIs-Royce
lxm3
Alarm List 7126 / UMAS Alarm System
Display eroups:
MAIN ENGINE 1 PORT

----------
----------
MAIN ENGINE 2 STBD.
EXHAUST TEMPERATURES MAIN ENGINE PORT
COOLING WATER SYSTEM
LUBE OIL SYSTEM
EXHAUST TEMPERATURES MAIN ENGINE STBD.
PROPULSION SYSTEM PORT
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PROPULSION SYSTEM STBD.
BILGE / CARGO SYSTEM
MISCELLANEOUS
THRUSTERS 1 AUX. ENGINE
SYSTEM FAILURE
Bridxe eroups:
AUTO STOP MAIN ENGINE 1PORT

REDUCE LOAD MAIN ENGINE 1PORT
REMOTE CONTROL FAILURE PORT
AUTO STOP MAIN ENGINE 2 STBD.
REDUCE LOAD MAIN ENGINE 2 STBD.
REMOTE CONTROL FAILURE STBD.
REMOTE CONTROL FAILURE SIDE THRUSTERS
COMMON ALARM
----------
----------
SYSTEM FAILURE
Cabin nroups:
SHUT DOWN
REDUCE LOAD
COMMON ALARM
dcp.: Automation Longva Page 0.4
Km33
RolIs-Royce
Alarm List 7126 10') UMAS Alarm System
block in^ groups:

1. M.E. 1 PORT INTERLOCK ALARM (O.1BG)
2. M.E. 2 STBD. INTERLOCK ALARM (0.2-BG)
3. M.E. 1 PORT CHARGE AIR TEMP INTERLOCK ALARM (0.3-BG)
4. M.E. 2 STBD. CHARGE AIR TEMP INTERLOCK ALARM (0.4-BG)
dep.: Automation Longva Page 0.5
PRINTED: 19.GE.2003 A M R M LIST
CLOCK: 09.57 Akor Aukra AS
VERSlhV'7126.01 Yard no. 110
ALARM AMRM ALARM SENSOR UMAS CONNECTION TEXT TEXT EO CONNECTION

D1SPLP.V BRIDGE CABIN DEWY INTER- SETPOIHT REMARKS VO NORMAL ALARM CLA
GROUP GROUP GROUP (SEC) LOCKED SUPPLIER TYPE SUPPLIER R4NGE UNIT SIGNAL UNIT TERM UNIT TERM UNIT TERM NR BOXNR. SOCI
TAG NO TEXT (REF) LOW I HIGH NAME CODE NO NO NO NO. NO NO
~. . .
DY! rplrechannd m d u I e
jklal UN13 OdMI
- - ~. .
a S W o u l splrorhannd mdulaUN13 OdDll 1305 Mrmal Nrrm
~~ -
Nalm a:pt hl!&hl U r n 0 OniOll Inlanal Norm.
I s 78>
... --
.~ -- --- -- -
73_m i Y Y m a ~ L S m U m
-- - --
;24V D C S U W U N m l
RRMAulommbo 0dM1 b l m n l Nnrm.
,6 REV\Y
-~ ~ --LOW? -- D#g#glnp$__
B,3 ; W.&nSysllm On-Snlrh RRM Au!omolmn OdMl Blanal Chmnd.
,6 SWITCH
-, --
S"rlrma,-Sn!ih
,6 82_m ;w h n
- ------ ~
-.
B13 ~ h n s y r Rm6ol-Snlch
t 0 RRMAvlomalvln
I6 SWITCH
~
--,
Wd splrochmnol m d u l o UN13 1312 Mmol Narm
~- --,
,6693
-
nOVACSUPFIIUN914
--
16
-
16
-
3
.
-
5
-
I5 1313 Mimsl Fallvre
W a sparachrnnd mdulsUN13
-.
; OmC4l 1314 Mrmd Nam
,6 ! U M 14-h Sn!ch F a . 1 ~ RRMAularnaton 0"Nm BlandNnrm.

REMY
~
k ! P L
W a l S p l r B L b r n n d module UN13
~
c6BBX/\ l?YiVACSuppiyU~II 130 19 1317 Normal Fallulo

,
-~ - --
,, >
, 24V DC SYpp*
,
PP:* maim Pan&.
16 91-m
2av cc %@I u r n
~~
923
-
23OVAC %myU M
--
,6
~.~
Tmpl.Llln m n o l l UN9W
-~ -.
0 ILK
I.IE i p s siS%iG---
- - -.- ---
Z,,_P*H :mIPS FO L D u a p RRMEB ( 1 2 W DANFOSS OdGil U r n

-1 w -. --
RRMEO(1SLO) DANFOSS OTJCXI 14A U r n
.- . ~ . ~
,
~
7-LIIL LEI PS L u b a l SUmpLad 30 RRMEO(OIL0)

GEMS
Onial
~ ~ ~
~,~
ME! P5 so, L ~ b aPump
l Fr:l",o CwGI l4.4 -10 U r n
38>
~ -~ -
'LEI PS % ! q S y r 2 4 V X P o r a Fa I RRMEB IPLC) OdOl1
~~ ...-- ~ ~- - -- ~ - - ~ ~ .. ...
03~yA I.*, PSD/~rpQJiiu:or,op RnM EO (PLC) OdMI
.. - - ~- .-.-
IS1 PS Sr'lly Sys T r c b S p Fa81
~~~ ~ ~ ~
oaf
~
mr* No,msi urn^ ~
-. --
,,,_, ~
,WE1PS S r 1 4 S j r Emerp s o p Brdgm
. .. ~
OdMI l4A -14 U r n
-~-
O,_U h8EI PSVi<r~lii&rgsFail
--- . --
1- 0031 I4A -17
- ~ ~
--
D g l d rparachannd mduleUNI4
! -
. . ...~.
;LWd s p s r h a n n d mduleUIII4 OwCil
Rol!s.Rop Marine As
dop.: Aulornallon-Lonova
Page I
PRINTED: 19062W3 ALARM LIST
CLOCK: 09 57 Aker Aukra AS
VERSION 7126L01 Yard no. 110
Rolls.Roye8 Marlno As
dep.: Automalion-Longva
Page 2
PRINTED- 19 062003 ALARM LIST
CLOCK: W 5 7 Aker Aukra AS
VERSIOV712601 Yard no. 110
ALARM ALARM ALARM SENSOR UMAS CONNECTION TEXl TEXT EOCONNECTION

DISPLAY BRIDGE CABIN DELAY INTER SETPOINT REMARKS UO NORMAL ALARM CLASS
GROUP GROUP GROUP (BEC) LOCKED SUPPLIER TYPE SUPPLIER RANGE UNIT SIGNAL UNIT TERM, UNIT TERM UNIT TERM. NU. BOX NR. SOCIET'
TAO NO TEXT (REF) LOW I HlOH NAME
. CODE NO NO NO NO NO NO
96_w SimnThr Sys T m * L a d OMOll ,511 30 1 158 30 11530 M m d Lodwd UN9W

. .-
I 97 Porn P w n l h r Sa*o Chi F t h n Press I5 7 UNLMO
-- -- -
.---
P a n i h r S y s P a a Fa ura hYal ' ~ lun L ~
kldgel ~'5A ~ 32
~ ~ ~ I T 8 32 1532 Mlrnsl Felvra U W
--
97_11 P a n i h r a i a b 3 Tomp Omf Narm"",L lhruslarmm
lSA UN900
- -- ULSEIN
SiunThr U a r m Un I h a Fa u l e RRMPROP OMM1 Na!rn.",L Lhrulla rmm
ISA Id
- ULSEIN
ap W spamchannd modvlsUNl5 CmW1
PRINTED. 180E 2 W 3 A U R M LIST
CLOCK. 09.57 Akor Aukra AS
VERSION: 7126L01 Yard no. 110
ALARM ALARM ALARM SENSOR UMAS CONNECTION TEXT TEXT EOCONHECTION

DISPLAY BRlMiE CAWN DELAY INTER- SETPOIM REMARKS UO NORMAL ALARM CLASS
I GROUP GROUP GROUP (SEC) LOCKED SUPPLIER TYPE SUPPLIER RANGE UNIT SIGNAL UNIT TERM UNIT TERM. UNIT TERM. NR. BOX NR. SOCIET
TAG NO TEXT (REF) LOW I HIGH NME CODE NO. NO. NO NO NO NO.
,1b"S * m U O V h . Burbv I Eanh 1 3 1603 Mlmrl Alvm

85>
I M n S d U O V Wx B u a r 2 Eanh
--
I,
8 1 3 1 5 ~ I RRM
ALITOMATION
RRM 4 1604 Mrmol Alarm
UNXX)
U r n
66JVI
-. -- - ALITOWTlON -
&Ldrplmchannd mduleUN16 I 1 ,I 8
o m 1
, I-1605,
Mrmal Alarm I
8 3 5 RRM Om1 ,611 -27 168 27 1627 Mmnl Alarm

-- I " AcrrOMATKJN
wD_U\ h l u n S * m V o l l r p Lbn B u s h 2 II 8 3 5 RRM MI !LA -28 168 1628 Mrmnl Alarm
ALITOMATION -- 1 2 8
LC"" SM Fr(q2- LlYn Bush, i 8 3 5 RRM WOn 16A -29 1
1:
16s 29 1629 Mlrnal Alarm
661U
i UmSxCdF8oqu~WsnBu~~2 !I 8 3 5
ALITOM4TION
ARM M I LA 30
-- 1 3C 1630 h d Am
l
-
- AlrrOUATtDN -
. .
hbnSrtdUOV W n B u h 1~ a n hI r 6 3 5 RRM MI 16A -31 3, 1631 Mimnl Alarm
I\rnMATION
~ ~ ~ 8 3~ 5 & AIR M l h---u
W I 2 16A -32 ~ 168 1
~ 32 1632 ~
Mrmsl Alarm ~ ~
. --
, ~1-71--1-- ,-.168 r~ AIJOMATION
--
-~rsa -3
~
splrechmnd ,mute UN16 -,

PRINTED: 19 06 2003 AViRM LIST
CLOCK: 09'57 Akw Auhm AS
VERSION7126.OI Yard no. 110
ALARM ALARM ALARM SENSOR UMAS CONNECTION TEXl TEXT €0 CONNECTION

DISPLAY BRIDGE CABIN DELAY INTER. SETPOINT REMARKS UO NORMAL ALARM CLAS!
GROUP GROUP GROUP (SEC) LOCKED SUPPLIER TYPE SUPPLIER RANGE UNIT SIGNAL UNIT TERM. UNIT TERM UNIT TERM. NR BOX NU. SOClEl
TAG NO TEXT (REF) LOW I HIGH NAME CODE NO NO. NO NO. NO NO
I I I I I I I I I I I I
PRIMTED: 19.06 2M3 ALARM LIST
CLOCK: 0 9 5 7 Aksr Aukla AS
VERSION. 7126_01 Yard no. 110
PRINTED: 19.062W3 ALARM LIST
CLOCK: W 5 7 Aker Auhra AS
VERSION. 7lZ6.Ol Yard no. 110
A M q M ALARM ALARM SENSOR UMAS CONNECTION TUT TEXT EO CONNECTION

DISPLAY B R I N E CAQlN DELAY IWER- SETPOINT REMAQKS UO NORMAL ALARM CLASS
. '
. . I GROUP GROUP GROUP (SEC.) LOCKED ' ' SUPPLIER . TYPE , .. SUPPLIER
R U l:' G E
UNIT SIGNAL ' .
. .' '
.. ' UNIT TERM. UNIT TERM. UNlT TERM. NR. . ,
. .
. :. .- , BOXNR. . SOCIEP
TAGNO T E X T ! (REF.) LOW I HIGH ' NAME . : ' : , ."CODE' NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. . . ,. . / , , ~
.. .. .
,. . .. . .. , . ,. ..,: .
.-.. .. . , . ,
.. . .
. . .. .
, ,
.
, h a % r w e c h a n r r i m o d " ! ~UN20
!ana%rparachannd modulaUIr20
~.
,9_TLW P s %an b a w 8 T-P
-,
p a * oprprochmnd rnod"l.UN21
- .~
SB Y i l b BouiwJ T m p
R o I l s . R ~ pMarine As
dep.: AUlOmalion.LOngYa
Page 8
PRINTED 19.06 2W3
A!ARM LIST
CLOCK W 57
Akor Auhm AS
VERSION 712GL01 Yard no. !10
R o l l s - R o p Marins As
dap.: A~IOmaliOn.LOngva
PaOB 10
Maritime Classification ~dcieties,
such as Lloyds Register of.Shipping,
Det Norske Veritas, ~ m e r i & pBureau
of Shipping, Nippon ~ a i j i ' g ~ o kand
ai
Germanischer Lloyd, require the use
of a Maritime Approved Computer
in applications thaC' -'have been
determined to be -'.critical to the
operation of a ship. This includes
navigation, fire$6ntio'ol, engine control,
ballast control;cargo control and other
mission critic& applications. Voyage
Data ~ e c b r d e r salso require the use
of a. ~ ~ r i t i m e , ~ p p r oComputers!.
.- _
ved
~ h kAMOS A310M has ,,been

designated an Approved Maritime
Computer by all major Maritime
Classification Societies. To be
designated a Maritime,Computer the
Classification Societies have
established rigorous testing criteria.
The computer is subject to extreme
variations in heat, humidity, shock
and vibration. The AMOS A31 OM has
passed all of these tests.
The AMOS A310M has also achieved

IEC-945 certification. IEC-945
certification requires very stringent
adherence to EMC, radiation and
immunity standards. No computer
without IEC-945 approval may be
used in conjunction with navigation
equipment or in any location near
such equipment.
The A310M Maritime Computeiwas

designed by SpecTec focusing on
the safety and reliability required for
operation for critical applications on
ships and offshore installations.
00-0s-7732-X 25 MAY 2000
..........................................................
C E R T I F I C A T E ElUMBER DATE
KARENALYST .ALLE 9B 0278 OSLO,

............
NORWAY
..................................
PLANT LOCATION
TYPE APPROVAL PROGRAM OSLO,

.............
PORT OFFICE
NORWAY . ......
This is to Certify SPECTEC AS . .
d Facililies on the date and localion noted above, in ordcr

thal a representative of this Bureau did, at the requesl of the Coinpany, a t ~ c r ~their
to carry out survey of the facililics and associatccl quality procedures. The facility is considered capable of manufacturing a product which
nwls thc designated standards. The equipment listed on the Attachment is eligible to be placed on this Bureau's List of Type Approved
Equipment, subjecl to annual fjcility surveys by a representahe of this Bureau and renewal of this Certificate after five (5) years.
LqUIPMtNI Ut>CRIPIIOH
M A R l T M COMPUTER
00-0s-7732-X 25 MAY 2000
. .............. - ....
ATTACHMCEIT T O CERTITICATE N U M B E R DATE
............
1
--- --, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
PAGF OF
TYPE APPROVAL PROGRAM

COMPANY
SPECTEC AS ...............
ADDRESS
Karenlyst All6 9B, 0278 Oslo, Norway
.....................
.
.
+4722 1 2 1 4 0 0 +47 23 13 65 67
TELEPHONE .......... FAX
EQUIPMENT .-
AMOS
- Maritime
---- - ....
Computer . .
MODEL -.
A3 1 OM .................
DESCRIPTION .............
. . INTENDEDSERVICE .
Ship and Offshore applictltions .....
RATINGS
ABS Steel ......... Part 4, Ch. 9, Section 7. Table 9 and 10

Vessel Rules 2000:
STANDARDS .............. ...........
, -.
SERVICE R E S T R I C T I O N S
Test
.
and Approval are in hardware only. Each particular
..........................
application is to be specifically a!
. ._. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
, .
COMMENTS ... .......... ........
. .
SURVEYOR .-
E.C. Legland ... . . . . SIGNATURE r
, .
CI;,RTIFICATE NO. A-8337
This Certificate consists of 5 pagcs
7 % ; ~IS IN ccrfifj~that the

Personal Computer
w;/II fype desigt~u!iotz
A3101M Maritime Computer
Certified Computer Technology AS

SKI, Norway
isfb~mclto comply with
Det Norske Veritas' Rules for ClassiLication of Ships, IIigh Speed & Light Craft and
Mobile OCllshore Units
Application
Location classes:
La9Humidity
This Certijicatc. is vnlid r i n i i l

3004-06-30
L o c d Ofice
I I Y V Oslo
Sulicc: 'Ihis ('crfific:~ltis w b j c c ~10 lvrms :tnd c w ~ d i l i ~ m~sn v r I c : ~:\,I!

f . $ i : ~ ~ i f i c a tcIt:tt~gc
~l ill d c h i ~ nor conh[rt~c[iooW ; I ~r c ~ ~ dthis
w C c r l i l i c ~ ~ il n
culid
'IIIC validify dnfc rcl:~ft-sl o tI~c'I')prAppror'nl ('crfilic:~lrmlrl nnt (n Illc approval of cq~~ipmcl~t/s?.slcn~s insl:~llcd.
Drx N o n s w VERITASA S VERlrASVElEN 1. 1322 IIOVIK. NOR'SJAY E L : (+47) 67 57 99 00 FFX: (+47) 87 5; 90 11

Form No.:2 0 . 9 0 5 Issue: January 98 P a g e 1 of 5
Ccrt. No.: ti-3337
File No.: 899.30
Procluct clescriptio~i
A3 10h,l bInritime Computer. consisting of the fbllowing units:
Version 1.0:
I
Module Mimufacturer N:lmc i
I I
hlothcrboxd Aopen AX-34xu

CPU Intel Ccleron Ci I'entiu~n 111
Power supply Astec Europe Ltd. ~~202-3530
I! Enclosure I SchncSer 20 15820
Lhfarine Kit l CCT ( A3 1OM
- -rr, Drive
Flaonv -
I Teac I FD-23jMF
I
IIard Disk Drive I IBM 2.5" 1 Travelstar rangc

-
IID casing j Distec
Add on products:
CD-ROM 1 NEC
Strcamer 1 Seagatc IDE
Graphics board I AT1 Rage 12s
LAN adapter I 3COM Combo PC1
Acessories:
-
) Kcyboard '--T c Fp
lTizF- i 1,ogirech I OEM PSI2 -
r i l S -~ Serial! Pamllcll ; Edgcport PI
adapter
Monitor
I
I Philips LCD 1 151AX 4

Ref to : Test Report no. 2000-1 162 r w . 1
Version 1.1:
,
!
-
- 1
'v
I Mo~hcrboastl
~~~
Po~vcrsupply
.
..~
~ ~ ~ --
I Aopen
i..iT,;
1
r---
Astec Europe 1,ttl.--
I AX-34ss
Cclcron A Pcntium-. I11
SA203-3530
--.
- .. .
Enclosure Schacfer 2015820

Marine Kit CC'S A3 10M
DET h'ORSK6 VCI~ITAS AS VERITASVEIEN 1. 1322 HBWK. NORWAY . TEL: ( + 4 7 ) 67 57 49 00 FAX. (*47) 67 57 99 1 1
Form No.:20 9Oa Issue: January 98 Page 2 of 5
Cert. No.: A-8317
Pilc No.: S99.30
- -. .. -- -.7-------
' Floppy D r i w 'I'cilc --
I.D-3.;51-11.' ...
Hard Disk Drive im2.5" l'ravelstar range I
I
HD casing / Distec Removable
Add on products:
I CD-player** I KEC 7
I Strcamcr I -
I Scacatc I IDE
I-_
I
Graphics board I A'l I I Rngc 128
I.tlN adapter / .:Corn I Combo PC1 K: TP
Acessorics:
Keyboard Cherry G83-6300LPNUS

Mouse Logitech OEM PSI2
USB - SeriaV Parallel1 Edgeport 21
adapter
Monitor* Philips LCD I5lAX
Monitor* ( Philips LCD LjOBIS
" 1.0be used with marine kit CCT B/S
**Not to bz utilised during normal operation of PC
Ref to : Test Report no. 2000-1 162 rev.2
Version 1.2:
I
. I 1-
Motherbo:ucl / Xopen 1 AX-34ss i
CP U I Intel I Celeron R: Pentium 111 ?
Power supply
Enclosure
Astec Europc Ltd.
Sc hacfer
SA202-3530
20 15820
-I
--.- .--
j Marinc Kit CCT I
A3 1O M I
Floppy Drive Teac I FD-23SFIF
Hard Disk Drivc 1BkI 3.5" / l'ravclstar rangc
111) casing Distec I Removable
Add on products:
-. -... ~. -.
CD plnycr" I
,
til:C:
. ~. -
CD-player* Son y
Strearncr Seagnte IDE
Graphics board AT1 Rage 128 C1: Radcon
D1i.r NORSKEVERITASAS VERITASVEIEN 1, 1 3 ? 2 HBVIK. NORVIAY TEL' (tJ7) 6 7 57 119 00 FAX (*J7) 67 57 98 1 1
Form No.:20.90a Issue: Januarj 98 Page 3 of 5
Cert. No.: 12-8337
File No.: S99.30
..
Cii~iphics
--
bonrcl
--. .. ..----
Communication cards
I
?htro\;
/
! hlilcnnium-..-.-... ..
Exsys (Firewire tcch.) 1 7- porl pnrall. card
~
1
-
Communication cards
I!O card
t
h4osa
/ 2 port serial card
I Industrial multipor~
1 range
/ PC1 NuDaq Digital
j l!O card
LAN adaptcr ~COIM
( 10!100 PC:] & PC:[
1 server NIC
to be utilised during normal operation of PC
Acessories:
Keyboard Cherry i GS3-G300Ll'NUS
-
Mouse
USH - Serial1 Parallell

Logitech
Edgeport
-I OEM PSI2 Rr.
Trackball 8: Optical
wheel mouse
21
adapter
Monitor Philips LCD l5lAX
Monitor Philips LCD 150BlS
Ref to : Test Rcport no. 2000-1 162 r e v 3
Approval conditions
Tlic Type Approval covers hard\varc listcd under Product description. When the hardware
is uscd in applications to be classed by DNV. doci~mcntationfor h e act~ialapplication is to
be submitted for appl.o\:nl by ths mnnihcturer of the application system in each casc.
Refercncc is made to DNV Rulcs for Ships / MOU 1'1.4 Ch.5 Instru~nentationand
Automation. The PC is not evaluated for conneclion to any macliinery/directional functions.
Conditions for application functions.

Approval Test of Application Sortware \vill be required d i e n the hartlwarc is used in
applications to bc classed by DNV. The test is to be pcrfornxd at manuf'rlcturer's works
according to an approved test program for the actual application in the prescncc of DiYV
The test is only to be performed for the iirsl delivery if there arc sistcr vcsscls.
Tests c:irricd out
'Icsls according to C.N.2.4

'l'ests according to lEC6094S covcring cornmunicational and navigational Functions.
Dlrr NORSCE VEKI.I.ASA S VERITASVEIEN 1. 1322 HQVIK, NORWAY . TEL: (+47) G7 57 D(1 CO FAX: (+47) 67 57 99 11
Form No : 20.90a Issue: January 98 Page 4 of 5
Ccrt. Ko.: '4-8337
Filc No : 899.30
Ty11cApprov~Itlocutnenta t'l o t i
Uscr Ma~ulali\3 1 O M Mxitinie C O I I I ~ L I ~ ~ L .

I.eatlct Computer - >lasitirnc Approval - Spccilication
DNV cnvironmcnlal t c s ~I-cpor~s2000- 1 162 rcv.0 l/07/07
Internet page: n,ww.cc-tcchnology.conl
Ccrtificatc retention survey
The scope of the retcntion/rcne~alsurvey is to verify that rhe conditions stipulated tor- thc
type arc complicd with. and t h a ~no al[cl.ations arc made to the product clcsign or choicc o [
systems. software versions. conq~onelitsancl!or materials.
Thc main elements of the survey ore:

Ensure that type approved docunientation is available.
Inspection of factory samples, selected at random from the production liue ( n r h a e
practicable)
Revicxv of production and inspection routines: including test records liom protluct
sample tests and control routines.
Ensuring that systems, software versions. components and!or materials used cumply
with type approved documents aidlor referenced system, software, component and
material specifications.
Revien of possiblc changes in design of'systc~ns,suft\vare versions, components,
materials and!or pcrfor~nancc.ancl make sure illat such chanpes do no arkct the lypc
a p p w a l givcn.
Ensuring traceability bctwccn manufacturer's product type marking and the iypc
approval ccstificatc.
Survey to be performed at renewal of this certificate
I)FI'NOKSKI: Vl:l<l f : \ ~ A S VERITASVEIEN 1. 1322 H@VIK, N O R W A Y TEL. ( 4 7 ) 87 5 7 09 00 FAX ( + 4 i ) G7 57 90 11

Form No.:20.90a Issue. January 08 Page 5 of 5
OF
TYPE APPRO VAL
A C n J R E R : SpecTec AS
AICTICLE : l n w Based Marine Computer
TYPE NO. : AMOS A31OM
T Y P E TEST NO. 00 A 106
PARTICULARS : Power Supply AC 100 - 120V/ AC 200 - 240V

DOCXIMENTATION : Specification, User hlanual
T13T ITEMS : Shown on the attached sheets.

.
THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the above mentioned type of article has been approved by the
NIPPON K N J I KYOKAI in accordance with the fcquircrnants for thc environn~ental
tesis specified in the Society's Rules.
'I'his certificate will remain in force until h e 1 1 Ih day,ol'Mny 2006,
Issued at 'I'okyo on the 12th day of May 2000.
General Manager,
Machinery Deparlrnent
darc.
iidssircd, i s rcquasted lo i~pplyLO [he S w h y for rcncwal prior lo llic cxpirnlio~~
Nolc: 111c ~i~anufac~urcr.
Cerlificate No.
A-486 D6
Test items: Applied test items are marked with X.
-
ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS Mark
-
External examination X
-
Operation .test
. ~ and performance test x
- ,
Electric power supply failure test
Electric power supply fluctuation test
Power supply tluctuation test
Insulation resistznce test
High voltage test
Pressure test
Dry heat test (Temperature + 70°C x 16 hours)
Damp heat- test (Temperature +55"C, Humidity 97%, 12 hours, 2 cycles)
Vibration test (Acceleration f 0.7G x 1.5 hours)
Inclination test
Cold lest (Temperature 0°C x 16 hours)
Salt mist test
Elehostatic discharge tesi
Radiatcd radio Frequency immunity test
Conducted low frequency im~nunitytest
Conducted high frequency immunity tcst
Bursflast lransiont immunity test
Surge immunity test
Radiated emission
Conducted emission
Manufacturer: Jakob Hatteland Display AS Reference:
DS 15T03 MMD Data Sheet
Product: 15.0 inch Maritime Multi Display
Rev. 01/04
Type: JH 15103 MMD
15.0 inch M a r i t i m ~Multi Display

Features:
The color display described in this Data Sheet is an industrialized version of a high quality Fujitsu TFT
based display with MVA technology. The MMD allows you to display professional applications with clarity
and enhanced color and image quality, RGB std. input, Video input and PIP (Picture in Picture) functions.
The display provides you with automatic compatibility with multiple upgrading platforms and a vast array
of graphics standards allowing resolution upgrades without upgrading the display. The controller and the
high light intensity in combination with the high contrast and wide backlight adjustment control, allow the
product t o be used in many environments. Brightness is adjustable from 0 to 100%
FRONT VlEW SIDE VlEW BACK VlEW
TOP VlEW
All measurements in millimeters

TFT Display: Video I n p u t Signal:
15.0" viewable image size Interlaced NTSC, PAUSECAM video with input
Thin Film Transistor (TFT) format of composite video, S-Video & component
MVA technology video (YCrCb)
Characteristics: Active Display Area (factory setting):

Dot number : 1024 x 768 304,l (H) x 228,l (V) mm
Dot pitch (RGB) : (0,297) (H) x 0,297 (V) mm
Response Time : 25 ms (typ) Power Supply:
Contrast Ratio : 400:l (typ) JH I T 0 3 MMD A1 : 110 / 220 VAC
Light Intensity : Max 250 cd/m2 (typical) JH 1 9 0 3 MMD A2 : 12-24 VDC
Viewable Angle : +/- 80 deg. (typical)(Up/Down/Left/Right) TO cwnply w ~ t h~ ~ 6 0 9 - 1 5use
, 24 voc
(@ CR > 10)
Power Consumption:
Display Colors Analog I n p u t : Operating: Max 40 W
262,144 colors (6-bit color)
Environmental Considerations:
RGB I n p u t Signal: Opemting: Tempemture -15 deg. C to +50 deg. C
Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p Humidity 20% to 85% (non condensing)
Input impedance 75 Ohm
Stomge: Tempemture -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Sync Signal: Humidity 5% to 85% (non condensing)
Digital separate sync., Composite sync., sync. on green
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced Options:
Suspension Bracket *
Synchronisation Range: Table Stand *
Horizontal : 31,5 kHz t o 91,l kHz Touch Screen **
Vertical : 60 Hz t o 85 Hz
Resolutions:
640x350/640x480/720x400
800 x 600 / 1024 x 768 *
* Option: Standard or custom logo and color

* Recommended for optimum picture quality " Option: Factory mounted
Dimensions:(Including cabinet) User Controls:

412 (W) x 345 (H) x 58 (D) m m On front bezel:
Weight: 8.5 kg Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
I n p u t Signal Terminal: 2 x hotkeys
RGB (PC) signal: Mode Status LED
15pin mini Dsub
Behind hatch:
Video signal: On Screen Display Control
Composite video : Phono plug
S-Video : S-Video plug Rear side:
Auto LED intensity adjust
Power:
JH I T 0 3 MMD A1 : Std IEC inlet (AC input)
JH 15r03 MMD A2 : Screw terminal (DC input)
Touch Screen:
1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)
Will be tested according to EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd) and type approved by the following classification societies:
LLOYD'S Lloyd Register of Shipping
DNV Det Norske Veritas
GL Germanischer Lloyd
NIPPON Nippon Kaiji Kyokai
ABS American Bureau of Shipping
I
Note: All specilications are subject to change without notrce
HATTELAND
DATA SHEET D l S P L A Y

Rev. 01/07
Type: JH l7TOl MMD
17.4 inch Maritime Multi Displau

Features:
The color display dexribed in this Data Sheet is an industrialized version of a high quality Fujitsu rn
based display with MVA technology. The MMD allows you to display professional applications with clarity
and enhanced color and image quality, VGA std input, Video input and PIP (Picture in Picture) functions.
high light intensity in combination with the high contrast and wide badtlight adjustment control, allow the
product to be used in many environments. Brightness is adjustable from 0 to 100%
[ e e 5 :;i;
CUT OUT
VlEW
TOP VlEW
-.
17.4" viewable image size Interlaced NTSC, PAUSECAM video, with input for-
Thin Film Transistor (TFT) mat of composite video, S-Video & component video
MVA technology (YCrCb)

Dot number : 1280 x 1024 345,6 (H) x 276,48 (V) rnm
Response Time : 25 rns (typ) P o w e r Supply:
Contrast Ratio : 400:l (typ) JH 17TO1 MMD A1 : 115/22OVAC
Light Intensity : Max 220 cd/m2 (typical) JH l7TOl MMD A2 : 24 VDC
Mewable Angle :+/- 80 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/LeWRight)
Power Consumption:
Operating: Max 60 W
Display Colors Analog I n p u t :
16.777.216 colors (8-bit color) Environmental Considerations:
Operating: Temperature -15 deg. C to i 5 5 deg. C
RGB I n p u t Signal: Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
Analog RGB 0,Np-p
Input impedance 75 Ohm Storage: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)
Sync Signal:
Digital separate sync., Composite sync., sync. on green Options:
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced Suspension Bracket *
Table Stand *
Synchronisation Range: Touch Screen **
Horizontal : 31,5 kHz to 91,l kHz
Vertjcal : 60 Hz to 85 Hz*
max. 75 Hz at SXGA
Resolutions:
640 x'350 / 640 x 480 / 720 x 400
800 x.600 / 1024 x 768 / 1280 x 1024 *
** OpEon: Factory mounted
= Remmrnended for optimum picture quality
Dimensions: User Controls:

460 (W) x 400 (H) x 60.10 (D) rnm On front bezel:
Weight: 9,2 kg (wlbracket) Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
15pin mini Dsub
Behind hatch:
S-Video : S-video plug Rear side:
Power:
JH 1 x 0 1 MMD A1 : Std IEC inlet (AC input)
1 JH l7TOl MMD A2 : Screw terminal (DC input)
Touch Screen:
Tested according to EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd) and type approved by the following classification societies:
Will be type approved by the following classification societies:
Note: All spwlications are subjcn to change winout notice
Product: 1 8 . 1 inch Maritime Multi Display DS 18T04 MMD Data S h e e t

Rev. 0 1 / 0 7
Type: JH 18T04 MMD
.1 inch M a r i t i m ~Multi Displau

181
Features:
The color display described in this Data Sheet is an industrialized version of a high quality (NEC TFT)
based display with XtraMew technology. The display allows you to display professional applications with
clarity and enhanced color and image quality. The display provides you with automatic compatibility
with multiple upgrading platforms and a vast array of graphics standards allowing resolution upgrades
without upgrading the display. The VGA controller and the high light intensity in combination with the
high contrast and wide backlight adjustment control, allow the product to be used in many environments.
B r i g h t n w is adjustable from 0 to 100%
FRONT VlEW SIDE VIEW BACK VlEW
B O l l O M VlEW
TOP VlEW
434
1 I

18.1" viewable image size Interlaced NTSC, PAUSECAM video with input
Thin Film Transistor (TFT) format of composite video, S-Video & component
a-Si TFT Active matrix video (YCrCb)

Dot number : 1280 x 1024 359,04 (H) x 287,232 (V) mrn
Response Time : 40 ms (typ.), "black" to "white" Power Supply:
Contrast Ratio : 300:l (typ.) JH 18T04 MMD A1 : 110 / 220 VAC
Light Intensity : Max 200 cd/m2 (typical) JH 18T04 MMD A2 : 24 VDC
Mewable Angle : +/- 85 deg. (typical)(Up/Down/Leff/Right)
(@ CR > 10) Power Consumption:
Operating: 75 W (typ.)
Display Colors Analog I n p u t :
16,777,216 Full-Color (depending on the graphics board) Environmental Considerations:
Operating: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C
RGB I n p u t Signal: Humidity 30% to 93% (non condensing)
Analog RGB 0,Np-p
Input impedance 75 Ohm Storage: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C
Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)
Sync Signal:
Digital separate sync., Composite sync., sync. on green
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced Options:
Suspension Bracket *
Synchronisation Range: Table Stand *
Horizontal : 31,5 kHz t o 91,l kHz Touch Screen **
Vertical : 60 Hz t o 85 Hz
Resolutions:
640x3501 6 4 0 x 4 8 0 1 720x400
800 x 600 / 1024 x 768 / 1280 x 1024*

* Recommended for optimum picture quality ** Option: Factorymounted
Dimensions: (Including cabinet) User Controls:

483 (W) x 444 (H) x 75.57 (D) rnm On front bezel:
Weight: 11.50 kg (wlbracket) Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
15pin mini Dsub
Behind hatch:
S-Video : S-Video plug Rear side:
Power:
JH 18T04 MMD A1 : Std IEC inlet (AC input)
JH 18T04 MMD A2 : Screw terminal (DC input)
Touch Screen:
Nolc: All spmliwbons are subject to change wittloul nobcc
Rev. 01/09
Type: JH 20T03 MMD
20.1 inch M a r i t i m ~Multi D i s ~ l a u

Features:
The color display described in this Data Sheet is an industrialized version of a high quality NEC TFT based
display with XtraView technology. The MMD allows you to display professional applications with clarity
and enhanced color and image quality, VGA std input, Video input and PIP (Picture in Picture) functions.
high light intensity in combination with the high contrast and wide backlight adjustment control, allow the
product to be used in many environments. Brightness is adjustable from 0 to 100%'
80TlOM VlEW
I:
CUT OUT
VlEW
TOP VlEW
..
TFT Display: Video l n p h Signal
20.1" viewable image size Interlaced NTSC, PAUSECAM video, with input for-
Active matrix, thin film bansistor (Super-m) mat of composite video, S-Video & component video
C(CrCb)
Characteristics:
Dot number : 1280 x 1024 Active Display Area (factory setting):
Dot pitch (RGB) : 0.312 (H) x 0.312 (V) mm 399.36 (H) x 319.49 (V) m m
Response Time : 45 rns (typical), "black" to "white"
Contrast Ratio : 250:l (typical) P o w e r Supply:
Light Intensity : 200 cd/m2 (typical) 110/220 VAC (JH 20T03 MMD A l )
Viewable Angle :+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right) 24 VDC (IH 20T03 MMD A2)
Display Colors Analog I n p u t : P o w e r Consumption:

16.777.216 Full-color (depending on the graphics board) Operating: Max 100 W (max)
Video Signal: Environmental Considerations:

Analog RGB 0,Np-p Operating: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C
Input impedance 75 Ohm Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
Sync Signal: Storage: Temperature -20 deg. C to +60 deg. C

Digital separate sync., Composite sync., sync. on green Humidity 10°/o to 90% (non condensing)
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal : 31,5 kHz to 91,l kHz Options:
Vertjcal : 60 Hz to 85 Hz Suspension Bracket *
Table Stand *
Resolutions : Touch Screen **
640x350/640x480/720x400
800 x 600 / 1024 x 768 / 1280 x 1024 *
* Recommended for optimum piclure qualily * Op~on:Standard or custom logo and color
** Option:Factory mounted
Dimensions: User Controls:

534 (W) x 481 (H) x 79.50 (D) m m On front bezel:
Weight: 14 kg (wlbracket) Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
15pin mini Dsub
Behind hatch:
S-Video : S-video plug Rear side:
Power:
JH2OT03 MMD A l : Std IEC inlet (AC input)
lH2OT03 MMD A2: Screw terminal (DC input)
Touch Screen:
Ix D-SUB 9P Connector (female)
GL Gerrnanischer Lloyd
Note: Ail s p v i f i o t i o n s arc subjcct l o change rvilhoul
This is to certify that the undernoted product(s) haslhave been tested in accordance with
the relevant requirements of the GL Type Approval System.
Certificate N:,
Company Jakob Hatteland Display AS

Amsosen
N-5573 Nedre Vats
Product Description lndustrial Color Monitor

Maritime Multi Displays
JH 15T03 MMD, JH 15C06 CTX, JH i7TOl MMD, JH 18204 MMD,
JH 20T03 MMD and JH 23T01 MMD
Environmental Category C, EMCI
Technical Data I 15.0lnc~hlaritimeMultl ~ i s p l :aJH ~ 15T03 MMD
Range of Application, ' 17.4 lnch Maritime Multi Display :JH 1 7 ~ a i . M ~ ~
18.1 inch Maritime Multi Display :JH 18T04 Mh!D
.:,20.1 lnch ~ a r i t l m eMUMdisplay :JH 20703 MMD .
23.1 inch Maritime Multi Display JH 23TOl MMD .. .-
Synchronisation Range: ~orizontal'31,5k ~ z f o 9 i ; l Vertical 6 $ k l o ' 8 5 k
..
15.0 inch Industrial Color Monitor : JH 1 K 0 6 CTX . .
Synchronisation Range: Hoeontal30 kHz to 70 kHz; .Vertical .. 50 Hz to 130 Hz 1
Power Supply :
1101220 VAC (Al) or 12.24 V DC (A2) for JH 15T03 MMD
115/220 V AC (Al) or 24 V DC (A2)for JH ITTO1 MMD
I 101220 V AC (Ai) or 24 V DC (A2) for JH 18T04 MMD; JH 20T03 MMD; JH 23TO1
MMD
100-120VAC or 220- 240 VAC 50160 Hz for JH 15C06 CTX
Test Standard I, Regulations for the Performance of Type Tests, Part I,Edition 2001
IEC 60 945, Third Edition, 1996.11
Documents Test report : DANAK-195816dated 21-11-2001
Technical Description on CD-ROM Hatteland Display with User Manuals and Data
Sheets dated 18-12-2001; DS 15T03 Rev. 01105; DS 15C06 Rev. 01103; DS 17T01 Rev.
01106; DS 18T04 Rev. 01106; DS 20T03 Rev. 01108; DS 23101 Rev. 01108
Remarks None
Valid until 2006-12-19

Page
File No.
1 of I
I.B.06
Type Approval Symbol
0
Hamburg, 2001-12-20
Gerrnanischer Lloyd H. D. Hespe

This c e r h a l e is &sued on Ihe basis ol'Rgulations I w !he Perlormorn ol Type Tesb. PartO. Pn>ceduie'.
\I
CERTIFICATE NO. A-8226
This Certificate consists of 3 pages
This is to certify that he

Peripheral Equipment
w i ~ htype desigr1otion.s
Industrial Monitors Models JH 15C06 CTX, JH 15T03 MMD, JH 17T01
MMD, JH 18T03 MMD, JH 20T03 MMD, JH 23T01 MMD
as listed on pagz 2
ibfar1rrfactzrredby
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
NEDRE VATS, Norway
isfolmd to cornj~lywith
Det Norske Veritas' Rules for Classification of Ships, High Speed &Light Craft and
Mobile Offshore Units
.4pplicot ion
Location classes:
Hurniditv
1 -I Vibration
Enclosure IA I
" Cold temp, tesrcd to -15 Deg.C
Pface and dcrte This Certificate is ~ ~ a luntil
id
HGvik, 2002-01- 14 2004-06-30
for DETJJORSKE VERITAS AS
L o c d Oflice Birger W. Bulukin

DNV Haugesund
Xoticc: T h i s Ccrtificatc is w b j c c t 10 ttrnls and condilion, ovrrltrl, An) sianifirmt chmae in d n i r n or conslruclion mny rcndcr lhis Ccrlificalc involid.
Thc validity d l ~ t crclrtcs to thc T y p c Apprnv:~lCcrtiIirrtr nnd no1 lo Ihc approval ofcquiprncni!r~rlcrn~installed.
OFT NORSKE VERITASAS VERITASVEIEN 1. 1322 HOVIK. NORWAY TEL: (47)67 57 99 00 . FAX ( 4 7 ) 67 57 99 1 1
Form No.: 20.Wa Issuo: January 98 Page 1 of 3
13%
Cert. No.: A-8226
File No.: 899.60
Industrial Monitors lj", 17.4", 1S.lU,20.1". 23.1"
CRT Monitor: JH 15C06 CTX

TFT Displays: JH 15T03 MiMD
JH 17TO1 M;VID
JH 18T04 MiMD
JH 20T03 NLMD
JH 23TOl MMD
Approval conditions
TheType Approval covers hardware listed under Product description. When the hardware
is used in applications to be classed by DNV, documentation for the actual application is to
be submitted for approval by the manufacturer of the application system in each case by
inclusion in an instrument list. Reference is made to DNV Rules for Ships I MOU Pt.4 Ch.5
Instrumentation and Automation.
Type ~ p p r o v a documentation
l
- Data Sheets:
DS 15C06
DS 15T03 MMD
DS 17T01 MMD
DS 18T04 MMD
DS 20T03 MMD
DS 23T0 I MMD
- Users Manuals:
IND1000xx-1 dated 200 1-12-03
IND100008-1 dated 2001-1 1-13
IND100009- 1 dated 2001-1 1-13
IND 100010-1 datcd 2001-1 1-13
IND100013-1 dated 2001-1 1-13
LND100016-I dated 2001-1 1-13
Test Reports:
DELTA ~ 2 1 7 8 ~ -dated
I 2001-11-21
DELTA K22l787- 1 dated 2001-07-09
DELTA K2217S4-1 dated 2001-05-14
DELTA K221755- 1 dated 2001-07-02
DELTA K221786-1 dated 2001-07-06
DELTA K221789-1 dated 2001-1 1-21
V E R ~ AAS
DETNORSKE S VERiTASVElEN 1 . 1 3 2 HOVIK. NORWAY . TEL: ( t 4 7 ) 6 7 57 98 W FAX, (+47) 67 5 7 99 1 1
Form No : 20.Wa Issue: January 98 Pago 2 of 3
Cert. No.: A-8226
File No.: 899.60
- Drawings:
JH15T03 MMD, JH17TOl MMD-A1, JH1 ST04 MMD-A1, JH2OTO3 MMD,
JH23TO1 MLMD
Tests carried out
Applicable tests according to C.N.2.4

Required tests covering IEC60945 for installation on bridge
Certificate retention survey
The scope of the retentiodrenewal survey is to verify that the conditions stipulated for the
type are complied with, and that no alterations are made to the product design or.choice of
systems, software versions, components and/or materials.
The main elements of the survey are:
Ensure that type approved documentation is available.
Inspection of factory samples, selected at random from the production line (where
practicable)
Review of production and inspection routines, including test records from product
sample tests and control routines.
Ensuring that systems, software versions, components andlor materials used comply
with type approved documents andfor referenced system, software, component and
material specifications.
Rcvicw of possible changes in design of systems, software versions, components,
materials and/or performance, and make sure that such changes do no affect the type
approval given.
Ensuring traceability between manufacturer's product type marking and the type
approval certificate.
Survey to be performed at renewal of this certificate.
END OF CERTLFICATE
D m NOKSKEVEKITAS AS VERITASVEIEN 1. 1322 HOVIK. NORWAY TEL (+47) 67 57 99 00 . F A X , (+a71 67 57 99 11

Form No : 20.90a Issue: January 98 Pago 3 of 3
LR Type Approval Certificate
PRODUCER
DESCRIPTION TFI' colour clispI.iys
JI-I 15TO:; h l M V - 15 inch displ.ly

JH 15103STD - 15 inch display
J t I 17!X1 ivlhlr) - 17.1inch displiny
11 IlP'PO.4 klX1U - lS.l inch display
[ t i 20'1'03 Mhll) - 20.1 inch display
11-1 13'1'01 hlXIL) - 23.1 inch ciispl'ly
C.'c.rli!ic.ilc No. 02; 00073

Postboks 104
1405 Langhus.
If. 64 86 99 70. Fax. 64 86 99 20

Ernail: sales@ade.no
Din partner for sanntidssyslerner
32-Bit, 68(EN)360 based Intelligent Universal Controller
A single-board controller incorporating the 32- it I n t e l l i g e n c e

32-bit MC68(EN)360 'QUICC' high- Quad Integrated Communications Controller (QUICC)
performance Con~munications cxc Interface
Flexible Front-Panel & Memory Configuration Options
C011troHer. Six Serial Interfaces
Low Power Consumption
ExtendedTemperature Range Capability
Tull VMEbus System Application Software Compatible
Choice of Real-Time Operating Kernel
H~ILG.H,P~E R.F.0 R M A N C E CP U s , 5 1 N G L E-.B 0 ~ A . RD ~ ~ . . C . O ~ M - P ~ U _ T - E - R _ S
Product A+)
Overview
PEP'S IUC-32 combines high computation T h e IUC-32 is another product in the pallet
performance and very low power consumption of high-performance, low-power PEP boards
with excellent communication ability via the with CXC capability that extends the industrial
Motorola Quad Integrated Communications I/O capability of a CPU.
Controller 'QUICC'.
Derived froni the VSBC-32, its VMEbus cousin, the
The ' Q U I C C ' is a 32-bit high-performance conlnluni- IUC-32 remains 100% software compatible.
cation controller which combines powerful peripl~cr.ll
functions with system integration and an on-chip 32-bit The IUC-32 being a busless compact Intelligent
C P U core. This core is essentially a 68020 processor Universal Controller is designed to operate within field-
operating a t 25 or 3 3 MHz without cache and a conlpu- bus networks or a s a stand-alone micro-controller.
tational performance that is approximately three times Featuring an on-board, high-performance C P U allows it
that of a 68302 running at 16 MHz. It's comn~r~nicntion to be used without additional support a n d because of the
performance is approximately six times thnt of the con~~llunicationsability o l the 68(EN)360, the IUC-32
68302! provides 3 variety of protocols.
All memory accesses are controlled
r"
256 kByte
IUC-32 by the on-chip memory controller
a n d a spectrum of memory configu-
MC68360
Q 25 MHz rations allow truly task-oriented
applications to be realized. The
bundle is managed by a suitable
choice of o n e of PEPS standard real-
time kernels; OS-9, VRTXIOS,
pSOS+ a n d VxWORKS.
IUC-32
- - . ..-...--
The modular upgradability of the
1UC-32 allows individual configura-
1 MByte tion possibilities while providing
the user with a cost-effective appli-
CPU Options cation strategy.
The IUC-32 is cspccially designed

to cover the widest possible range
of applications from tooling machi-
Memory Piggyback nes through traffic and envirow
Options or mental control stations to fully net-
workcd c o ~ n ~ n u ~ ~ i c accntrcs.
tion
The 'QUICC', used togctllcr with PEP'S 110 expanding For t l ~ o s ecustomers already in possession of a motlier-
C X C interface is ideally suitctl for c o m ~ u u ~ ~ i c u t iappli-
on board C P U with a complete C X C interface, PEP'S plug
cations with up to 6 serial i n t e r f m s inclurlin~LAN or and pl;~yIUC-32 cxn hc integrated with a minimum
WAN (X.25, ISDN). ; I I I I ~ I I I I Iof e x t r ; ~eflort.
Specifications
U S 0 MC68360 @ 25MHs or
MC68EN360 @ 25/33 M H z
D I N 41612 (C), 96-pin connector
16-bit data bus
8 pre-defined board select lines
1/4/16/32 MByte (32-bit access) DRAM 7-bit address bus
010.5/1/2/4 MByte (32-hit) FLASH 4 fired, priority-based interrupt lincs
0.2511 MByte EPROM or FLASH (16-bit) DMA lines ( D R E Q DACK)
256 kByte or 1 MByte (16-bit wide) SRAM 3 NMSI (SCC2, SCC3, SCC4) ports
with data retention via Goldcap integrated with the C X C Connector
1 kbit serial EEPROM for applications
Debuggingb Background Debugging Mode facility
V3021 3-wire serial interface (year,
nionth, week, day, hour, rnin., sec.) 2 independent channels with 32-bit
internallexternal transfers
r b Built-in on MC68EN360 providing a
progranlmahle periodic interrupt
programmable priority and support for a
/Timorn 4x16, 2x32-hit resolution built-in timers on
the MC68EN360
variety of protocols (Ethernet, IEE
802.3, HDLCISDLC, UART etc.)
On-board BERR' time-out fixed at 811s. 2 Serial Management Controllers;

s o f t w m enabletl/tlisahletl RS232 (RxD, TxD only) interfaces
FQ Enabled by software access integrated in

on-board logic with front-panel LED
terminating with RJ111RJI2 connectors
on the front panel
MC68360 : < 3.0W (typ.)

0- 16 interrupt sources of ~vhich4 are
integrated within the C X C interfiicc
MC68EN360 : < 3.5W (typ.)
O°C to +70°C (standiird)

System Abort switch level 7 autovector -40°C to +85'C (extended)
Autovectors Power Fail level 7 autovector
TICK level 6 vector prog.
CXC level programmable (level
4 reco~ninentletl) lOOnirn x l l 5 m m single-height
3 U forlnat ( I slot 20.41nn1)
F b C P U clock
Conims. clock
: 25, 33 M H z
: 24 M H z 3 I.EDs: red : Halt
CXC clock : 16 MHz yello\v : Wiitchdog enabled
All serial port hautl-rate clocks may hc greeli : General purposc
configuretl individually hy soltwarc
Features I 43
68(BN)360 A 25/33 M H z full 32-hit CPU

(CPU32+ core) with 110 and systcm
controller providing all the necessary i n t e r f ~ c e s ,tinlcrs hit tlata bus, 7.bit addess bus, 4 I R Q
a n d clocks and D R A M controller etc. levels antl three integrated serial interfaces.
Six are provided by the ' Q U I C C ' - T w o

S M C channels are ported to the front
panel antl the remaining four S C C
channels may be optionally configured as ~ h o w n .
,,..... .....*.,..
r?x
Channels
2 Independent Channels are provided
by the ' Q U I C C ' chip and can be used
by applications requiring data transfer
hetween C X C - n l o d ~ ~ l eDRAM.
s, FLASH lnenlory a n d
MC68(EN)360 Intelligent .L..,....
SRAM. These memory areas can be configured with
Controller Schematic different memory options providing tremendous flexi-
f "c bility when customizing memory requirements for real-
time applications.
The IUC-32 offers scalable RAM sizes

of 1, 4 1 6 or 32 MByte with a 32 bit-
wide data bus and a n addressing capability for up to 64
MByte. This R A M is mounted o n a piggyback together
with the FLASH memory option.
FLASH This 5V, 32-bit memory is available in

0 to 4 MByte confiprations.
- The
Each IUC-32 comes complete with 2 RS232 serial inter- device access speed and write-protection option are
faces situated on the lower half of the front panel. These programmable and additional write-protection is provi-
interfaces are controlled by the S M C l and SMC2 chan- ded by a jumper. Two banks are present which together
nels of the 'QUICC' controller. The S C C l channel of the possess an addressing capability for u p to 64 MByte
'QUICC' provides the intcrfacc to one of the avnild)le
SI-x piggyl~:~tlts.
All othcr c l ~ ; ~ ~ ~(SCC2,
n c l s S C C 3 ;111d t o o t ROM
- UI) 1 0 I MUyti of 16-11it ROMIPLASH
SCC4) of the 'QUICC' are ported to the CXC interface memory is available that can also be
except for the St-PB232 piggyback \vhich has additional used a s main m e n i o r y . ~ h eIUC-32 can be booted from
control provided by the SCC4 channel either this R O M or the FLASI-I on piggyl~ack.
Two different piggybacks complete with

all the ;~ssoci;ltetlcontrol logic are w~i-
F& --
This is a battery backed (Goldcrp)
nlemory area wit11 a 16 bit-widc data
lahle for the EN version of the 360 pro- hus available as either a 256 kByte or 1 MByte device.
viding 10Base2 or 10BnscT interfaces.
This is a fully optoisolatetl RS485 inter. hoard; 1 kbit has been pre-progra~nrncd
face piggyback with a 9-pin D-S11b with PEP tlata (boot paranletcrs. Bthcrnet address, ctc.)
connector.
HIGH -
Two piggybacks arc available with RJ4S PERFORMANC
CPUS
connectors for M O D E M cornp;ltil)lc SINGLF-BOAR
con~m~~~iication. Cob ERS
H I G H - P E R F O R M A N C E CPUs, S I N G L E - B O A R D C O M P U T E R S
164
Controller Front
Extension Panel
Connector Options
F i r s t introduced in 1990, PEP'S Controller

e x t e n s i o n Connector (CXC) concept enables a
mezzanine I/O extension o n both V M E and
b u s l e s s (IUC) distributed 1/0 systems. T h e CXC
is based on open specifications allowing ~~nprecetlentetl
flexibility in meeting customer requirements.
PEP has n a m e d these mezzanine plug-in motlules

Controller e x t e n s i o n Modules (CXM). Naturally, these
: also based o n open specifications. The 96-pin
C X M s are designed to operate with C X C based host
modules, such a s the VSBC-32 a n d VM62(A). An
additional increase in the host's functions is achieved
by a C X C D i s t r i b u t i o n U n i t fitted to the host's CXC.
'Jp to 7 C X M s can b e fitted onto a D i s t r i h t i o n Unit. Ethernet Interface Interfaces of the RS232,
Types RS485 and blank panel
T h e advantage of this versatile modularity, i n types.
addition to cost-effectiveness, is to allow customers a
practically endless capability in system configuration.
T h e C X M s provide analog a n d digital functions, screw The lower RJIIIRJI2connectors o n all front
a n d spring terminals, galvanic isolation and status panels provide 2 line (Rr and Tx) RS232 serial
LEDs a n d other I10 extensions such a s SCSI. The interfaces.
modules are designed primarily to function in harsh
industrial environments. V a r i o u s configuration possibilities are
supported for flexible solutions t o system
requirements. T h e power of cornm~~nication to the
outside world is further enlinncetl by utilizing the
'QUICC' interfaces.
A nurnher of piggybacks have heen developed to

athpt the multi-protocol serial channels of the
'QUICC' to the the physical interfaces :
Ethernet IObnsc2 (Thin)

Ethernet IObascT (Twisted Pair)
RS485 0ptoisol;ttetl
2xRS232 M o d c n ~conipatihle
lxRS232 Optoisoliltetl.
l'lic rc111aininp3 S C C C I I ; I I I ~ C I S or the 68(EN)360 are

HIGH -
CXC-rack with provision for up to 8 CXC-hoards. ported to the CXC interface whcrc t h y may be PERFORMANCI
CPUS
Individual hoard spccificatio~isare availahlc on accessed tllror~gllother PI:? C X C ciirtls liltc tlie CXM- SINGLE-BOAR1
'lest. S103. COMPUTERS
HIGH-PERFORMANCE CPUs, SINGLE--BOARD-COMPU_TTE.RS
Ordering
Information
Product Description \Order No.

IUC-32-BASE 32-bit Intelligent Universal Controller comprising MC68360 @ 25 MHz, 256 kByre SRAM (with Goldcap for 1 12998
back.up), up to 6 seri.11 interfxes withour hlicrnet support (2 av:iilable on lie lront panel as RS232 and a n addi.
rional 4 divided he~weenthe C X C and SI.interfaces). CXC interlace.
Same as order no. 12998 hur with hlCbSEN360 with Erliernc~support 13642
Same as order no. 13642 hut wirli blC6811N360 @ 33 bltlz with Etherncr support 13643
Same as order no. 13643 but with 1 h I R v ~ eSRAM 13644
hlernory Piggyback with 4 MByte Dlb\hl :lnd I MByle 1:LASI-I memory for 1UC-32 11852
Memory Piggyback w i ~ h4 klByte DRAM and 4 k l B y ~ eFLASH memory for IUC-32 11853
Memory Piggyback with 16 hlByre DRAh'I and I tvlByre FLASH memory for IUC-32 11854
Memory Piggyhack with 16 hIByte DRAM and 1 klByre FLASH memory for IUC-32 11855
Meniory Piggybxk wirli I blnytc DRAM ;tnd no FI.ASII memory for IIK IUC-32 12764
Memory Piggyback with 1 MByte D R h h I and I MByre FLASH memory lor the IUC-32 12765
Memory Piggyback with 32 k l B y ~ eDRAM and 512 kRyre FLASH memory lor the IUC-32 13027
Memory Pi::vback wirh 32 MBvte DRAhl ; ~ n d2 MByte FLASH memory for the IUC-32 13627
10Base2 Thin Ethernet interface p i g g y b d with KG58 coax. connector 9925
IOBaseT Twisted pair Ethernet inrerfnce piggyback with RJ45 connector 9926
F r o n ~panel without exrra inrcrf:~ce(s) 12351
Serial interface piggyback for 2 RS232 conncc~ions(klodeni interface) with 2 RJ45 conneclors 11850
Serial interlace .nizevb;tck
--, for I RS?32 o n ~ o i s o l ; ~ ~connection
etl w i ~ h1 RI45 connector 11851
RS4S5 optoisolated interlace piggyback for 2 wire hall.duplex connection'wi~h 9-Pin D-Sub connector 9927
3 meter RS232 Serial 1nterf;lce cable for VM42162 and IUC-32 with 9.Pin D&h (female) to RJ12 connector 1 12383
Important : The IUC-32 must be ordered with a memory module (DM60*) and a front-panel interface piggyback
module (SI-x).
" For OEM quantities, other FLASH memory configurations are available on request.
Benelux
I'lil' htodulrr Cannputurr Brndur
KonigAlhcrt-Lmn 1 6
H-I780 \VEhthtEL
Trl.: ++3? (0)2 461 04 08
I:.II;:++3! (0)2 461 00 31
France Poland
l i U I ( 0 I'liP Pdrir 1'EI' hlodulrr Conlnutcrr Sp. z n o .
I.cr h r r m r (11, h l ~ n o i r ul. Krzywi~kirgoY
I Y C k m ~ i n1111 I : d CIGIIC I'ukui IUUIIIU02
1:-78 610 I:EI',\NG Li\ Vll.l.1
Td: + + I 1 (U) I 1'1 I6 I l l JU
F A Y :+ + J J (0) I J'l l h l U 2 5
Modular computersm -
TM All trademarks arc rcmgni~d @ PEP 1996 Subled to change wilhoul nolim
PROcess Fleld BUS for Automation and Distributed I/O
An industrial 1 1 0 module for C X C or Controller Extension Module (CXM)

9-Pin D-Sub Fieldbus Connector
V M E b u s based systems incorporating Additional 9-Pin D-Sub RS485 Interface Option
2 Additional R145 Connected RS232 Interfaces Option
the Advanced AsPC-2 PROFIBUS PROFIBUS FMS and DP
C011tr0ller I'r0111 S i e n l ~ l l s VMEbus Standalone Controller
Gateway Functionality
Product Description Order No.

CXM-PFB12 Siemens ASPC-2 based PROFIBUS controller board for CXC backplane connection with 14608
optoisolated RS485 interface
CXM-PFB12 As product 1 4 6 0 8 but designed for direct CPU connection 12399
PROFI-SC7 VMEbus PROFIBUS controller with common memory interface. Includes a software library 14519
for easy programming of FMS and DP
OS9-PROFI* 0 s - 9 PROFIBUS starter kit for the development of FMS and DP applications 1662
COMPLETE
OPEN
SYSTEMS
Micro PLC and Real-Time Computer
Power Computation and

Communications Performance
b A PLC based o n Real-Time

Computer Technology
b Distributed Intelligent 110 System
b Programmable w i t h all 5 IEC1131-3

Languages
b Application S W compatible w i t h
VME and IUC Systems
b .Programmable in ANSIL'C'
b Embedded Real-Time 01s w i t h

Multitasking ability
b Reduced Cabling and Maintenance

costs
b Standard and Extended Operating

Temperature ranges
. . ~ ~ .
-.
~, -~. --
-. ,T The Smart 110 concept is based on a cost effective open system for
-
-- -.--- ,~ ~ - - -
-...-
,.
-
FsO&s*~Fj&~
~.
-
-
... .-~
-~.~ industrial automation and real-time computing.Derived from the PEP
,s-
~~
- .
~~
-
- ' 8 ,
L ,>
~
VME 3U technology,SMART 110 is 100%application s o h a r e
compatible with VhIE9000 and IUC9000 controllers.
Approved by t h e
D e u t s c h e Bundesbahn
Modular Computers
Product Overview
COMPLETE
OPEN
SYSTEMS
Using the standard ISaGRAFe

workbench for IEC 1131-3 PLC
programming languages and
the Ultra C compiler for ANSI-
'C' real-time programming,
SMART I10 can b e used as a
micro PLC as well as a real-
time, multitasking system.
SSURT 110 is equipped with

PROFIBUS, the industry standnrtl re;il-
time fieltlbus.This allon-s the ShlhRT
110 to be used in a bully transparent
real-time network architecture
enrtbling open communications
between PEP systems and third p a r 5 The SXWRT 110 core is &lotoroh's SSMT-EST extension modules which
devices and XISII. Fieldbus s!-stems hlC68302 CPL n-it11two on-chip increase the I10 capacity of the sys.
such as Profibus, facilitate not only 110 processors. One is the 20AlHz industry tem.
hnndling and inter-system communica- standard 6SHC000,n-hile the second is
tions, but also file transfer, remote a communications oriented RISC The SMART-BASE possesses 3 connec-
login and remote debugging facilities. processor. Fieldbus protocols use the tors for SMART MODULES. Each slot
power of this RlSC CPU,freeing the provides eight bidirectionalTTL digital
Intelligent I10 subsystems, such as 68HC000 for application tasks. In addi- lines and a 3-wire SPI (Serial Peripheral
PEP SMART 110, act as local con- tion, the 68301 includes an SIB (Sys- Interface) line,with one of the digital
trollers attached directly to electro- tem Integration Block), consisting of 3 lines generating an interrupt to the
mechanical devices. Consequently, serial channels. 3 timers and an inter- CPU. SMART-MODULES can be either
design, maintenance and cabling are rupt controller. DIGITAL I/O,ANALOG I/O or
quicker, simpler and cheaper. COUNTER 110. Custom modules are
This micro PLC n-ith an unprecedent- easily developed clue to an OPES intrr-
SMART 110 communicates with other ed memory size. srnoothes the applica- face specification.
systems by object oriented methods. tion of efficient programming tools.
In intelligent I10 sub-systems, the onl! such as ISaGR-\F (IEC1131-3automa- L ~ c hSSURT-EST supports up to Z
fieldbus traffic is data exchange;for tion development systern),as well as SSLIRT MODULES each possessin:: S
example, SETPOINTS,FLAGS, spnchro- real-time operating systems and their digital lines antl :m SPI line.To nchieve
nization messages, STARTISTOP com- en\.ironments (ASSI.'C', multitasking. ;I common interhce between modules.
mands, etc.The advantage of SSMRT networking, etc). a SXIIIRT 110 SPI port 'C'librar! is pro.
110 technology over DUMB remote \-itled by PEP
110 technology is a clear network.The The ShMRT 110 concept is engineerctl
latter, in which the fieldbus is con- n r o ~ ~ nat S.\lARTB.-\SE
l module, inclutl. A complete SMART 110 configuration
trolled by a centralized CPU. results in ing ;I DCIDC converter antl CPU core. allows up to 11 SSLIRI' XI0DI;LES to
an overloaded network. Input and O~ltputare realizcd by the be cascatlctl.
addition of LIPto four cascndetl
Complete SMART I/O system example showing 4 fullyequipped SMART-EXT units mounted on a DIN rail
ISaGRAF IRO Abilities
A yo
1d"l
ISaGRAF Introduction
Of the v~riousinterrupt sources available,
1SaCW.F is a Windows based integnted the following are generated on-board:
Computer hided Software Engineering
(CASE) environment. It confornij to IEC
1131-3,thr intern:~tionalPLC Lmguage The 10 ms rick issues inierrupts at level 6
stand:~rtl.Alllisted languages arc included in
Power Fail
ISaGRhF together ivirh the option to
intcgnte 'C'code. Prognmnied applications This non-niaskable IRQ on level 7 has the
run on rhc SAIART I/O under the OS.9 real- highest priorin antl is generated when the
time operating system.The IEC 1131-3 m:~ini\' supply falls below 4.70V If the
languages are: supply fdls below 4 6 j V then the system
enters a RESET s m e
( Sequential Function Chart (Grafcetl I
Thi> the core 1;mgu:ige of the IEC 1131-3
st~nkardn-hich divide the process cycle
into a number of defined successive steps
separ:lted by tnnsitions.
I Function Block Diagram
This a graphical language allowing the user

to build complex procedures by taking
existing functions and function blocks from
the ISaGRAF libnry
I Ladder Diagram
The Ladder Diagmn is one of the most

familiar methods of representing logical
equations and simple actions. ISaGRAF
provides a full graphic ladder logic editor.
S t x c t u r e d Text 1
This is a I:lngu:~gewit11 a syntax similar to
Pascal but atl:tpted to be more intuitive to
the aotonntion engineer. The Interrupt Logic generates 2 IRQ signals
35 follo\\~s:
Instruction List
I Timer
The lustrucrion List is a low-level languagc
sin~ilarto :~ssernblcrantl is highly effective s 4 priority.
This IRQ source h ~ level
for sn~:~llcr;~pplic:~tions
or for optimising
Parallel 110
parts of an application.
Tl~cscinterrupt lines h : level ~ 1 priority
I C Programming
Four of thc SSIART-XLODULES(three on the
Procetlures written in'C'can be called from S.\IJ\R'I'-UhSEant1 the first slot of the first
any of the fivc supported languages. On SSlhR6IXknsion), are connected to the
nlultil:~skingsystems such as OS9, complete interrupt logic configured to generate an
I I X ~ \vrilten t:~sksC:III run p:lnllel with the intcrryt IRQ on level I
lS:~f;l:Xl: :~pplic;~tion. Such t:~skscould bc
urctl filr the crc:~tionof loop control or
mathen~:~tic :~lgorirhms,cornnnmication,
Fuzz!. lo&. ' I C elc.
PROFIBUS 0s-9 Operating System
PROFIBUS is an open standard Microware's 0 s - 9 8 is a rnodu- The OS-9 kernel's multitasking scr.
( D I N 19245) fieldbus network, lar operating system providing vices include priorih based tnsk
enabling devices f r o m various deterministic, high perfor- scheduling, dynamic memory alloc:~-
vendors (more than 150 world- mance operations for 6 8 0 x 0 tion together wit11 complete intcr-
wide) to be interoperable. applications. rupt exception and task m:ui.i$c--
mcnt facilities. Intcrproccs conimu-
As it is b:isetl 011the rcal-time cnp:~ble Its powerful k ~ t u r c sm;Ac OS-9 the nic:~tionoptions include ;11;11-nl>.
synchronous tokenbus principle, optimum rc:ll-timc t:~rsetfor intlustri- events, binary sern:~phores.c i ; ~ t ; lmoti-
PROFIBUS can achieve data transfer al. scientific. rnetlic;~l,teleconim~ni- ules, signals, pipes ant1 sockets.
rues of up to 500 kbitls multi-mastcr. cxtions ;inti consumcr electronic
multi-slave or hybrid topologies. applic:~tions. Having an excellent anti lonp tcrm
partnership n-ith hlicro\vare. PEP li:~.;
PEP'S SSlhRT 110 concept conforms in been able to port and adapt its own
f~11l to the OSI reference model sup- products to hlicronare's OS-9\-?.O.z
porting layer 2 , the data la!-er and As a result, PEP can offer :I n-itk
I:I!-er 7,the application 1x1-er.This range of OS-9 products r~~niiini
latter layer communicates via on its own hardn-are n-it11atle-
the Application Layer Interface qmte OS-9 support. I t offcrs
(.ILL). Objecr orientated inte- full application softn.are
gration of aVirtunl Field compatibilih n-ithV\lE and
Device OTD) includes com- IUC systems.
munication objects entered
into Object Dictionaries and Based on an open s!-stem
manipulated by application protocol, PEPS SUART I10
services. PROFIBUS distin- concept allows the user the
guishes between conf rmed freedom to define and det-elop
and unconfirmed services his own end applications. 0 s - 9
(broadcasts and ni~~lticnsts). based applications can be easil!.
developed using PEP OS-9 devrlop.
rnent systems or the FasTmk cross-
Layer 217 Programming development environment.
Real-time
b LSF: The Lower Layer Function features include t:lsk switching.
allon-s process execution contro1,flesible
access to all services and data interrupt ser\-ice routines (ISRs) and
structures. fast interprocess comm~lnic:~tion Refer to the PEI' OS-9 data slicct for
hcilitics. further information.
b HLF: The Higher Lnj-er
-
-
i-rr
Function allows ~-
- ~ -
fast anti easy progr;~mrningwith
1'
ready to use sub-routincs for basic
services.
b 0 s - 9 v .3.0.x
Firmware includes
Refer to thc PEP PROPIDUS tlxa shect
for further information.
!
I
the following' .
Sottware licences
.
-
i, b ISaGRAF with
SMART I10 library
pnoFlaus layer &,
i i
II . i
Specifications
DC-DC Converter Power Consumption
Tn-o isolated (1000V DC) 5V Output Channels SALUT-BASE: l500/ITOOn1\Si

Input ISV-36V DC, 24V DC (Nominal) .PROFIBUS: 25OI75OmW
Outpllts 1 & 1 Isolated 51' DC O 1.2A (system) SSI-slots: <3OOm\\;'
Isolated jV DC O I5OmA (RS4SS) SXU'EXT: lj/3jm\v
CPU Dimensions (mml I, w, h
MC68302 O ZOJlHz SAL.\RT-BASE: 247.5 s 114.5 x 86.8

SSIART.EXT: 110.0 x 114.5 s 86.6
Memory
Operating Temperature
EPROM and/or FLGH u p to 2 hlByte
512 kB>Te D R U I St:~ndard: P C to +7VC
6 4 k B p S U \ I with batrcr)- backup Extended: 40°C to +8j"C
Interfaces Operating Humidity
Serinl R S 3 2 !Jodem compntible Up to 95% non.condensing

Isolated RS-is5 (PROFIBUS) u p to 500 kbit/s
Cooling
SPI/SPC local inrerhce & RTC
Isolnred timer 110 with: Free-air convection
Tin (20 kHz),Tollt (5 kHz)
Weights
Gate ( 2 0 DC)
SAURTBhSE: 650g
Interrupt Vectors
ShL\RT-EX: 2508
lOms (100 Hz) IRQ6
SMART-Modules Available#
24-bit timer lRQ4
Panllel 110 (4 lines) IRQl Digital:
SSDINI S inputs 2 i V DC
Data Retention
Sll-DOCTI 8 outputs 2-iV DC/O.jA
3\.: 1 9 0 m i button lithium ccll (standard temperature) SM-REL1 6 normally open relay outputs
3V.S50m\ cylinder lithium cell (extended - E1 temperature) SSl-hCII S inputs l?O/23OY XC
S.\I..KOI 6 outputs 1?0/23OVAC/O.?A
S>I-ACOZ 2 outputs 1201230V hC/l.O,\
Housing for DIN-nil mounting
3 slots for ShURT-Modules on the S&\RTBASE
2 slots for each SALIRT-EXT An:llo#:
R J i j for RS2jZ i n t c r f x e SSI-D.\Dl 4 In. 2 out +10V DC
9-pin D 6 u b connector for the RSiSi (PROFIBUS) interklce S.WADC1 6 inpurs kIOV DC/20mr\
SSI-D.KI 1/6 outputs -r lOV DC/ZOnb\
Screw Terminal Connectors
SSI-THEW i inputs R, S, B,J,1: E. I;
Arm). 2x3 and 2x7 SSI-PT100 4 inputs 2 , 3 or 4 wirr
hlaring Cycles 100
Contact Resistnnce <jniQ Counterflinxr:
hIax.hmper.\ge 6,\ SlI-COTST1 1 ch:~nnel 24.hit increni, encodcr
O p e n t i n g Voltage t25OV SM.COUNT2 7- cliannel l b b i t counter
Software
Ordering Information
Product Description Order No.
SSLiRT-B.ISE .\licro.PLC and rcal.rime cornpurer nirh 1 >IB!lc EPKO\I. isol:~red24-bit counrer1iimcr. OS-9 v3.0 x, ISaGRV 14817
-
-
v5.O.x.RSiSi 9-pin D-Suh connccror for PROFIBL'S ri.l?.I;~!cr ? S '. Full >lodem RSIJ? (S-pin RJ-ii connector.) -
-
Iiousing and screw rcrmin:~lbluck for rhc main puncr rupqhl~ndh.~rrcrv .
but \vitli nddirionnl I .\IR\~rcFL4SII nicniorl on lhc..soldcr sidc ( I .\In\ re f o r x ~ l i c : ~ r i ocode)
n 14818 1 2
rnodu~cnirh 2 slots for S\LIRT-\~odu~o 7 4228 I
ShI-SCRS I Foi [he SSlART.B.iSETimcr I 1 0 Pack of 5.2 s 3 a r m 10892 I
S.\I.SCR.2s7 For the SMART-Modules.Pack of 5.2 s 7 a r m -- 10893
S>I-DLX'IY FP For unused ShLiRThlodulc slors, avaihble in p.~cksof LO -
10894
--,
SXBATTERY i\! 190 mhh pipgvback for srmdard opcnting tcmpcr~~rure
m g e (VC ro + V C ) 11281
, .-
,=-
-
SSI-BMTERYE? 3V.SjO m i h piggvback for extended operatins rcrnpeclrure mnpe (40°C 10 +Sj"C)
--
11282
L
-
.-
= -
=> , -
-
CABLE RS2jl-9 j rnctrcs n-irh 9-pin D-Sub (icmalc) and R j i j connccrurz fur PC 10890 -
--- -=.-
10891 C =
L c
ALAN-SlLIRTLO Hardback technical user's manual n-irh derailed S\LIRT-B.ISE.S\LiRT-D;T and SSLUIT-3Lodule information 9901
m.. -
.rm ,E
; SLAY-S\L4RTIO Updared h:lndbook shoninp amrndmenrs to rhc S\IiRT I10 hniilv 12916 'i
1 m p o r t a n t : T h e DC/DC converter of the S.\I.4RTB.4SE is capnble of supplying 6.75W (mas.) for the internal 5V supply to
power the Counter/Timer. SMART EXT modules and the isolated Profibus interface. It is possible to drive the SMART-1/0 sys-
tem to the limit of its capability but it is advisable to build a configurntion where the worst case total value st;qs below the
1irnit.The power consumption of individual rnodulej depends on the activity taking phce at the time and therefore an nccu-
rate figure cannot be guamnteed.An e m p n S\MRT-B.\SE unit consumes a masimum of 1700mW PEP has allowed n nominal
consUmption of 3OOmW for each Shl-hlodule slot. If that limit is exceeded, the maximum number of SSI-hlodulesniust be
reduced.Refer to the data-sheets of these SJLIRT-.\lodules to gain a better estimate of the power consumption and their oper-
ational capabilities.
Application Areas
b Industrial Computing b Fuzzy-Logic Control b Power Plant Control

b Industrial Process Control b Construction Automation b Environmental Control
b Data Logging b Factory Automation b Water Treatment Plant Control
b Flexible Loop Control b Modem Controlled Applications b Intelligent Distributed I/O
b Transportation/Railway
t USA t GERMANY t FRANCE t UK t SWEDEN t BENELUX t POLAND t ITALY t SPAIN t NORWAY

W DENMARK t FINLAND t SWITZERLAND t CZECHIEN t HUNGARY t CIS t CHINA t JAPAN t
I t Visir our home page at: hnp:llwww.pep.de/
I
USA Benelux Grcal Britain
PEP Frlodular Computers Inc. PEP Modular Cornpulcrs Benelux PEP hlodular Compuierr !UKl Lld
750 Haltday Drive, Bu(ld8ng 9 K a n i n g - A l b c i l - L a w 46 Rwcrside Business Centre
Pitisburgh, PA 15220 8.1780 WEFrlFrlEL SHOREHAhl-eY-SEA
Tel.: ++1 412921 3322 Tel: r + 3 2 1012 461 04 08
F a x ++1 412 921 3356 Fax: ++32 1012 461 00 31
Toll f r e e : 8001228-1737
Postbus 9712
NL-A501 LV BRED4 Modular Computers
Tcl . 1-31 (0176 5217 957
Fax ++31 !OV65217 959
France
EURO PEP Paris Swcdcn
Pol.!nd
PEP hlodular Cor:ipu~srsSp >on
RD Elektronikk RS
Lcs Burcaux d u blanolr
18 C h c m n du Fond du Chbne
PEP Modular Carnpulcrs AB
Box 1430
"1. K r z v v i c k e o o 9 Postboks 104
F-78 620 YETANG LA VlLLE
Tel.: 1133 I01 1 39 lG 10 30
5-18314 TABY
Tcl : ++46!01 8 756 72 60
1405 Langhus.
Fax: ++33 101 1 39 16 10 25 F a x ++48!01 8 732 63 10
Tlf.64 86 99 70. F a x 64 86 99 20
Email: sales@ade.no
Din partner for sannlidssysterner
M- Modules a
/J
--
3
imart Module Piggybacks for use with
he PEP SMART I/O Concept
The SMART I/O project is based on a
completely new PEP concept offering a
cost efficient open-system for Industrial
automation and real-time computing.
SMARTMODULES are added to the

SMART-BASE or SMART-EXTension units to
increase the 110 capacity of the system. A
colourful palette of intelligent modules offering
digital, analog or counter I10 are available
with the option to develop custom modules
through the PEP OPEN interface specification.
Communication with the SMART-BASE is

realized by a 3-wire SPI (Serial Peripheral
Interface) line with a n interrupt at level 1
(IRQI) being issued to the host C P U by three
SMART-MODULES on the SMART-BASE and
the first module of the first connected
SMART-EXTension module. As many as four
SMART-EXTension units may be cascaded to
provide space for up to eleven SMART-
MODULES.
Typical Applications :
I ~ ~ d u s t r i Cornputins
al
Indusrrial Process Col~trol
Datil Logging
Flexible Loop Control
Fuzzv.Loeic
. L.
Control
Construction i\ntoln;ltio~l
Factory Autorr~ation
Specifications
2.5 kV Optoisolated from the system 1~ront h Green LEDs
8 Digtal Channels (24V DC)

6 Independent Groups
Common GND
pptions;;;~ 0
;.;;h
; OD the
< 5mA lnput Current

Fllter set to 200H7. (5ms)
Overvoltage Protection: (300V190ps)
F G W e r h 5mW (min.), 100mW (mas.)
Switch O N Delay : 2ms (approx.)
Switch OFF Delay : 2ms (approx.)
High Level : > 10 DCV
1 Low Level :<8VDC
Digital
Input Driver Interface
Gnd (common)
kolation 2.5 kV Optoisolated from the Yellow LEDs

system (On when OIP is ON)
8 Digital Channels
2 Independent Groups 5mW (min.), 270mW (max.)
High-Side Switch (Common Vcc)
500mA Continuous Current
Inductive Load Protection (clamp d~ode)
Overvoltage Protection (90VIlOps)
Power ONIOFF Protection
r h 70g
Glitch-Free Power O N
8 Dig Out Output Voltage : 24V D C (16-24V)
z4v oc o SA
Switch ON Delay : 3ps (at 24V)
Switch OFF Delay : 13011s (at 24V)
\ \ Max.Frequency . l!& square wave
Output ON : Intern. Logical '0'
Output OFF : Intern. Logical '1'
Outputs after Reset : OFF
FHZHYP*;aFE
+Vcc (common)
Digital
r-----? - I
-
-
-
-
Lp- -
-
~ ~ 7
4 Differential Voltage Inputs
Input Range +/- 10V
12-bit ADC with 1-bit non-linearity
LA
EEPROM . . 256-bit serial EEPROM for Calibration
Data
10-bit Repeating Accuracy Front Red LEDs

Overvoltage Protection (+I-35V) (user configurable)
Input Impedance approx. 450kfi
Filter set to 1Old-E
On&p Reference Voltage
50ps Conversion Time @ lMHz SCLK
2 Unipolar/Bipolar Digital Channels

Max. Output Swing of +I-10V or 0..10V
12-bit D/A Resolution
5mA max. Output Current
4mV 2e;o Code Offset &or (Unipolar)

Settling T i e 20ps with 1.8kh load
and 0..10V Voltage Swing
kolation 2.5 kV Optoisolated from the system . F b k t . Vcc : 24V DC
6 Relay O U ~ ~ U ~ S - N O I IOpen
II~Y /Front h 6 Yellow LEDs : Relav CLOSED
Glitch-Free Power On
Max. Switching Voltage : 250V AC
~ n e /I~ 1 Green LED
1 Yellow LED
:External Vcc
:User
n
Max. Switching Current : 2A
Switch ON Current Rate : 8M3ms Power 160mW max. (LEDs ON)
Sustained Current : 3A Consumption 23mW min (LEDs OFF)
Switch OFF Current Rate : 2M2ms
Max. Load : 60W/125VA
6 NiO Relay
OQa
Max. Switching Frequency : lOOHz
Contaa Resistance : 4mfi
Settling T i e : 4ms Corn. Ext.Vcc
\ \
-I
-
-
System Digital -
-
Intehce Output Driver
- 24V OC
-
Line Out
i COMPLETE
OPEN
SYSTEMS
-
-L
- Corn. Ext. Gnd
Overview
T h e SM-DIN1 provides eight optoisolated 24V D C T h e same technology is used for the SM-THERM as
digital inputs arranged in 6 independent groups. The for the SM-PT100 but with 4 thermocouple inputs.
maximum input switching frequency is set to 200Hz Sensor-break detection is provided as well as an addi-
(or faster on request) with the system registering a tional PTlOO channel for cold junction compensation.
logical '1' when the input exceeds 10V. Logical '0' is
returned when the input falls below 8V. A low-pass fil- B o t h the ShbPT100 and SM-THERM n~odulespos-
ter restricts signals exceeding the filter limit and regi- sess a self-calibration ability and have a 256-byte serial
sters a logical '0' with the system The user interface is EEPROM containing module ID, production and uni-
realized by 8 green LEDs (1 per input channel) which que calibration data. Two user configurable red LEDs
illuminate when the input is active and a configurable complete the user interface.
filter on the last channel for interrupts.
P o w e r switching for loads up to 60Wil25VA a n d
drawing up to 2A is provided by the SM-RELl. Surge
T h e SM-DOUT1 provides eight optoisolated 24V D C protection and the ability to switch inductive loads are
digital outputs arranged in 2 independent groups. The built-in features of this versatile module. A freely pro-
maximum output switching frequency is set to lkHz grammable LED on the front panel provides the user
(square wave) with the output i n the O N state when interface together with 6 relay status LEDs and a n
the system issues a logical '0'. The maximum conti- external 24V supply signal LED.
nuous output supply current is limited to 500mA and
provision has been made to cater for inductive loads. k 2 3 2 serial communication according to the
The user interface is realized by 8 yellow LEDs (1 per EIAITIA-232E interface definition is supported within
output channel) which illuminate when the output is the SM-RS232 module. Interface parameters such a s
ON. baud rate, stop bits, data bits and parity are defined by
software running under the operating system.
A 12-bit, fast, bipolar (+I-10V DC), 4-channel ana- Communication tasks are handled directly by the
log input module is supported by the SM-DAD1 which S C C 3 port (TxD3 and RxD3) of the 68302 chip on the
apart from it's A D C role, may also be used a s a fast SMART-BASE. This module can only be used in the
12-bit, 2-channel unipolar/bipolar 10V D C analog out- first slot of the SMART-BASE where the CPU port
put module. Two configurable red LEDs on the front lines can be used on serial 110. Two front.panel LEDs
panel form the user interface while a n on-board show data transmission.
EEPROM stores the module I D , production and uni-
que calibration data required by the signal converter. AH the modules except the SM-RELl are available
for operation on the SMART-BASE / SMART EXT in
T h e S M - P T ~ Osupports
O 4 inputs for 3 or 4-wire the E2 extended temperature range (-40°C to +85OC).
PTlOO sensors driven by a n on-board generated 400pA The SM-RELl operates as specified between -40°C and
constant current source that conforms to I E C 751. The +70°C. Care should be taken not to exceed the 6.75W
differential analog input consists of a channel niultiple- power capacity of the SMART-BASE when assembling
xer, OP-AMP voltage feed-back impedance converter a system with the maximum number of SMART-EXT
and a high resolution 16-bit delta-sigma converter. units. PEP has allowed a nonkinal consumption of
1.0 kV D C system isolation is provided by opto-coup- 300mW for each SM-MODULE slot arid assumes that
COMPLETE
lers arid and isolated D C I D C converter. a n empty SMARIBASE consumes a maximum OPEN
1700niW. SYSTEMS
1.0 kV Optoisolated hom the system
n
SM-PT100 3 or 4 - w e connection
Measurement Range : -200°c to 850°c
Accuracy : +/- 0.2"C
4 PTlOO or 4 Thermocouple Differential
Inputs with Self Cahbration Ei,"yte S e n d EEPROM for Calibration
/Panrln
Overvoltage Protection : +/- 35V
Conversion T m e : 125ms (typ.)
Input Impedance : 10MQ (min.) Front 2 Red LEDs (user configurabltj
Resolution : 16-bit
Software Programmable Input Filter
n
d
I
4 C h (4-w1re)
PTVX ~nputs SM-THERM Open Sensor Detection Power 400mW (min.),500mw ( m a . )
Measurement Range : Consum tion
-21O0C-1200°C (Type J
\ -270°C-1000°C (Type E)
Cold Junction
4-w~reP T ~ o oInput
: h t e r n d PTloo
(not supplied)
r b 40g Dnver
Thermocouple
u Driver
Transceiver Rx and CTS

Up to 19200 Baud
Transceiver Tx and DTR

n
t Power
Consumption
23mW (min.), 75mW ( m a . )
Up to 19200 Baud
256 byte Serial EEPROM

r h 40,
@
u
SM-RSZ32
Front Green Rx LED
Yelow Tx LED
1 Send System
Inlerface Inletface
CIS
LND
Ordering
Information
Product 1 Descri~tion 1 Order No.

DIN1 ISMART-MODULE
with 8 Optoisolated, 24V DC Digital Inputs 4229
DOUTl d , D C I S O O ~~Ai g i t a lOutputs
SMART-MODULE with 8 ~ b t o i s o ~ a t e24V 4231
DAD 1 SMART-MODULE with 4-ch. AID (+I- lOV), 2-ch. DIA (+I- 10V, O..lOV) 9868
RELl SMART-MODULE with 6 Normally Open Relay Outputs 12238
SM- PTlOO SMART-MODULE with 4 Optoisolated, 3 or 4-wire PTlOO Inputs 12405
THERM SMART-MODULE with 4 Optoisolated, Thermocouple Inputs 12426
RS-232 SMART-MODULE with RS232 (Rx, Tx, RTS, CTS) Interface (Slot 1 only) 12461
SCR-2"7 Screw Terminals for SMART-MODULE Piggybacks. Pack of 5, 2x7 Array 10893
DUMMY FP For Unused SMART-MODULE Slots, available in Packs of 20 10894
For more information about the interrupt possibilities and power limitations of the SMART 110, please refer to
the SMART 110 data sheet.
--
rir
3
?
.
-
CI
C
-,-.
u
Z
5
-
Germany USA Sweden Benelux

PEP Modular Computers GmbH PEP Modular Computers Inc. . PEP Modular Computers AB PEP Modular Computers S.A.
Apfeltranger StraRe 16 750 Holiday Drive, Building 9 Box 1430 Konig Albert 1-laan 46
D-87600 KAUFBEUREN PITTSBURGH, PA 15220 S.18314 TABY B-1780 WEMMEL
%I.: ++19 (0) 83 41 803 0 Tel.: ++I (0) 412 921-3322 Tel.: ++46 (0) 8 756 72 60 Tel.: ++32 (0)2 461 04 08
Fas: ++49 (0) 83 41 803 499 Fax: + + I (0) 412 921-3356 Fax: ++46 (0) 8 732 63 10 Fas: ++32 (0)2 461 00 31
Toll-free: 8001228-1737
Postbus 9712
NL-4801 LV BREDA
Tel.: ++31 (0)76 217 957
Fax: ++31 (0)76 217 959
France Great Britain Austria Poland

EURO PEP PARIS PEP Modular Computers (UK) Ltd PEP Modular Computers PEP Modular Computers
Les Bureaux du klanoir Riverside Business Centre. Unterdorf 52 ul. Krzywickiego 9
18 Chemin du Fond du C h h e StlOREHAM.BY-SEA A-6073 SISTRANS pokoj 100111002
F-78 620 L'ETANG LA VILLE BNJ3 6RE Tel.: ++43 (0) 512 78 762 02.078 WARSZAWA
Tel.: ++33 (0) 1 39 16 10 30 Tcl.: t + J 4 (0) 1273 44 11 88 Fas: +-643 (0) 512 78 841 Tel : ++48 (0) 22 25 13 35
Fas: ++33 (0) 1 39 16 10 25 [:as: + + J 1 (0) 1273 44 l l 99 Fas : ++48 (0) 22 25 13 35
* USA * GERMANY * FRANCE + U K * S W E D E N * BENELUX * P O L A N D * ITALY f SPAIN NORWAY *

D E N M A R K * FINI.AND * AUSTRIA * SWITZERLAND * C Z E C H I E N * HUNGARY * CIS * C H I N A *JAPAN *
-
7 .L
,
-
~
Modular ComputersB
All t r a d e m a r k s are recognized
lM
0 PEP 1995 Subject to change wilhoul noli
Modular Computers G ~ ~ H
. .- -
)k'eImmgerStr& 16 Telefon 0834 1403-0 15 Y
87600 Knubeuren Telcfax OR34 1-803499
Gerl~luny
" .
DECLARATION O F CECONFORMITY
I...
...
,
nccording EC-directjvl: 91/338/EWG tegntding elcctromegrktic cornpntibility (E'MC)
Product: S~~AR I 0TSTARTERRIT

(SMART-BASE-ModuleL03. SMART-EXT., SM-DM, SM-DOUT)
a f oduct d e . t c r i p ~ l ~ The tests listed bolow were cnl~iedout when the mentioned product
w u instnlled as an EMI-compliant stnnd alone system will1 ferrite core
arround shielded power line and running 1SnGRAF.
(Tesweport 95KFC155 / Intertest)
1 ELECTRICAL SAFETY EN60950 7/93
ENS5022 7/94 t'DE0878 PI 311 1.89 Cl~ssA

(Limlts and Methods of Mensura~nc~rtof mdio interkrence characferi~ticsof inforrnntiun tcchnulu~y tquipmtnr)
-.2 EN50082-2 JMISSION

lEC&Jr-z IEC IOr)()-4-2 ESD Air dIsch.ElkV/ Direct dischPkV
IECAO 1-4 IECIW-4-4 Bur% 2kVp\vcr lint
lEC8O 1-3 1ECICKK)-4-5 Surge 50nVaryrn/SOOVsym
ENVSOI 40 lEC1~-4-3 El-mngn. Flclds IOVItn
ENVS0140 IEClnnO-4-6 El-mnp~l.Currents IOVIm
Jk u n t e r RUcker
Technicul Dircctor
TELEFRANG A 6
SlOX Analogue Module S48
G e n e r a l Description
S48 is an I/O module with eight
differential analogue inputs and two
outputs. Each input can be set up as
two single-end inputs. Voltage,
current, resistive transducers and
thermocouples can be measured.
Operating modes and scaling factors
are saved in an EEPROM. A PLC pro-
gram permits advanced local control
and regulation in the module.
1/0 Mix
Analogue Inputs: 8 differential or 16 single-end 12-bit inputs,

each settable a s + 10 V, 2 2 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20
mA, 0-20 kR Pot, 10 kR NTC or Pt100 Tempera- .
ture Transducers.
-. , Analogue Outputs: 2 AO, each 0 (2) - 10 V or 0 (4) - 20 mA, 10 bits
Versions: S48, SlOX Analogue 1/0 Module
MX.12/960327/TF
TF SlOX S48 ANALOGUE MODULE p 23
Min Typ Max Unit
Analogue Input Voltage

Differential Common-Mode
Resolution
Accuracy 25 "C
Analogue Output Voltage

Load Current
Output Noise
Analogue Output Current

Load Impedance
Analogue Output Resolution 10 bits

Accuracy 25 "C '/4 1 O/O
Accuracy 2 - 10 V Range 1 2 %
Drift -20 "C to 75 "C 150 PP~~/"C
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature Range -20
Storage Temperature Range -40
Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions (excl DIN clip)
Weight
Revisions
First card layout
2 A 0 added
TELEFRANG AB
64 Dl / DO MODULE S27
,
3
,,--. .
.
,
.
G e n e r a l Description
S27 is a general purpose digital
1/0 module with 64 110 pins, indi-
vidually selectable as inputs or
outputs. Each output can supply up
to 0,2 A and includes short circuit
protection. Through the built-in
CPU, selectable options include
digitally filtered and edge triggered
inputs with levels selectable from 0 -
35 V, PLC programming, multiplex-
ing, watchdog etc. The module
communicates with the central com-
puter via the opto-isolated SlOX
bus.
Order Number
6s S27; SlOX 64 Dl / DO MODULE
6s S27-1; Optional Terminal Card for 527
MX.l2/960327fYE
Electrical Specifications (Tam, = 20 OC)
Min Typ Max Unit
Power Supply Voltage 10

Power Supply Current
(Outputs off, inputs inactive) 15
(Outputs on, no load) 60
Input Voltage Range

l nput Impedance
Output Saturation Voltage (100 mA)

Output Short Circuit Current 100
SlOX Bus Current (no Communication)

..
~nlhronrnentalSpecifications
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature Range
Dimensions (excluding 35 rnm
DIN clip)
Weight
Revisions
Rev 0 First series
Rev 2 Pullup outputs
Rev 3 Internal clocking fix
TELEFRANG AB
DIGITAL I/O MODULE S45

General Description
S45 is a general purpose digital
I/O module with 7 sourcing outputs
and 14 inputs, all 10 V - 35 V DC.
The outputs can supply 0.5 A each
and have short circuit protection.
Through the built-in CPU, several
options are selectable including
digitally filtered and edge triggered
inputs, pulse counters, increment
and absolute (Gray) encoder inputs,
watchdog, PLC, etc. The module
communicates with the central corn-
puter via the opto-isolated SlOX
bus.
Block Diagram
FUSE
24V 2 4'.i
DC I 3.15A
I i DC
POWER
? 4'4
RESET OUTPUTS 5OOmA
110-
MX. 12/960327/YE
Electrical Specifications (Tam,= 20 OC)
Min Typ Max Unit
Power Supply Voltage

(Outputs off, inputs pulldown)
lnput Voltage Range

High-level Input Voltage
lnput Current (Vin -

Low-level lnput Voltage
24 VDC)
Output Saturation Voltage
Output Current
Output Short Circuit Current
Output Off Leakage Current

(Vsupply = 24 VDC) 500 PA
SIOX Current (no Communication) 0.9 1 mA
Maximum square wave count frequency

C8 - C13 1 kHz
Cl4 20 kHz
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature Range 0 + 55 "C
Storage Temperature Range -40 + 85 "C
Dimensions (excluding 35 mm
DIN clip) 140 x 81 x 25 mm
Weight 230 9
- Removable connection: blocks with screw terminals are PHOENIX con-

tact type MSTB. Maximum wire area is 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12).
Installation notes
Afault-free operation of the text display requiresa distance of 250 mm or
more between all sourcesgeneiating radiated noise and theLCA300B20.
This applies also to the data lines and power supply lines of the CCA 3001
320.
If the cable length exceeds 5 m,we recommendshieldedcables(grounded
at both ends). Please note that this may require an equipotential bonding
conductorwith a cross section of at least 10 times that of the cable shield
(due t o equalizing currents!).
Cables to the LCA 3001'320 should be separated from high voltage cables
and high-frequency cables.
/ TEXT DISPLAY LCA 300/LCA 320

L
Description I
I
,
-.
I 61
O 1994 (
\
!STEME LAUER GMBH D 72669 Unterensingen 7 ~49(0)7022/9660-0 FAX +49(0)7022/9660-274 "i

3-
Specifications
Operating voltaqe +24V DC, * 20%
Power 8W
Enclosure type (according to IEC 529) front IP 65
rear: IP 20
Conncctions 2-pole plug connector
25-pole SubD female connector
LC4 300.11320.1 add. 15-pole Sub-D connector
LG4 300.213 add. 9-pole Sub-D female connector
LC4 320.213 9-pole Sub-D connector
Humidity no condensation at the rear max. 95%
Noise immunity seeflanufacturer information
Temperature storage -25...+70° C
operation 0...+50° C
Dis~da~ LCD (LED-backqround illumination)
Read&pglc
- (60" up_!a~ds and 60' downwardsu2E
Number of lines 2 (LO\ 300) 14 (LCA 3201
Number of characters per line 40
Character
.. height, pixel matrix 5mm, 5x7Dots
Character set ASCII, Katakana (8 characters freely definable)
K~JS 7 combined functionlcontrol keys, 1 shift key
LED displays 3 system LEDs, 7 qreen LED8 in functionlcontrolkeys
Message call Multiplex
Message paqes max. 1024
Operatinq paqes max.256
Idle. messaqe, help pages 32 lines
Memory (for firmware and texts) Flash PROM 64 kB
Variable formats (ACTUAUPRESET) BIT, STRING, BCD, BIN, VBIN, WORD, TIMER, ASCII
Dimensions
.
- (without connectors) 216 x 84 x 57 mm
Weight LC4 300 ca. 450 g
LCA 320 ca. 600 g
Elements on the rear of the LCA 3001320:
Front panel cutout

1. - Cutout for glass fuse 1 A mT (Fuse)
- 2-pole RIA terminal for power supply (24V. OV)
- Jumper for normal position ,,AUTO", aux. operation ,,PROG" ')
- 25-pole Sub-D female connector for serial programmable controller
interfacing and programming (RS 232ATY)
'
* The PROG position enables the LCA 300/320 version number to be displayed - 6.3 mm flat connector for ground connection
after cycling power. This information should be ava~lablein any case for - Potentiometer for contrast setting (CONT) i
support inquiries. 9
rn
/ TEXT DISPLAY LCA 300/LCA 320 Description 1 1271
O 1994 by SXSTEME LAUER GMBH D 72669 Unterensingen TEL +49(0)7022/9660-0 FAX +49(0)7022/9660-274
v::
I. . -2 i-,
. .. ,
0, ' ' ::,j '. .. j '?
Maintenance
The LCA 3001320 text display is maintenance-free.
Warning!
Static charge of the front panel is possible. Clean only with
a moist cloth.
This is especially important when using the LCA 3001320 in
an Ex area.
Warning!
The LCD display contains poisonous substances.
Do not touch the display, if it is damaqed.
.. -~ - ... ~~-- - ~-p----.....-p.p---.- ~-
Warr~irq'
The designated product is only intended for being installed
in other machines. Commissioning is prohibited, until
conformity ofthe final product with the regulation 89/392/
EWG has been ascertained.
/PLC:
:LCA,'
( TEXT DISPLAY LCA 300/LCA 320 Description 1

1
O 1994 STEME LAUER GMBH D 72669 Unterensingen Tr 49(0)7022/9660-0

J
FAX +49(0)702219660-274 I C
L PS Series
250 Watts Single Output
The LPS Series of power supplies is an
AC/DC input, single output design offering
the latest in high technology performance.
This rugged U-channel design measures
only 5" x 9" x 2" and features active power
factor correction. Class B EMI, high
eff~ciency,and very high reliability. The
LPS Series is ideal for telecomrnunciations
and computer peripheral applications, test
and industrial equipment, medical
~nstrumentation,and business machines.
S P E C I A L FEATURES IILECTRICAL SPEC1 F I C A T I O N S

Active power factor correction lnp u t
IEC 555-2 compliance Input range . . . . . . . 85 VAC to 264 VAC; 120 to 370 VDC
Remote sense & remote inhibit Frequency. . . . . . . . 47 - 440 Hz
Power fail Inrush current . . . 20 A max, cold start Q 25°C
Single wire current sharing Efficiency. . . . . . . 75% typical at full load
Built-in EM1 filter EM1 filler . . . . . . . FCC Class B conducted and radiated, ClSPR 22
Low output ripple Class Bconducted and radiated, EN55022 class B
Supervisory output 5V 8 100mA conducted and radiated VDE 0878 PT3 class B
Overvoltage protection conducted and radiated.
Overload protection Power factor . . . . 0.99 typical
Thermal overload protection Safety ground
DC power good leakage currenl . . < 0.5mA Q 50/60Hz, 264 VAC input
Optional wilh fan cover -CF
Output
Maximum power . 250W with 30 CFM forced air with cover (-C).
13NVII<ON\!MII.NTAL Without cover: 200W with 30 CFM forced air.
Operating temperature:
0" to 50°C ambient; derate each
Adjuslment range *5% minimum
Supervisory
output at 2.5% per degree from 50"
output . . . . . . . . . 5V @ 100 mA regulated
to 70°C
Hold-up time . . . . 20 ms at 250 watt load and 115 VAC nominal line
Eleclromagnetic susceptibility: Overload
designed to meet IEC 801.-2, -3, -4, proteclion . . . . . . Short circuit prolection on all outputs. Case overload
-5, -6, Level 3 protected @ 110% to 145% above peak rating
Overvoltage
Humid~ty:operating; non- protection . 5V output: 5.7 to 6.7 VDC. Other outputs 10% to 25%
condensing 596 to 95% above nominal output
Vibration: Three orthogonal axes. Logic Control
sweep at 1 ociimin, 5 rnin. dwell at Power failure . . . . TTL logic signal goes high 50 - 150msec after 5V
four major resonances 0.7G peak 5 output. It goes low al least 4 rnsec before loss of
Hz to 500 Hz, operalional regulation
Remote onlofl . . . Requires an external contact (N.0 or N.C) to inhibit
Storage temperature: -40" to 85°C outputs
Tempcratvre coefficienl: -+ .0496 per DC OK . . . . . . . . . TTL logic goes high 50-150 msec after 5V output. It
degree C goes low when there is loss of regulation.
MTBF demonstraled: > 550,000

hours at full load and 25°C ambient VDE 0805lEN60950 (lEC950) 11774-3336-1262
condilions UL UL195O El32002
CSA CSA 22.2-231Lcvel 5 LR53982C CB Cerli,icate and report
NEMKO EN 60950lEMKO-TUE P95103843 CE Mark
(74-sec)203
BABT EN00950lBS7002 PSI606027
Norlh Arnerica 619-757-1880 Europe (UK): 01381-440044

ORDERING INFORMATION
1. Peak current lasting < 30 seconds with a maximum 10% duty cycle.
2. At 25°C including initial tolerance. line voltage, load currents and output voltages adjusted to lactory settings.
3. Peak-to-peak with 20 MHz bandividth and 10 pF in parallel with a 0.1 pF capacilor at rated line voltage and load ranges
Note: -CF suHix added to the model number indicates cover with fan.
M3 ( 4 places)
M3 (2 places) 9 ~ 1 1 "6.32 UNC (8 places)
PIN ASSIGNMENTS
SKI PIN 1 Neutral

PIN 2 Line
PIN 3 Ground
SK3 PIN 1 + Remote sense

PIN 2 - Remote sense
PIN 3 Remole inhibil (N.0)
PIN 4 Remote inhibit (N.C)
PIN 5 Common
PIN 6 Current sharing
PIN 7 Power Fail
PIN 8 DC Power Good
SK4 Fan's power source (12V B 150 mA)

SK5 Supervisory output supply (5V @ 10OmA)
SK3 Molex 22-01-1084

P1ns:08-70-0057
SK4 Molex 22-01-3027

Pms: 08-50-0114
SK5 Molex 22.01-3027

Plns: 08-50-0114
NOTES
1. Speciticattons subject to change without notice.
2 All dimcns~onsare in irichcs and (rnni), totcrancc
I S + .Ol".
3. To cnablc normally closed rernolc inhibit.

cut jumper J I.
4. Mounting maximum insertion dcpth is 0.15".
5. Warranty. 1 year
6. Wcigtit: 2.6 tb / 1.19 kg
24
PowcrFAX 619-930-0881 Doc No: 1026 REV 8.15.96
00000 INS'I'AI,I,A'I'ION INSTRUCTIONS
AN11 O I ' I ~ I ~ A ' P I N G
ASTEC f2 2- FOR IJS2.52, l,PS23, IPS234 AND LPS255
I?evisctl Dntc: Augnst 7, 1996

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
To comply w i t h t h e ~ u b l i s h e ds a f e t y s t a n d a r d s , t h e f o l l o w i n g m u s t . b e o b s e r v e d when u s i n g t h i s power s u p p l y .
Umden z u r Z e i t g u l t i g e n S i c h e r h e i t s b e s r i m n u n g c n zu genugcn; musscn d i e nachstehendenMaOnahmenbeim E i n s a t z

d i e s e r N e t z g e r a r e b e r u c k s i c h r i g r werden.
Maximum ambient t c m p c r a t u r c a r o u n c r h c poucr s u p p l y must n o t c x c e e d 50 d c g C.
Das N e r z g c r A t d a r f b i s zu e i n c r U n ~ g e b u n g s t e ~ ~ i p c r a tvuorn max 50 g r d C e i n g e s e t z t u e r d e n
The power s u p p l y i s i n t e n d c d f o r u s e as a componcnt p a r t o f o t h e r equipment. When i n s t a l l i n g t h e

power s u p p l y and m a k i n g i n p u t and o u t p u t c o n n e c t i o n s , t h c r e l e v a n t s a f e t y s t a n d a r d s e.g. UL 1950;
IEC950; EN 6 0 950; VDE 0005; CSA 950 and CSA 22.2; No. 23.4 must b e c o m p l i e d w i t h , e s p e c i a l l y t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e s , c l e a r a n c e s and d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n p r i m a r y
u i r i n g and e a r t h or s c c o n d n r y (SELV) u i r i n g .
E i n N e t z g e r a t i s 1 e i n E i n b a u t e i l i n c i n cntapt.cchcndes Gerat u n d b e i H e r s t e l l u n g d e r e l e k t r i s c h e n
V e r b i n d u n g c n irn u n d aln Gerar s i n d d i e e i n s c h l i i g i g e n Destinlnungen u i e 2.0. UL 1950; IEC950; EN 60
950; VDE 0005; CSA 950; CSA 22.2; No. 234; z u b e a c h t e n u n d e i n z u h a l t e n , insbesondere d i e
A n f o r d e r u n g c n f u r K r i e c h u n d L u f t s t r c c k e n u n d D i c k e d e r I s o l a t i o n z w i s c h e n P r i m a r - und
S c h u t z l e i t e r - K r e i s und P r i m a r - z u l r Sckundiirstronikreis (SELV-Kreis).
The o u t p u t power t a k e n f r o m t h e s u p p l y must n o t exceed t h e r a r i n g g i v e n o n t h e "Power Supply"
D i e A u s g a n g s l c i s l u n g d a r f d i e a u f dcm N e t z g c r i i r imgcgcbenen Wcrre n i c h t u b e r s t e i g e n .
T h i s power s u p p l y i s s u i t a h l e f o r d i f f c r r n t r a t e d v o l t a g c s . The s w i t c h o v e r t o t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g
r a t e d v o l t a g e w h i c h b c l o n g s t o t h e s p e c i f ~ ca p p l i a n c e r s done a u t o m a t i c a l l y i n t h e a p p l i a n c e .
D i e s e s N e t z g e r a t i s t f u r v c r s c h i c d c n c Nennspannung g e e i g n c t . . 0 i e . A n p a s s u n g a n d i e j e u e i l i g e
Netzspannung, a n d i e d a s GerAr a n g c s c h l o s s e n i s t , c r f o l g t a u t o m a t i s c h i m G e r a t .
The f u s e s h o u l d o n l y b c r c p l a c c d b y F6.3AH. AC 250V, t y p e 21606.3, by Litrelfuse; t y p e SOCF063H.

b y TRIAD: a n d r y p c S501, b y Cooper.
D i e S i c h e r u n g d a r f n u r dur-ch d c n F6.3AH. 250V. t y p c 21606.3 clcn L i t t e l f u s e , t y p e 50CF063H den TRIAD

und, t y p c S501 d c n Coopcr.
The e a r t h w i r e must b e c o n n e c t e d o n l y t o t h e c a r t h i n g p o i n t which i s marked w i t h t h e e a r t h symbol.
D e r S c h u t z l e i t e r niufl a n d e r mi t dcm S c h u t z l e i t e r s y m b o l b e z e i c h c t e n S t e l l e a n g e s c h l o s s e n uerden.
The d i s c o n n e c t i o n f r o m t h c l i n c must b c i n t h e end syarcm.
D i e Trennung VOIII N c t z l ~ ~ u if m
l E n d g c r i l t d u r c h g c f u h r t wcrdcn.
T h i s u n i t c o n t a i n s secondary o i l r p u r s c x r c c d i n q 2IOVA. IJhcn i n s t a l l i n g i n t o t h e end s y s t e m c a r e must

b e t a k e n t h a t t h o s e s c c o n d i r y output.; and t h c a p p r o p r i a t e w i r e s may n o t b e touched.
Oas N e t z g e r a r h a t Sckund;lrnusgringc nit Spannungen u b e r 240VA. 8 e i m E i n b a u i n das Endsystem i s t

d a r a u f z u a c h t c n , dan d i c s c S c k ~ n d ~ i r a u s g k n gicm d d i e d n z u g c h o r i g e n L e i t u n g c n n i c h t b e r u h r t u e r d e n
konnen
The c i r c u i t wi r i n ! ~n f t h r p n w r r :;q>pl y i:; ~ w d ci n such ;I way t h a t components l i k e c a p a c i t o r s a r e

p o s i t i o n c d i n f l 0111 o f r l i r prwr:t. h l ~ p p l y ( u s e . TIICI.CIOI.C OIL. mi t IIIUSC IE p r o c c c t e d b y CI f u s e i n
t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n system.
D i e S c h a l t u n g d c s N e t z g c r A t c s i s t s o a u s g e l e g t , dafl O a u t c i l e u i e K o n d c n s a t o r e n v o r d e r S i c h e r u n g
des N e t z g c r i t e s l i c g c n . Aus d i c s c m Grundc ~ ~ ~uun b f cl d i n g t d a r a u f g c a c h t e t werden, daO das Gerat
durch eine Sicherung in d c r I n s t a l l a t i o n abgesichcrt i s t .
Hazardous v o l t a g c s e x i s t i n r h c p r i m a r y c i r c u i t s . O i s c o n n c c t power s u p p l y b c f o r c s e r v i c i n g .
C e f a h r l i c h c Spannung i m P r l m a r - k r c i s . Vor d c r R c p e r a t u r d l c V e r b i n d u n g zurn N e t z c n t f e r n e n .
1ss11c I h t c : Octobcr 5, 1995

Pagc 1 of 5
00000 r33
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
ASTEC FOR LPS252, LPS253, LPS254 AND LPS255
Revised Date: September 11, 1996
. . 11. Beware o f i n t e r n a l L e t h a l v o l t a g e s d u e t o c h a r g e d c a p a c i t o r s even a f t e r AC i n p u t i s d i s c o n n e c t e d .

A Minimum o f 5 m i n u t e s s h o u l d b e a l l o w e d a f t e r AC i n p u t power i s d i s c o n n e c t e d b e f o r e h a n d l i n g .
V o r s i c h t m i t t o t l i c h e m s t r o h m i n n e r h i m b d i e s e m g e r a h t wegengelladenen c a p a c i t o r s , s e l b s t wenn AC
strohm a b g e s t e l l t 1st. Funf ( 5 ) m i n u t e n w a r t e n zum anfassen.
12. I n c a s e o f f a i l u r e , t h i s power s u p p l y must b e r e t u r n e d t o Astec A u t h o r i z e d S e r v i c e S t a t i o n f o r

S e r v i c i n g t o ensure compliance w i t h s a f e t y requirements.
S o l l t e d i e s e s g e r a h t f e h l e n , nach A s t e c A u t h o r i z e d S e r v i c e S t a t i o n Zuruchsenden zum i n s u r e n dass

b e d i n g u n g e n noch g u l t i g s i n d .
13. T h i s power s u p p l y i s CE marked f o l l o w i n g t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f t h e Low V o l t a g e D i r e c t i v e , T3/23/EEC.
CC
14. The f o l l o w i n g a d d i t i o n a l i t e m s a r e f o r BABT approved u n i t o n l y :
...
The C e r t i f i e d E q u i p n e n t s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d i n an e n c l o s u r e such t h a t :
a) Any u n i n s u l a t e d e l e c t r i c a l c o n n e c t i o n s t o and w i t h i n t h e e n c l o s u r e , o t h e r t h a n t h o s e
c o n n e c t e d t o p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h , a r e w i t h i n a r e s t r i c t e d access l o c a t i o n as d e f i n e d i n
EN60950:1992:clause 1.2.7.3;
b) C o n d u c t i v e p a r t s o f t h e e n c l o s u r e , o t h e r t h a n t h o s e connected t o p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h , s h a l l
h a v e a minimum o f 1.6rnn c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e and 1.Ornn c l e a r a n c e d i s t a n c e from any u n i n s u l a t e d
e l e c t r i c a l c o n n e c t i o n t o o r w i t h i n t h e r e l e v a n t apparatus;
C) C o n d u c t i v e p a r t s o f t h e e n c l o s u r e , o t h e r t h a n t h o s e connected t o p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h , s h a l l
have a minimum o f 5mn c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e and 4mn c l e a r a n c e d i s t a n c e f r o m any p a r t s
c o n d u c t i v e l y c o n n e c t e d t o a n e x c e s s i v e v o l t a g e as d e f i n e d i n EN60950:1992:clause 1.2.8.3;
d) A p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h i s p r o v i d e d f o r s a f e t y i n accordance w i t h EN60950:1992 C l a u s e 2.5.
A m e c h a n i c a l and f i r e e n c l o s u r e i s p r o v i d e d , m e e t i n g t h e requirements o f EF160950:1992 a d l g 2 :

c l a u s e s 4.2.3; 4.2.4; 4.3.14 and 4.4.5
Our Ref.: LPS25?/253/15~1/?55\OI'.C l s s ~ ~Ihtc

c : 0ctol)er 5, 1995
Page 2 of 5
INS'I'AI.I,A'I'ION AND OI'ISltA'l'lNG INSTRUCTIONS
1W1< I,PS2.52. IJ'S253, LPS254 AND LPS255
$4-
INSTRUCTION SHEET FOR LPS25X SERIES

(EINBAU ANLEITUNG FUER LPS25X SERIE)
OUTPUT RATINGS
(AUSGANGS WERTE)
OUTPUT 130 CFM FORCED AIR COOLIF (BEILUFTSTOM MIT 30 CFM)

MODEL VOLTAGE MAX. OUTPUT POWER MAX. OUTPUT CURRENT
(MODEL) (AUSGANGS WITH COVER (MAXIMALER AUSGANGS
SPANNUNG) (MAXIMALE AUSGANGS STROM)
('4 LEISTUNG MIT (A)
ARDECKUNG) (W)
+ 3-6
+ 6-12 250
CONNECTOR PIN DESIGNATION

(STIFT BELEGUNG AM STECKER)
INPUT CONNECTOR
(EINGANGS STECKER)
L~ve(Spa~~nungs- Llve (Spannungs- Live (Spannungs-

Fuehrend) Fuehrend) Fuehrend) Fuehrend)
PIN (STIFT) 3 GND (ERDI:! GI.113 ( E R D E ) GND (ERDE) GND (ERDE)
INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
!77-
FOR LPS252, LPS253, LPS254 AND LPS255
Revised D~tc:Septernber11, 1996
Mechanical Outline For LPS25X Series

Dimensions in cm unless otherwise specified
SKJ
I-&
CUSTOMER MOUNTING HOLES (ALL DIMENSIONS IN CM, a=#6-32, b=m3)
(+--- .- -- --
22.8
d
Botlom View Of Chassis
Side View Of Chassis
...
.I.
Our Rcf.: I.I'S75?/?53/15~1/?55\0P.C
INS'I'AI,I.A'I'ION ANI) OI'El1A'~ING INSTRUCTIONS
f $6 FOR IA'S2.52, LI'S253, IPS253 AND LPS255
Rcviscd Dntc: August 7, 1996
Ventillation Condition For LPS252, LPS253, LPS254 and LPS255

Fan Used: MINEBEA 241 OML-04W-B60
DC 12V 0.4A
DC Input For Fan During Testing: DC12V
Cover with Fan

Fan : MINEBEA 3108NL-04W-B30
DC 12V 0.19A
Our IW.: 1.PS?S?/?S3/?S-I/ISS\Ol'.(:

n'ii victron energie
~IIJ
mains or phase
generator input neutral
earth
phase
inverter input neutral
earth
phase
output neutral
earth
If the load is less than
850 Watt: remove
the wire bridges
under side Filax

illtulalion 1. Connecrion Diagram Kclron F i l m
instructions for t h e V i c t r o n F i l a x victron energie
"@JI
Introduction
T h e Victron Filax is probably the fastest automatic switch box in the world. Appliances running on 230 volts are automatically
switched between a n inverter and the mains, or between an inverter and a generator. The total switching time is less than 20 ms.
T o give but two examples: if the mains or the generator fail, then the microwave oven's clock keeps running and any data in the
computer is preserved.
T h e V ~ c t r o nFilax can be used with any Victron Atlas or Victron Phoenix inverter, up to a capacity of 3500 Watts.
Operation
T h e Filax is situated between a generator or the mains, and an inverter. If the voltage level or the frequency of the generator or
the mains varies, then the Filax switches to the invener. Once the generator or the mains' supply has remained continuously sta-
ble for 3 0 seconds, the Filax switches back. In t h s way, the appliances are continuously protected against damage from voltage
drops. T h e V ~ c t r o nFilax is suitable for modem appliances such as video recorders, computers and microwave ovens, devices
that cannot stand u p (well) to a drop in voltage. The Filax automatic switch box can be used with any type of inverter; the best
results, however, are obtained with an inverter kom Victron Energie.
LED indicators
Mains operation (yellow): The appliances are running on the generatorlmains.
Inverter operation (yellow): The appliances are running on the inverter.
Mains fault (red): The voltage of the generatorlmains has not yet been stable
for a continuous period of 30 seconds.
Installation
0 Install the Filax i n a dry, well-ventilated area. The Filax may be mounted on the wall, using the four specially-drilled holes
in the rear o f the casing. For mounting in this way, 4-rnm, hexagonal bolts are recommended.
3 T n e icput cables from :he generatorim?ins and the inverrer, 2nd the outpct czbles to the appliances s h o ~ ~be l d connected ac-
cording to the wiring diagram (see fig. 1).
0 If a load of less than 850 Watts will be placed on the Filax, then the supplied wire bridges need to be removed (see fig. 1.)
0 T h e generatorlmains input socket needs to be protected against current levels higher than 16 amp. However, the output
socket of low-power generators (up to 3000 Watts) is often sulficiently protected so that any extra protection is unnecessary.
C7 T h e inverter input socket needs to be protected against current levels higher than 16 amp. The output of all Victron Energie
inverters up to 2500 Watts is limited in such a way that for these inverters n o extra protection is needed for the input socket
of the Filax.
0 T h e front of the casing is attached using the four supplied screws. The V ~ c t r o nFilax is now ready for use.
Specifications
Ivlaximum switched power : 3500 Watts (cos phi = 1)
Generatorlrnains input
Voltage : 190 - 240 volts
Frequency : 50 Hz
Inverter input
Voltage : 0 - 240 volts
Frequency : not monitored
T h r e s h o l d s f o r o u t p u t of generatorlmains
For switching to inverter : 180 volts
For switching to generatorlmains : 188 volts
Contifiuous stability interval : 30 sec
Switchin'g f r o m g e n J m a i n s to inverter
Reactjon time for switching
Appliances o n reduced voltage
Total switching time
Switching f r o m i n v e r t e r to gen./mains
Total switching time (cxcl. control) : 4 rns
Dimensions (h x w x d)
Weight
/TAIILOR M A D E E N E R G Y
17 4
GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDING/ USER'S MANUAL
BETRIEBSANLEITUNG / MODE D'EMPLOI
MASS SlNE 24/500 & 481500 - 230V / 50Hz

MASS SlNE 24/500 & 481500 - 117V I 60Hz
MASTERVOLT
Snijdersbergweg 93, 1 1 05 A N Amsterdam
The Netherlands
Tel.: +3l-ZO-3422lOO
Fax: +31-20-6971006 V1. March 2000
.
CONTENTS 1 MASTERVOLT
.' T A B L O R M A D E L N E R G Y
1 GENERALINFORMATION ............................................................... 24
1.1 Useofthismanual ................................................................. 24
1.2 Garantee specification ............................................................. -24
1.3 Quality .......................................................................... 24
1.4 Validity of this manual ............................................................. -24
1.5 Liability .......................................................................... 24
1.6 Changestotheinverter ............................................................. 24
2 SAFETY GUIDELINES AND MEASURES ................................................... 25

2.1 Warningsandsymbols .............................................................. 25
2.2 Use for intended purpose ........................................................... 25
2.3 Organizational measures ............................................................ 25
2.4 Maintenance&repair ............................................................... 25
2.5 Warning for specific dangers ............................................. :...........25
2.6 Warning regarding life support applications .............................................. 26
3 OPERATION ........................................................................... 27
3.1 Switchingonandoff ................................................................ 27
3.2 Indicatorlights .................................................................... 27
3.2.1 On the front of the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-27
3.2.2 On the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-27
4 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 28
22 March 2000 1 MASS Sino 241500 & 48/5001 E N

CONTENTS
TAILOR M A D E I l N L l l G l
5 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29.
7 TECHNOLOGY ......................................................................... 32
7.1 Introduction ....................................................................... 32
7.2 Principle of operation ............................................................... 33
8 INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 34
8.1 Environment ......................................................................34
8.2 Wiring .......................................................................... 34
8.3 Unpacking ..................................................................... 34
8.4 Mounting of the cabinet ............................................................. 35
8.5 Connecting .......................................................................36
8.5.1 Removal of the front panel ....................................................36
8.5.2 ACwiring .................................................................. 36
8.5.3 DC wiring ...................................................................36
8.5.4 Connecting DC wiring ........................................................ 36
8.6 Connecting the remote control panel .................................................. 37
8.7 Commissioning after installation ......................................................37
8.8 Automatic switching between MASS inverter, the AC genset and/or shore power . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
8.9 Lowenergymode ..................................................................37
8.10 Standbymode ....................................................................38
10 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY .....................................................39
E N I MASS Sine 241500 & 481500 1 Mnrch 2000 23

/ i
A.!
GENERAL INFORMATION MASTERVOLT'
/TAILOR m w m r o r
/82
I GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 USE OF THIS MANUAL 1.4 VALIDITY OF THIS MANUAL
This manual serves as a guideline for safe and effec- All of the specifications;:provisions and instructions
tive operation, maintenance and possible correction contained in this manual apply-solely~to.
the Master-
of minor malfunctions of the inverter. It is therefore volt delivered standard versionsof the MASS inver-
obligatory that every person who works on or with ter.
the inverter must be completely familiar with the con-
tents of this manual, and that helshe carefully follows
the instruction contained herein.
Installation of, and work on the Inverter, may be car-
ried out only by qualified, authorized and trained per- Mastervolt can accept no liability for:
@-.riel, familiar with the locally applicable standards
hlld taking into consideration the safety guidelines damage due to use of the inverter;
and measures (chapter 2 of this manual).
possible errors in the manuals and the results
This manual has 20 pages. thereof.
1.2 GARANTEE SPECIFICATIONS CAREFUL l
Mastervolt quarantees that this unit has been built

A Never remove the type
number plate.
according to the legally applicable standards and
specifications. Should work take place, which is not Important technical information required for service,
in accordance with the guidelines, instructions and maintenance & secondary delivery of parts can be
specifications contained in this u s e h manual, then derived from the type number plate.
fl-mage may occur andor the unit may not futfil its
a,ecifications. All of these matters may mean that
the guarantee may become invalid. 1.6 CHANGES TO THE INVERTER
Modifications to the inverter may be carried out only

1.3 QUALITY after the written permission of Mastervolt.
During their production and prior to their delivery, all

of our units are exhaustively tested and inspected.
The guarantee period is two years.
24 March 2000 1 MASS Slno 241500 8 48/500/ E N

2 S A F E N QUlDELlNES AND MEASURES
2.1 WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS 2.3 ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES
Safety instructions & warnings are marked in this The user must always:
manual by the following symbols:
have access to the user's manual;
CAREFUL l be familiar with the contents of this manual.
, A special data, restrictions and rules with

regard to preventing damage
This applies in particular to chapter 2, Safety
Guidelines and Measures.
a WARNING refers to possible injury to 2.4 MAINTENANCE & REPAIR

the user or significant material damage
to the charger if the user does not (care- 1 If the inverter is switched off during maintenance
fully) follow the procedures. andlor repair activities, it should be secured against
unexpected and unintentional switching on:
2.2 USE FOR INTENDED PURPOSE switch off the connection with the batteries or
remove the inverter fuse;
1 The inverter is constructed as per the applicable
safety-technical guidelines. be sure that third parties cannot reverse the
measures taken.
2 Use the inverter only:
2 If required, use only original spare parts. The in-
in a technical correct condition; verter has no serviceable parts, except the fan
in a closed, wel-venti!ated room, protected and pcb.
against rain, moisture, dust and non conden-
sing circumstances;
observing the instructions in the user's and in- 2.5 WARNING FOR SPECIFIC DANGERS
stallations manual.
1 Connect the earth of the inverter output to the
Never use the inverter in situations central ground and use a RCCB switch in the in-
where there is danger of gas- or dust verter output.
explosionl
2 Protect the DC wiring with a fuse, according to
3 Use other than as mentioned above is not consi- the guidelines in this users manual.
dered to be consistent with the intended purpo-
se. Mastervolt is not liable for any damage resul- 3 Check the wiring at least once a year. Defects
ting from failure to comply with the above. such as loose connections, heat damaged cables
etc. must be corrected immediately. -
EN I MASS Sine 241500 8 481500 / March 2000

3 d '7
SAFETY GUIDELINES AND MEASURES
&ASTERVOLT
I'T A I L O R M A D E IINllRGY
/ 84-
4 Do not work on the inverter or the system if it is
still connected to a current source. Only allow
changes in your electrical system to be caried out
by qualified electricians.
5 Connection and protection must be done in ac-

cordance with local standards.
6 Before opening the cabinet of the inverter, switch

off the mains and remove the inverter fuse.
Setting the switch on the front of the inverter
to 0 i s not sufficient I
2.u WARNING REGARDING LIFE SUPPORT

APPLICATIONS
Mastervolt products are not sold for applications in

any medical equipment intended for use as a
component of any life support system unless a spe-
cific written agreement pertaining to such intended
use is executed between the product manufacturer
and Mastervolt. Such agreement will require the
equipment manufacturer either to contract for addi-
tional reliability testing of the Mastervolt parts and/or
to commit to undertake such testing as a part of the
manufacturing process. In addition such rnanufactu-
rer must agree to indemnify Mastervolt from any
c,,,,ns arising from the use of Mastervolt parts in the
life support equipment.
~ -
March 2000 1 MASS Sine 24/500 & 48/5001 EN

3 OPERATION
3.1 SWITCHING ON AND OFF
Switching on: Put the onlofflremote switch on the "overload" + "on"

front of the inverter on "on". The green lamp "inver- The indicator lights overload and on will flash in turn
ter on" lights up, and the inverter will start. If you use if the inverter has beens witched off because of an
a remote control panel, put the ordoff switch to 're- overload condition. The inverter stays off for 1.5 min.
mote', and put the onloff switch on the remote control After that the inverter will restart automatically. If the
panel to 'on'. overload situation repeats itself 10 times within a
period of 5 minutes than the inverter will not restart
Switching off: Put the onlofflremote switch on the automatically. Pressing the onloff switch will restart
front of the inverter on "off". The inverter stops and the inverter.
all the lights that are on, go off.
"low battery"
Careful I The inverter is switched off if the battery voltage is
Switching off the inverter with the switch too low (see table hereunder). If the voltage rises
on the front does not break the connec- above the values given below, the inverter restarts
tion to the mains. The inverter remains connected to autornatically.
the mains.
model 24V 48V
switch off voltage 19V 36V
3.2 INDICATOR LIGHTS switch on voltage 22V 44V
The functions of the indicator lights on the front are: "temperature"

The inverter switches off in high ambient temperatu-
inverter on: inverter is switched on res and /or sustained overload. After cooling down,
overload: inverter is overloaded the inverter restarts autornatically.
overload + on: overload in 'wait' state
low battery: battery voltage is too low
temaerature: inverter is overheated 3.2.2 On the remote control
In case of connecting a remote control panel, you
Short description: can read the following after switching on the inverter
(see fig. 3):
"inverter on"
The green light shows when the inverter is switched inverter on: inverter is switched on
on. failure: inverter is overloaded, overheated
or battery voltage is too low
"overload"
Glows if the inverter is overloaded. Depending on the
load, the inverter will shut down after a short period.
EN I MASS Sino 24500 & 481500 1 March 2000 27

TROUBLE SHOOTING
ri T A I L O R M A D E C N L R G V
1a c
-r TROUBLE SHOOTING
Malfunction
- -
Possible cause
- -
What to do
No output voltage Battery voltage too low Check battery voltage with a Volt-
meter, disconnect the users or
charge the batteries.
Battery voltage too high Check battery voltage, -

switch off the charger.
Fuse in DC distribution failed Replace failed fuse.
Short circuit or overloaded Disconnect load from the

inverter.
On/off switch on 'remote' You can only use this switch if a

remote control panel is connected.
Switch the remote panel ontoff
switch to 'on'.
Inverter constantly switches Battery voltage too low Check battery voltage, discon-
ordoff nect the users or charge the batte-
ries.
Loose connections in wiring Check the wiring between

inverter and battery for loose
connections.
Diameter battery cables too small Measure the voltage drop in

the wiring, in case of > 0.5 Volt
replace the wiring by cables
with more diameter.
LEDs "on" and "overload" The connected load i s too much Reduce the load o n the inverter.
flashes in turns for the inverter
The battery is empty The inverter will try to supply con-

nected loads, but due to low batte-
ry the inverter stops for 1,5 minute.
This wait-state gives the battery ti-
me to recover.
Ifyou cannot correct a problem with the aid of the malfunction table, contact your Mastervolt Service Center or
Mastervolt Amsterdam for an extended service list, tel: INT+ 31-20-3422100.
28 March 2000 1 MASS Sino 211500 & 48/5001 E N

5 MAINTENANCE
For a reliable and optimum function of the inverter,

.: the following is required:
Check at least once a year if all cable and wire

connections are stil firmly connected.
. -
Keep the inverter dry, clean and dust-free, in
order to ensure good heat discharge.
-,.
Check the fan operation (has a life time of at
.. least 10 years in normal use).
EN I MASS Sino 24/500 & 481500 1March 2000 29

TECHNICAL DATA 230v INVERTERS
TAILOR M A D E E N C R G Y
0 TECHNICAL DATA 230V INVERTERS
GENERAL
Function apparatus supplying of AC equipment
Models MASS Sine 241500 and 481500
Manufacturer Mastervolt, Amsterdam
INPUT 241500 481500

Battery voltage nominal 24 Volt 48 Volt
Switch off voltage low 19 Volt 36 Volt
Switch on voltage low 22 Volt 44 Volt
Switch off voltaae hiqh 32 Volt 62 Volt
Switch on voltage high 30 Volt 59 Volt
' %xirnal ripple 5% RMS 5% RMS
burrent (nominal load) 120A 60A
No load (full output 200 mA / 5W I 0 0 rnAI5W
No load (low power) 180 rnA / 4.5W 90 mA 14.5W
No load (stand by) 20 mA/ 0.5W 10 mAI0.5W
Fuse 63A 35A
DC cables 16 mm2 10 mm2
OUTPUT
Output voltage 230 Volt, k 5% 230 Volt, rt 5%
Output waveform true sine wave, < 5% thd true sine wave, c 5% thd
Frequency *
50 Hz, O,1% *
50 Hz, O,l%
Nomimal power Tarnb=40°C 450 Watt 450 Watt
Half hour powerTamb=25"C 500 Watt 500 Watt
Peak power 1000 Watt 1000 Watt
phi all power factors allowed
crficiency nominal 89% / 92%
CLIMATE
Nominal temperature -20 till 40°C
Cooling partial conventional Iforced with temperature regulated fan
Humidity c 95% relative humidity, non condensinn
ENCLOSURE
Dimensions fhxwxd) 335 x 220 x 114 rnm (see fia. 2)
Weiaht 3 ka
- -
Protection degree IP 23
STANDARDS
'nmission EN 50081-1:I992
~- -
-
11 nmunity EN 50082-1:I992
Safety IEC 950
30 March 2000 1 M A S S Sino 241500 & 4W5001 E N

7.1 INTRODUCTION
The MASS SlNE inverter is a fully automatic high ef-

ficiency inverter, developped and produced by Mas-
tewolt Amsterdam. The MASS SlNE inverter is part
of a series advanced quality battery chargers and in-
verters supplied by Mastervolt all over the world.The
MASS SlNE inverter converts DC voltage to 230V
AC', 50 Hz. The output voltage has a sinuso'idal
waveform for reliable and trouble free operation of
connected equipment. The inverter is protected
against overload, short circuit and over temperature.
In case of overload, the inverter will reduce its output
power. The MASS SINE inverter has a very high effi-
ciency, due to the application of rnosfets with high
frequency switching technology.
' o r 117V/60Hz
Fig. 1 - Coniigvrollon of Iho MASS SlNEInvorlor.
32 March 2000 I MASS Sino 241500 8 4015001 EN

TECHNOLOGY
70:
8 INSTALLATION
During installation and commissioning Starting points for wiring with good EMC properties:
of the MASS inverter, the Safety Guide- Lay the cables in metal cable trunking. The metal of
. - ,lines and Measures are'applicable at all. the trunking 0ffers.a low resistance to interference
times. See chapter 2of this manual. currents, so that these currents-run in the trunking.
The DC cables are to be in contact with one another,
as far as possib1e:The cables of different groups
8.1 ENVIRONMENT should not be twisted, but run in parallel. If trunking Is
not possible, lay the cables parallel to a metal bar. If
Install the MASS inverter in a dry, well ventilated, this is not possible, make a cable bunch in which the
dust free situation. Locate the inverter as close as cables run in parallel.
possible to the DC distribution in order to keep the
battery cables short. Do not locate the inverter in the
same compartment as the batteries.The heat of the 8.3 UNPACKING
inver-ter is discharged by a fan with avariable speed,
from the bottom of the cabinet to the side. In the box in which the inverter ismdelivered
contains,
in addition to the inverter:
When fitting the inverter be sure that:
the air flow is not obstructed; a guarantee card;
the inverter is mounted vertically; this user's manual.
no water andlor dust can enterthe cabinet.
After unpacking, check the inverter for possible da-
mage.
A Never use the inverter in locations whe-

re there is gas or explosion danger! CAREFUL I
Never remove the type
number platel
8.2 WIRING
Important technical data required for service, main-
The way of wiring has influence on the EMC behavi- tenance and later delivery of parts can be obtained
our of the system in which the inverter is a cornpo- from the type number plate (see fig. 1).
nent:This is caused by the fact that wires and cables
are excellent reception and transmitter antennes of
radio frequency electro magnetic interference. Most
problems originate from mutual influencing of wires
Type: Mass Sine 241500
and cables.
Part no: 024020500
Input: 24V Dc (19 ... 32V)
Output: 230V 50Hz sine wave
Output power: 500VA
c6
Fig. 1: Type nurnberplato MASS Sine.
EN I MASS Sino 241500 8 4815001 March 2000 33

INSTALLATION /hAASTER'UohT
,' T A I L O R M A D M L N M l G Y
8.4 MOUNTING OF THE CABINET
For mounting the MASS inverter follow the described

instructions (see fig. 2):
3 Mount the MASS inverter with four screws or
1 Determine the mounting points. bolts (M6) to the wall.
2 Drill mounting holes for the cabinet. 4 Fasten all screws or bolts securely.
Flg. 2: Dimensions of the Mess Slne 24/500 & 48/500.
? ..
34 March 2000 I MASS Sine 241500 & 4U5001 E N
ASTERVOLT
M A D E E N I I I G Y
INSTALLATION
8.5 CONNECTING
Before beginning to connect the wiring, For connecting the MASS Sine 241500 & 481500:
make the AC and DC distribution volta- Switch the on/off switch to OFF. On the left hand side
ge-free. is the connector for the AC wiring. Insert a RCCB
(earth leakage) switch in the inverter output.
8.5.1 Removal of the front panel Connect the AC on-board system brown wire to the
Steps: terminal L1, the bleu wire to the terminal N and the
greenlyellow earth wire to the terminal PE. Use 1.5-
Remove the two Philips screws from the front pa- 2.5 mm2wires.
nel of the cabinet.
8.5.3 DC wiring
Pull the panel above the grommets away from the Keep the cable length as short as possible, this will
cabinet. keep the system efficiency as high as possible. The
. recommended minimum size of the battery cables is:
The connectors for the battery, the AC and the
remote panel are now visible. 24V 48V
cable thickness 16 mm' 10 mm2
8.5.2 Connecting the AC wiring and earth The recommended length is a maximum of 6 meters.
wiring When.longer.cab1es are required, use thicker cables.
General: When possible, use coloured (red and black) battery
The inverter is protected against overload and short cables. If this is not possible, mark the cables with
circuit, so it is not necessary to install a fuse in the red and black isolation tape or heat shrink sleve.
output of the inverter.
8.5.4 Battery cable connections
The Mastervolt Service Centers have all accessories
A IMPORTANTI
For safe installation it is necessary to:
connect the earth (PE) and neutral (N) of the
available, like battery terminals and supply cables in
all sizes. Pull the battery cables through the glands
at the bottom side of the inverter. Keep the cable
inverter output to the central ground; connection between batteries and inverter as short
insert a RCCB (earth leakage) switch of 30mA in as possible (maximum 6 meters). Connect the black
the inverter output. negative battery cable to the negative connection
bolt (right) and the red positive battery cable to the
Check whether the voltage from the in- positive bolt (left) of the inverter. Cut the cables to the
A verter is the same as the connected

equipment.
right length and fix, if necessary, connect cable
clamps to both ends. Connect the negative cable to
the negative battery pole and the positive cable via
The earth wire offers protection only if the inverter fuse to the positive red pole. See the
A the inverter cabinet is connected to the

earth. Connect the inverter's earth ter-
minal (at the right hand side of the AC
connection diagram in fig. 3, page 38.
terminal block) to the hull or chassis.
E N / MASS Sine 241500 & 481500 /March 2000

INSTALLATION
CAREFUL I 8.6 CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL

Reversing positive and negative will PANEL (see fig. 3)
cause major damage to the inverter.
This damage is not covered by the gua- The remote control panel C4-RI for the MASS inver-
rantee. ter comprises an off/on switch and two LEDs. The
LED 'inverter on' indicates proper functioning of the
CAREFUL 1 inverter and the availability of 2301117V AC output
Too-thin cables andlor loose connec- voltage. The LED 'failure' indicates overload, over-
tions can cause dangerous overheating temperature or low voltage,
of the cables and/or terminals. Therefore tighten all Connect the remote control panel by means of a
connections well, in order to limit as far as possible telephone cable (not supplied with the panel).
transistion resistance. Use DC cables of the correct
size.
C4-Rl,
remote control panel.
Fig. 3i Connection of
the Mess Sine
24/500 & 48/500.
, .
::..,.1: ..........,.:
. ..-,-* ..........,,
...,
~ g4:. Connection cable for panel C4-Rl

(not delivered as e slandard).
36 tAarch 2000 1 MASS Sinc 241500 & 4W5001 E N

INSTALLATION
8.7 COMMISSIONING AFTER INSTALLATION
Remove the inverter fuse, if placed al- To change the jumper settings, act as follows:
ready.
Pull the inverter away from the wall.
1 Carefully check the polarity of the connections. Loosen the four corner screws from the top
cover.
Careful I Remove the top cover from beneath the green
Only insert the inverter fuse if the pola- plastic.
rity is correct. Switching on with incor- The jumpers S1 and S2 are visible now.
rect polarity will damage the inverter , Set the jumpers to the desirable state (see
inreparably. The inverter fuse cannot table 1).
prevent this. Place the top cover again and tighten the four
corner screws.
2 if the connections are correct:
check whether the onloff switch is in the "OFF" 8.9.1 Low power mode
position; Do not place jumper S1. Place jumper S2. The
when inserting.the inverter fuse, a spark will inverter has now been set to 'low power mode'. The
occure, caused by the capacitor used in the In- output voltage will be 208V if the connected load
verter. This is normal. stays below the 30W. The output voltage will be to
230V if the load connected to the inverter rises
The inverter is now ready for use. above the 30W.
8.9.2 Economic mode

8.8 AUTOMATIC SWITCHING BETWEEN MASS Piace jumper S1. Do not place jumper S2. The
INVERTER, THE AC GENSETANDlOR inverter has now been set to 'economic mode'. The
SHORE POWER output voltage will be 208V if the connected load
stays below the 250W. The output voltage will be to
Piease contact your Mastetvolt supplier if you intend 230V if the load connected to the inverter rises
to use the inverter with a genset or shore power above the 250W.
connection. Handswitched or simple relay switching
systems could damage your inverter, because of the 8.9.3 Stand by mode
lack off time delay. This kind of damage is not Place jumper S1 and S2. The inverter has now been
covered by the warranty. set to 'stand by mode'. The inverter will have no
output voltage, but checks for connectec load once
every two seconds. The inverter will switch on when
8.9 LOW ENERGY MODE a load is detected.
For applications that request a very low energy rno-

de, it is possible to set the inverter into "low energy
mode". The "low energy mode" can be selected by
placing a jumper (green) on the two metal pins on the
top (left) corner of the pcb (see fig. 4).
E N I MASS Sine 241500 B 48/500 / March 2000 37

INSTALLATION / LlST OF KEY WORDS
I T A I L O R MAD. M N I I G Y
Table 1,
jumper settings:
S1 . 52 stand output voltage

0 . O standard 230V
0 1 low power 208V < 30W
1 0 economic 208V < 250W
1 1 stand-by OV,switches on in case of load
@ @
\ n -
Fig. 5: Top vlew of the Inverter andposltion of thejumpers. 2
9 LlST OF KEY WORDS
EC declaration of conformity 39 Protections 32

Fuses 30,38 Remote control panel 27,37
Guarantee specifications 24 Safety guidelines & measures 25
Guarantee period 24 Safety instructions 25
Indicator lights 27 Switching off 27
Installation 34 Switching on 27
Inverter fuse 25.38 Technical data 30
Inverter on 27 Technolow 32
Maintenance & r e ~ a i r 25.29 Trouble shootina 28
Liabilitv 24 Use for intended ouroose 25
Overload and on flashes in turns 27,28 Warnina for soecial danaers 25
38 March 2000 I MASS Sine 241500 & 4815001 E N

ASTERVOLT
. u m m c y
T A I L O R U A D I I
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
10 EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Manufacturer MASTERVOLT
Address: Snijdersbergweg93
1105 AN Amsterdam
The Netherlands
Herewith declares that:
Product: MASS sine wave inverters
Models: MASS 241500-230V MASS 24I5OO-li7V

MASS 481500-230V '-MASS461500-117V
Conform with the provision of the EC EMC directive 891336EEC and , .
amendments 92/31lEEC, 93168lEEC.
The following harmonized standards have been applied:

Generic emission standard EN 50081-1 :I 992
Generic immunity standard EN 50082-1:I992
Amsterdam,
Dr. F.J. ter Heide,

Managing director MASTERVOLT
EN1 MASS Sine 241500 8 4W500 1 March 2000 39

/ T A I L O R M A D E E N E R G Y
MASTERVOLT
Snijdersbergweg 93, 1105AN Amsterdam, The Netherlands
Tel.: INT+ 31-20-3422100
Fax: lNT+ 31-20-6971006
MGE UPS SYSTEMS .
Pulsar Extreme C UPS

700/1 000/1500 VA
Maximum security for

your servers, PBXs and
network equipment ...
in minimum space.
Like a climber who snaps on a

"biner" for a safe ascension, you
can count on Pulsar Extreme C
to protect you no matter what.
Pulsar Extreme C offers the best

in power protection plus the "C"
for compact design.
D High performance
and reliability
D High availability
D Advanced communications
D Ease o f u s e
D Flexibility and scalability
www.mgeups.com
N P W
4'
o u , , . .
A complete r a n g e
Pulsar EXrreme C UPS8 have been

designed to meet the needs of modern
equipment, including network, intranet
a n d internet servers, internetworking
devices, computer a n d relecom (PBX)
centres, medical equipment a n d sensitive
industrial processes.
Pulsar EXtreme C i s available i n both

tower a n d rack versions with power
ratings from 7 0 0 to 1500 VA.
Which model to c h o o s e ?
Protected applications Best choices Backup time
100-line PABX (300 VA) Pulsar EXtreme 700C + 3 Pulsar EXB 700C 2 hours
1 UNlX sewer (650 VA) Pulsar EXtreme 700C 7 minutes
Pulsar EXtreme 1000C + Pulsar EXB 1000C 50 minutes
6 Internet servers/l U rack ( 1 500 VA) Pulsar Extreme 1500C . 6 minutes
Pulsar EXtreme 1500C + Pulsar EXB 1500C . 25 minutes
Pulsar EXtreme 1500C + 2 Pulsar WB 1500C 40 minutes
High performance LAN Switch ( 1 500 VA) : Pulsar M r e m e 1500C + 3 Pulsar EXB 1500C 80 minutes
High performance a n d reliability High availability

Pulsar Extreme C provides povier protection and extends batrerv life to increase Pulsar Extreme C UPS8 guarantee a high level of
system reliabiliry. availability, equal to 99.999% or higher.
) On-line d o u b l e conversion )High-performance battery ) Cold start o n battery power

technology charger This funcrion ensures trouble.free start-up
Pulsar Extreme C UPSs use double The Pulsar EXtreme battery charger: o f your applications even during a utility
conversion (on-line) technology, the only reduces battery recharge time (80%
power outage. -
way to overcome all power problems. backup time recovered in two hours);
The battery is used only as a backup source b Automatic b y p a s s
increases the service life o f the battery
In the event of an overload or UPS fault,
b y taking into account manufacturer
Pulsar EXtreme C automatically transfers
parameters and battery aging;
- protects the battery against damage
caused by deep discharge;
the load to utility AC power.
avoids disturbances on the distribution ) High-availability pack

system by correcting the power factor; A Pulsar STS source transfer switch
Whmevw !he
woveform rr
~ I ~ I I ~ O I I CoPn Sr h i d m r i b v : , c n ryr:im. the
rrgcnarored n o rh? AC io CC l k n LX ro AC
Conversion ,,,OCIII.
. avoids propagating faults on the
distribution system (backfeed
combined with two Pulsar Extreme C UPSs
provides effective power redundancy.
) Wide input-voltage range protection).

~ulsa; Extreme C UPSs have a very v i d e
input:voltage range from I 2 0 to 276 \: b Certified compliance with
opriniizcd ro irriprove corrlpatib~l~ty iw~h CE and U L standards
engine generator sets and reduce [he
number of transfers to battery power.
The batreries are used only for the most
serious iriciderils, niaxiriiiri~igavailable
backup time and extcnd~ngbattery life.
Advanced communications Ease of use
Pulsar Extreme C UPS8 offer communications solurions and accessories for remote UPS control Pulsar Extreme Cis only two units high (2U)
and monitoring. and fits perfectly i n your network or telecom
bays.
) 2 communications ports ) Communications slot
Lets you add an SNMP, dry contact, etc. ) Easy installation and integration
communication card. Tower or 19"-rack models
The cards make UPS
RS23Z
/
~ o m m ~ n i ~ o r i oano; n
' use
communitafionr p o n
communication
totally independent.
For example, they
An RS232 and a USB port are available
keep you informed
for easy connection o f the UPS t o the of UPS status when
server. It may be used for: the server is shut
personalization of Pulsar Extreme C down.
by modifying the factory-set parameters
(output voltage, intervals between battery UPScontrol remote display
tests, operation on bypass, etc.) via
UPSDriver software.
Using UPScontrol, the
various UPS
- Complete installation kit
Pulsar Extreme C is supplied with telescopic
parameters are remotely rails and all the necessary hardware
local or r e m o t e a d m i n i s t r a t i o n
displayed.
(SNMP/WEB) of the UPS and the protected
servers, using Solution-Pac software.
) MultiSlot expansion module
) Solution-Pac software This module provides three additional
Solution-Pac may be used to: communications slots and concentrates
alert users; the data from an installation comprising
automatically shut down different redundant UPSs
sewers in a heterogeneous environment;
remotely supervise and control UPSs.
Quick start-up guide

Flexibility and scalability Easy connection to AC power.
Pulsar EXtreme C can adapt easily to all your needs, today and tomorrow.
) Backup times from 6 minutes t o ) Hot-swappable batteries ) Comprehensive display

several hours Users can replace the batteries themselves and controls
Pulsar EXtreme offers a standard backup without having to shut down the protected
time of 6 minutes. equipment.
To ensure greater continuity of service.
it is possible to:
- connect up to three Pulsar EXB battery

extension modules to the UPS, without
interrupting the supply of power to the
protected applications;
)Individual management of
outlets with PowershareTY
The programmable outlets ) Warranty and services
make it possible to save Pulsar Extreme C is covered
Pulmr EXtrrme 1500 C + 3 Pulror U S battery power for the most by a two-year full
mcdulrr for 80 minuter of bockvp lime critical applications. They warranty.
or full rorrd b a d .
- use the CLA module (long backuptime

charger) for very long backup times of up
may also be used to
remotely restart or reset a
faulty device without
The optional hlCE
Warranty+ extension
ensures user peace
A
to eight hours at full rated load. interrupting the other of mind for three
Feel free to contact us for details. protected devices. years on site.
Characteristics
Pulsar Extreme
General
Power IPn)
1npur.voltage range l20/14b/160 to 276 volts without using barcery power 11)
Frequency range 50160 Hz (auterelecrianl
Power f a m r VHDI) >0.9S (< 5%
Sinusoidal output voltage 200/208/220/230/240 Yolts
Harmonic dirtonion <4!6 on h e a r load, 4 % on non.linear load
Eficiency 87% 88%
Crest faaor 3.1 3:l
Shon circuit current
Cverload capacity [Ordine mode)
Batteries -.,
.lackup lime
Standard
Pulsar erm
t€ie +
C I Pulsar EX8
Pulrai W m m c C t 2 Pulrar EX8
+
-Pulsar EXtreme C 3Pulsar EX8 130 . 70 132 78
Au~arnaticbarreiy [err Yes, at regular mrcrvnlr nilhour risk of interrupting piolcrted applications
Communication
us8 p a n yes
RF232 p o n yes
Optional cards SNMP card
s a l u r information card
Environment
Acouruc n m e
Operaung temperature
Standards and certifications
Performance EN 50091.3/IEC 62040-3
-Safety EN 50091.1. EN 60950(RD/). IEC 60950
EMC EN 50091-211Ec 62040.2. EN 55022/8. FCC 4 7 p a n 1 5 . Subpan B . Class 4
IEC 61000.4.2/-3/.4/.5/-61-81-1 I. IEC 61000.3.2/-3
Marking and cenifications CE.TUV/GS, UL, rUL. C.lick
- Design and manufacture
Dimensions IHxWxDIn mm) and Weight (Kg)
UPS lelectronio + bancry) Tower
Rack
Elecvonicr module Tawer/Rack
Battery module PulrarEXB Tower/Rack '
CLA module Iwilhoutbaneriesl Tawer/Rack -

Warranty . 2 years, extendable b y contract
( I ) value3 for opera8an a1 33%. 66% and 1004 rated output
Catalog nurnbefs EXIrernq 700 C Extreme !000 C EXIreme,1500 C

Format Tower Rack Tower Rack Tower Rack
UPS 66345 - 66351 66346 66352 66347 66353
Warranty + for UP5 66813 . 66813 66818 . 66818 66818 . 66818
Pulsar EXB 66348 - 66354 66349 . 66355
\Vananry + for Pulrar EX8 . 66813 . 66813 66813 . 66813
Pulsar LXtrerne I 5 0 0 transformer
P u l w Extreme 1500 CLA
6 2 3 2 and USE communications port5 -
slot far a cammunicarion

card
-
-
alarm and battery level indicators
prerr and hold to display pertem load

lamp t e n or buzzer o n
forced transfcr to and from bypars
status of programmable outlets I and 2
operation on bypass, in ON-LINE mode
or on battery
autornaric recognition o f
battery exrenrion modules
2 programmable outlets
r o n n c c l a r r for Pulrar EX8 battery --- - .-

i
-
e x t e n r i o n modules
AC i n w t r o n n c c l o r --
MGE U P S SYSTEhlS
140, a v e n u e Jean K u n r z r n a n n
ZIRST . M o n r b o n n o t S a i n t M a r t i n
:::a
I ,.- I.
._.,, ==-=
w.
,d.,-m
, === =
,,,i, - Qb
(1.8 ,,.; , , ,
Novell.
3 8 3 3 4 Sr l s m i e r Cedex . F r a n c e
Tel : ( 3 3 ) ( 0 ) 3 76 1 8 3 0 0 0
MGE
UPS SYSTEMS
DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Nous, MGE UPS Systems - DBpartement R&D I R&D Departement

we, ZIRST Montbonnot-St-Martin
140, Avenue Jean Kunhmann
38334 ST-ISMIER C E D E X FRANCE
declarons que les produits

declare that products :
(Marque et Gamme d e produits : MGE UPS Systems

(Trade mark and products range ) Pulsar Extreme Rack model
(Type de produits) AS.1 Extreme 700C

(Products type) U.P.S Extreme IOOOC
EXtreme 1500C
sous reserve d'installation, d'entretien et d'utilisation conformes a leur destination,

a la reglementation, aux norrnes en vigueur, aux instructions d u constructeur
et aux rhgles d e I'art,
subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to their intented purpose, to standard
practice to the applicable installations regulations and manufacturer's instructions,
sont conformes aux normes suivantes :

are in accordance with the following standards :
Limites pour les emissions de courant harmonique CEI 61000-3-2 (2000)
Limits for harmonic current emissions :
Limitation des fluctuations de tension et du flicker : CEI 61000-3-3 (1994)
Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker :
Montbonnot , january 31d , 2001 Signature autoriseelAuthorized signature

NomlName : G BESSET
TitrelTitle : Directeur Technique
/ R&D Manager
MGE UPS SYSTEMS

Description and operating instructions RS2-TX
Rail Switch 2 Bestell-Nr.
943 686-001
The Rail Switch RS2 has been especially

designed for use i n industrial environments.
It supports ETHERNET 10 MBiUs and Fast
ETHERNET 100 MBiUs.
The Rail Switch modules support switched
ETHERNET networks i n accordance w i t h
IEEE standard 802.3 or 8 0 2 . 3 ~using copper
technology. The switch modules are plug-
ged onto the standard bar.
The RSZ-TX modules have eight 101100
MBiUs twisted pair ports (W45connectors).
It is possible t o connect u p to eight data ter-
minal equipments o r other network seg-
ments t o the 101100 Mbitls ports using t w i -
. . sted pair cabling..The ports support auto
negotiation and autopolarity.
We have checked that the contents of the Safety guidelines
technical publication agree w i t h the hard-
ware and software described. However. i t is
3t possible t o rule out deviations comple- %nRis"?iX units are designed for
ly, so we are unable t o guarantee comple- ooeration with safetv extra-low vol-
tage. Accordingly. only safety extra-
te agreement. However, the details i n the
technical publication are checked regularly. low voltages (SELV) t o
Any corrections which prove necessary are IEC9501EN60950NDE0805mav b e
connected t o the supply voltage
contained i n subsequent editions. We are
connections.
grateful for suggestions for improvement.
We reserve the right t o make technical

modifications. ESD protection
The modules contain components highly
Permission is not given for the circulation sensitive to electrostatic fields. These com-
or reproduction 01 this document, its use or ponents can be easily destroyed or have
the passing o n of ~ t contents
s unless gran- their lives shortened b y an electrical field or
ted expressly. Contravention renders the b y a discharge caused by touching the card.
perpetrator liable for compensation for For these reasons, the modules are deliver-
damages. All rights reserved, i n particular ed i n a conducting ESD protective bag. This
In the case of patent grant o r registration o f packing can be reused.
a utility or design.
Be sure t o observe the following precauti-
Copyright 0 ons for electrostatic sensitive devices when
D Richard Hirschmann GmbH & Co. 1999 handling the components:
All Rights Reserved 0 Establish electrical potential equality
bet-
ween yourself and your surroundings, e.g.
w i t h the aid of a wrist bracelet.
General
Only then remove the modules from the
x t r i c i t y is used to operate this equip- conducting bag.
,,lent. Comply i n every detail w i t h the safety Store the modules i n its conducting bag
requirements specified i n the operating whenever i t is not i n the chassis.
instructions regarding the voltages to
apply! ESD protective field kits are available for
working with electrostatic sensitive devices.
;:%I?: notes are ignored, it is

therefore possible for severe injuries
You can find more information about devi-
ces vulnerable t o electrostatic fields i n
DINIIEC 47 (Sec) 1330; February 1994 Editi-
andlor material damage t o occur. o n and DIN EN 100 015.
Only appropriately qualified staff
should w o r k o n or near this e q u i p
rnent. Such stalf must be thoroughly
acquainted with all the warnings
and maintenance measures contai-
ned i n these operating instructions.
The proper and safe operation o f
this equipment assumes proper
transport, appropriate storage and
assembly and careful operation and
maintenance.
Staff qualification
~equirements
dualifled staff within the meaning o f these
operating instructions or the warning notes
are persons familiar with setting up, assem-
bling, starting up and operating this product
and w h o have appropriate qualifications t o
cover their activities, such as:
- training or instructionlentitlement t o
switch circuits and equipmentlsystems o n
and off. earth them and identify them in
accordance with current safety standards;
- training or instruction in accordance w i t h
current safety standards i n looking after
and using appropriate safety equipment;
- first aid training
1. Functional description
The 101100BASE-T(X)ports o f an RSZ-TX
represent a terminal connection for the
connected LAN segment. You can connect
LED Ameige-
single devices or complete network seg- elfmenre
ments.
1.1 F R A M E SWITCHING FUNCTIONS

Store and Forward
All data received by the RSZ-TX from the
system bus or at the ports are stored and B Pans nach 10(100BASE-T(XJ
checked for validity. Invalid and defective (Pons 1 bls 8). RJ4S-Ansch10sse
frames (> 1.522 byte or CRC error) as well Amanegoriatan + Auropolarity
as fragments ( c 64 byte) are discarded. The
RSZ-TX forwards the valid frames.
Multi address c a p a b i l i t y
An RSZ-TX learns all source addresses per
port. Only packets with
-unknown addresses
-addresses learnt at this port
- a multilbroadcast address . Overview interfaces, display elements and controls o f the RSZ-TX
F ~ i g1:
i n the destination address field are sent t o
this port.
A n RS2-TX learns u p to 1.000 addresses. 1.3 FURTHER FUNCTIONS o f p o n s 1 t o 8 is suppressed. State o n deli-
This becomes necessary if more than one A N D FEATURES very: switch position 1 (on), i.e. message
terminal device is connected t o one or more Reset not suppressed.
ports. In this way several independent sub- The RSZ-TX w i l l be reset b y the following
networks can be connected t o an RSZ-TX. action:
L e a r n t addresses - i n p u t voltages fall below a threshold
A n RS2-TX monitors the age o f the learned After a reset the following action is carried
addresses. The RS2-TX deletes address through:
entries from the address table which exceed - initialization
a certain age (30 seconds).
Note: Restarting deletes the learned
address entries.
1.4 DISPLAY ELEMENTS Fig. 2: 8-pin DIP switch o n RS2-TX
T a g g i n g (IEEE 802.14)
Equipment status
The IEEE 802.1 4 standard designatesthe
~hese LEDs provlde information about sta-
VLAN tag t o be included i n a MAC data
tuses which affect the function o f the entire
frame for the VLAN and prioritizing fUnC-
RSZ-TX.
tions. The VLAN tag consists o f 2 bytes. It is
inserted between the source address field
-
P I P o w e r 1 (green LED) 1.6 INTERFACES
101100 MBitls c o n n e c t i o n
and the type field. Data packets with VLAN
- lit: -supply voltage 1 present
- n o t lit: -supply voltage 1 less than 9.6 V Eight 101100 M b i t Ports (ports 1 t o port 8. 8-
tag are transmitted unchanged b y the RS2- p i n R45 sockets) o n RS2-TX allow terminal
TX. -
P 2 P o w e r 2 (green LED) equipment or eiqht independent network
i t : -supply voltage 2 present segments compiying w i i h the standards
- n o t lit: -supply voltage 2 less than 9.6 V IEEE 002.3 100BASE-TX I IOBASE-T t o b e
connected. These ports support autonego-
1.2 SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS OF THE
TP/TX INTERFACE
FAULT - F a i l u r e (red LED) tiation and the autopolarity function.
-lit: - T h e indicator contact is
Link c o n t r o l The socket casings are electrically connec-
open, i.e. i t indicates an
The RS2-TX monitors the connected TPKX ted to the front panel of the RSZ-TX.The p i n
error.
line seqments for short-circuit or interrupt
using regular link test pulses i n accordance
- n o t lit: - The indicator contact is configuration complies w i t h MDI-X.
with IEEE standard 802.3 101100BASE-TKX.

closed. i.e. i t does not - P i n c o n f i g u r a t i o n of the W45 socket:
The RKTX does not transmit any data to a
indicate an error. - TD+: p i n 3. TD-: pin 6
T P n X segment from which i t does n o t Port Status - RD+: pin 1. RD-: p i n 2
receive a Imk test pulse. These LEDs display port-related informati- -remaining pins: n o t used.
on.
Note: A non-occupied interface is assessed
DAISTAT 1 t o 8 - Data, L i n k s t a t u s
as a line interrupt. The TPnX line to termi-
(greenlyellow LED)
nal equipment which is switched off is like-
wise assessed as a line interrupt as the de-
- n o t lit: - n o valid link
energised bus coupler cannot transmit link
- lit green: - valid link
-flashes yellow:- receiving data
test pulses.
A u t o p o l a r i t y exchange Fig. 3: Pin configuration o f a n T P n X
I f the receive line pair is incorrectly connec- interface
ted (RD+ and RD- switched) polarity is auto- 1.5 CONTROLS
matically reversed. S p i n DIP switch
Using the %pin DIP switch o n the RS2-TX
front panel
- t h e message about the link statuses can
be suppressed b y the indicator contact on
a port-by.port basis. Using switches L A 1
to L A 8 , the niessagc about the link status
5pin terminal b l o c k Attach the upper snap-on slide bar or
The supply voltage and the indicator the RSZ-TX t o the standard bar and press it
contact are connected via a Spin terminal d o w n until it locks i n position.
'>lock. 0 Fit the signal lines.
Notes:
%"R?iX equipment is designed - T h e front panel of the RS2-TX is grounded
for operation w i t h SELV. Only safety via a separate ground connection.
extra-low voltages t o
IEC9501EN60950NDE0805 may - D o not open the housing.
therefore be connected to the - The shielding ground o f the twisted pair
supply voltage connections and to Fig. 5: Pin configuration o f Spin terminal lines which can be connected is electrical-
- the indicator contact. block l y connected to the front panel.
- V o l t a g e supply: Redundant voltage sup-
plies are supported. Both inputs are Ground connection
decoupled. There~isn o load distribution. The RS2-TX is grounded via a separate
With redundant supply, the power pack screw connection.
supplies the RS2-TX only w ~ t hthe higher
output voltage. The supply voltage is elec-
trically isolated from the housing.
- I n d i c a t o r contact: 2. Configuration
The indicator contact is used t o supervise
2.1 CONNECTING DTE A N 0 OTHER
the functions o f the RS2-TX and thus faci-
NETWORK SEGMENTS
litates remote diagnosis wlthout manage-
It is possible to connect u p to eight data ter-
rnent software.
minal equipments (DTE) or other network
Contact interrupt indicates the following
b y means of a potential-free indicator segments to the 101100 MbiUs ports o f the
contact (relay contact, closed circuit): RSZ-TX using twisted pair cabling (ref. Fig.
- t h e failure of at least one o f the t w o 4).
supply voltages.
- a Dermanent fault i n the RSZ-TX (inter-
n i l 3.3 V DC voltage, supply voltage 1 or 3. Assembly, startup procedure
2 < 9.6 V. ...).
- t h e faulty link status o f at least one port. and dismantling
The indication o f the link state o n the
RSZ-TX can be masked o n a port-by-port 3.1 UNPACKING, CHECKING
basis using the DIP switches LA1 to LA8. 0 Check whether the package was deliver-
State of delivery there is n o link test. ed complete (see scope o f delivery).
Check the individual parts for transport
Note: I n the case of,the voltage supply damage. Fig. 6: Assembling the RS2-TX
being routed without redundancy. the RSZ-
TX indicates the failure o f a supply voltage.
You can prevent this message b y feeding i n
the supply voltage through both inputs. 3.3 STARTUP PROCEDURE
You start up the RSZ-TX by connecting
3.2 ASSEMBLY the supply voltage via the 5-pin terminal
The equipment is delivered in a ready-to- block.
operate condition. The following procedure
is appropriate for assembly:
3.4 DISMANTLING
0 Check whether the switch pre-setting
suits your requirements (see chap. 1.5). To take the RSZ-TX off the ISOIDIN rail,
0 Pull the terminal block of1 the RSZ-TX insert a screwdriver horizontally under the
and wire u p the supply voltage and indica- housing into the locking slide, pull i t (with-
tor lines. out tipping the screwdriver) downwards
Fit the RSZ-TX o n a 35 m m standard bar and lift the RSZ-TX upwards.
t o DIN EN 50 022.
4. Further support
In the event o f technical queries, please talk

to the Hirschmann contract partner respon-
sible for looking after your account or direc-
tly t o the Hirschrnann office. You can find
the addresses of our contract partners
- on the Internet
(http:I1www.h1rschmann.de).
Our support line is also at your disposal:
Tel. +49(7127) 14-1538 (Fax -1542)
Answers on frequently asked questions you
will find i n the Internet pages of Hirsch-
mann: www.hirschniann.de. In the Network
Systems Divlsion on the SERVICES pages
you will f ~ n dthe catagory FA4 with HiVisi-
on.
Flg. 4: Configuration with RSZ-TX: Connection or u p to 8 data terminal

equipments or further segments via TPTTX
5. Technical data
General d a t a
Operating voltage DC 9.6 V...57.6 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV) (redundant inputs decoupled)
Current consumption 125 m A typ., at 24 VDC. n o link
280 m A maximum. a t 24 VDC, 8 ports full load
Overload current protection at input nonzhangeable thermal fuse
Dimensions W x H x D 47 m m x 135 m m x 111 m r n 1.9 i n x 5.3 in x 4.4 i n
Weioht 230 o 5.07 Ih
Ambient tempereture 0 O C to + 60 OC 32 "F t o 140 O F
Storage temperature - 20 O C t o + 80 OC -4 O F t o 176 " F - -
Hurniditv UD t o 90% lnon condensina) -.
Protection class IP 20
Radio interference level EN 55022 Class A
Warning!
This is a Class A Equipment. This equipmenrrnay cause radio interlerence if used in a resi-
dential area: i n this case i t is the operator's responsibility to take apropriate measures.
Interference immunity EN 50082-2
N e t w o r k size
TPlTX p o r t IOBASE-TIIOOBASE-TX
Length of a twisted pair segment 100 m (328 ft) maximum
Interfaces
8 TPAX p o n s W 4 5 sockets. 101100 MBitls
Indicator contact 1 A maximum, 24 V
Displays
Equipment status 1 x green LED P I -power 1, supply voltage 1 present
1 x green LED P2 -power 2, supply voltage 2 present
1 x red LED FAULT - ~ n d ~ c a tcontact
or IS open and mdlcates error
Port status 8xgreerJyellowLED DATISTAT 1 t o 8 -data. Ilnk status
Controls
8-pole DIP s w t c h L A 1 t o L A 8 - suppress message about the hnk statuses
S c o p e of d e l i v e r y
Rail Switch RSZ-TX incl.
terminal block for supply voltage
description and operating instructions
Order number
Rail Switch RS2-TX
Accessories
ETHERNET manual 943 320-011
cE Notes on CE identification
The devices c o m p l y w i t h t h e regu.
lations o f the f o l l o w i n g European
Area used Requirements for
emitted interference interference i m m u n i t y
Industrial EN 50081-2: 1993 EN 50082-2: 1995
directive:
EN 55022 Class A: 1998
891336lEEC
Council Directive o n t h e h a r m o -
T h e EU declaration o f conformity is kept The p r o d u c t c a n b e used in t h e residenti-
nization o f t h e legal regulations o f
available for the responsible authorities i n al sphere (residential sphere, business
member states o n elecuomaqnetic
compatibility (amended b y ~ T r e c - accordance w i t h the above-mentioned EU and trade sphere a n d small companies)
directives at: a n d i n t h e industrial sphere.
tives 911263lEEC. 921311EEC a n d
Richard Hirschmann GmbH & Co.
The precondition for compliance wiU1
Automation and Networking Solutions EMC values is strict adherence to
Stuttganer StraBe 45-51
the construction guidelines specified in
D-72654 Neckartenzlingen
this description a n d operating
Telephone ++49-7127-14.1538
instructions.
FCC Note: used i n accordance w i t h the instruc- ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

This equipment has been tested a n d t i o n manual, m a y cause harmful After its use, this product has t o b e
interference to radlo cornrnunicati-
LJ
found t o c o m p l y w i t h t h e limits for a processed as electronic scrap t o a
Class A digital device, persuant t o ons. Operation of this equipment i n proper disposal according t o the pre-
p a n 15 o f the FCC Rules. These a residential area is likely t o cause vailing waste disposal regulations of
limits are designed t o p r o v i d e rea- harmful interference i n which case y o u r communityldistrictlcountryl
sonable protection against harrniul t h e user w i l l be required to correct state.
interference w h e n the e q u i p m e n t is t h e interference at his o w n expense.
operated i n a commercial e n v i r o n -
ment. This equipment generates.
uses, a n d can radiate radio frequen-
c y energy and. if n o t installed a n d
Rlchard Hirschmann G m b H & Co.

A u t o m a t i o n a n d Networking Solutions Division
Stuttgarter Str. 45-51
D-72654 Neckanenzlingen
- ~ l e p h o p ct t 4 9 - 7127 14 1538
Q*C(
Type A ~ ~ YC'"~lific&
o v ~ Germanischeu Uoyd
This is to certify that Vle u ~ d e r n c r ~produci!~)
d haslhaue k e n tested in axordance (4th
the ;?levant r q ~ i r e m & n ! sof the GI. T y p ApproVa!
~ System.
Hirschmann ElsS!onlcs GrnSH & Co. KG

Stuttgarter S!ra&e 55. 51
0-72855 Neckarlenilingen
Prcduci Dsscription Ethernet LAN c o m p o n e n k for DINJ?ail s n a p o n mounting

HUBS,Switches. Transceivers
TYpe Rail RXi
Rail RX2
Enviionm?n[al C a l ~ p y C,E M C 1
Technic& Data 1 Etherne! Rail Hubs:
Range 01 kpplicalicn R H l ~ t P ' f s r4x IOSASE-1. RJd5
RH2-TX for 4x IOOBASE-TX, RJ45
- RHi -TPIiL icr 3x 10BAGE-T, RJ45 and 2r 10BASE-FL, BFOC
Ethernet Rail Swliches:
- RS2.TWX for 7~ I O i I W 5 ~ s ~ - T XRJd5
, *)
.RSZ.FX'FX f o r ;3:IOOEASE-FX, multimodaand 5r 10/1008~se-TX.RJ45 *)
.RSZ-TX for 6x 11?l'tOOBASE-TX,RJ45
Ethernel Rh3 Transceivers:
- RT1-TPliL for 1:10BASE-T, RJ45 and i x 1 0 6 ' ~ ~ ~ - BPOC
.RTZ-TXIFX fcr IX
FL,
ICOSASE-TX, RJ45 and 1%IOOBASE-FX Multicode, SC
*) For tha use in bridge cr cpcn d s c k zones Filterp~ocluleilVP24 [K. Pietier)

is prcscrihcd (EMC-Enis30ns).
Tes! Stmd;rd Regulations f o r t h e perf om on^ of Type Tests 15197
-
f?qulsiions f c r Ihe Use c f Cornpulers and Ccrnputer 6ys1enis
D~cuments Repcris and proofs acco:ding to tab!? "Raill-Familie"
Reports and proofs x c o r d i r q tc k b l e "3ailZ-Familie"
Software Ques!ion~ireaccordivg !o rsqulremenl class 3, &:ed 2000.03-28
Submitcad sys!cm dccumentation (199907-09,2000-03-29 and 200146-28)
Applicafion spscific s y t m requiremners are to be oSsewed for the layout
Valid wiil
Pag? 1 01 I Typ? Appr~vdlSymbol @ @
-.
tile No. I 0.08
H ~ ~ b u r 2I101.09.18
g,
G e r m a n i s c h e r Lloyd J ~ i ? &
HIRSCHMANPI
D e s c r i p t i o n a n d operating instructions MICE

Order No.
ETHERNET Modular Industrial
Communication Equipment
The modular industrial communication

equipment, MICE, is a modular network
component.
. It was developed particularly for use in an
. industrial environment.
i., The.MICE described in this instructions con-
-- sists of a switch.and media modules that
.. .:, can be plugged into it..lt-allows you t o con-
. . struct switched ETHERNET networks that
- - : conform.ta:the.IEEE802..and 802'.3u stan- . . ..
. -- dardusing-copperwires or optical fibers i n
:. a busor. ringtopology.
.TP/i%IFL/FXterminal -devices-or other
: TPflXjFVFX segmentscan be connected to
the.l0/100 MbiUs ports of the media
modules.
The T P r X ports support autonegotiation
and autopolarity.
The switch, that can be managed using
SNMP and the Web interface,~supports both
ETHERNET 10 MBitIs and Fast ETHERNET
The switches are mounted by simply snap-

ping them onto a standard DIN rail.
The MlCEs have one V.24 interface for
external management.
In the,,MICE Management Manual -
ETHERNET Modulare Industrial
Equipment" you find a detailled description
of the MICE.
f@ik?, the Hirschmann network manage-
ment system, is the optimum management
solution for this product. Your sales partner
keeps information ready.
We have checked that the contents of the S a f e t y Guidelines Housing
technical publication agree with the hard- %
::?at light injury or damage t o
ware and software described. However, it is property can result if the appropria-
not possible to rule out deviations complete safety measures are not taken. %;"ti,"c9hXicians authorized b y
tely. so we are unable to guarantee comple- Hirschrnann are permitted to open
te agreement. However, the details i n the Note: is an important piece of information the housing.
technical publication are checked regularly. about the product, how to use the product.
Any corrections which prove necessary are or the relevant section of the documentati- Note: The lower coverina ane el of the
contained i n subsequent editions. We are on to which particular attention is to be MICE housing is grounded'by the tophat rail
grateful for suggestions for improvement. drawn. and, as an option, b y the separate ground
screw.
We reserve the right to make technical 0 Make sure that the electrical installation
modifications. Certified u s a g e meets local or nationally applicable safety
regulations.
Permission is not given for the circulation Please 0 b s e ~ e
the following:
or reproduction of this document, its use or Warning!
the passing on of its contents unless gran-
ted expressly. Contravention renders the
/I\ E d n % e may only be employed
for the purposes described in the
Theventilation slits must not be
covered so as t o ensure free air
perpetrator liable for compensation for catalog and technical description, circulation.
damages. All rights reserved, i n particular and only i n conjunction with external
in the case of patent grant or registration of The distance to the ventilation slots
devices and components recommen- of the housing has to be a minimum
a utility or design. ded or approved by Hirschrnann. o f 10 cm.
The product can only be operated
correctly and safely if it is transpor- Never insert pointed objects (thin
Copyright ted, stored, installed and assembled screwdrivers, wires, etc.) into the
0 Hirschrnann Electronics GmbH & Co. KG 2001 properly and correctly. Furthermore, inside of the subrack! This especial-
All Rights Reserved it must be operated and serviced ly applies t o the area behind the
carefully. socket connectors. Failure to obser-
ve this point may result i n injuries
caused b y electric shocks.
Note
Note: According t o EN 60950 the device
We would point out that the content of S a f e t y Guidelines may only be operated i n a fire protective
these operating instructions is not part of, Power Supply housing.
nor is it intended to amend an earlier or
existing agreement, permit or legal relation- 0 Switch the basic devices on only when Note: The housing has to be mounted i n
ship. All obligations on Hirschrnann arise the case is closed. upright position.
from the respective purchasing agreement
which also contains the full warranty condi- Warning!
tions which have sole applicability. These
contractual warranty conditions are neither
/I\ The devices may only be connected
t o the supply voltage shown on the
S a f e t y Guidelines Environment
extended nor restricted b y comments in type plate. Warning!
these operating instructions.
The devices are designed for /I\ The device m a y only be operated i n
the listed ambient temperature
We would furthermore point out that for operation with a safety extra-low
reasons of simplicity, these operating voltage.Thus, they may only be range at the listed relative air hurni-
instructions cannot describe every connected t o the supply voltage dity (non-condensing).
conceivable problem associated with the connections and to the signal The installation location is t o be selec-
use of this equipment. Should you require contact with the safety extra-low ted so as t o ensure compliance with the cli-
further information or should particular voltages (SELV) i n compliance with matic limits listed in the Technical Data.
problems occur which are not treated in IEC9501EN609501VDE0805.
sufficient detail i n the operating instruc-
tions, you can request the necessary infor- 0 For the case where the module is opera-
mation from your local Hirschmann sales ted with external power supply: Use only a Staff qualification
partner or directly from the Hirschrnann safety extra-low voltage in accordance with requirements
office (address: refer to chapter entitled IEC 950lEN 60 9501VDE 0805 to power the
,.Notes on CE identification"). system. Note: Qualified personnel, as understood
in this manual and i n the warning signs, are
First of all you connect the protecting persons who are familiar with the setup,
line, before you establish the further assembly, startup, and operation of this
Safety Instructions connections. When you remove product and are appropriately qualified for
This manual contains instructions which connections, you disconnect the protecting their job. This includes, for example, those
must be observed to ensure your own per- line last. persons w h o have been:
sonal safety and to avoid trained or directed or authorized to
damage to devices and machinery. The switch on and off, t o ground and to label
instructions are highlighted with a warning Safety Guidelines power circuits and devices or systems in
triangle and are shown as accordance with current safety enginee-
follows according to the degree of endan- Shielding Ground
ring standards
germent:
Note: The shielding ground of the connec- . trained or directed i n the care and use of
A :",%at death, serious injury or
considerable damage to property
table twisted pairs lines is connected to the
front panel as a conductor.
appropriate safety equipment i n accor-
dance with the current standards of safety
engineering
will result if the appropriate safety Beware of possible short circuits when
measures are not taken. connecting a cable section with conductive - trained i n providing first aid
shielding braiding.
A ~ ~ death, ~ serious
% injury or
considerable damage to property
~ ~ t
c a n result if the appropriate safety

measures are not taken.
!MICE is integrated into the ring via the Notes: \ 3
The lower covering panel of the housing is
3 ports (ports 1&2 or 1&5). Within a ":,":zin?;kndamaged parts!
undant ring any mixture of MICE, MACH grounded by the tophat rail and, as an
10. RS1 and RS2-...I... is oossible. If one option, by using the ground screw.
tion fails the recovery time is less than - D o not open the housing.
3.2 ASSEMBLY
seconds for a ring containing up t o 50
ZEIMACH 3000/RSl/RS2- ...I... being The equipment is delivered i n a ready-to- -The shielding ground of the twisted pair
operate condition. Media modules can be lines which can be connected is
xaded and the ring structure is changed
assembled and disassembled during run- electrically connected to the front panel.
:k into a line structure.
ning operation. The following procedure is
~te:The .HIPER-Ring" function requires appropriate for assembly:
:following settings for the ring ports:
IJ To fasten a media module, first remove
1 Mbitk, full duplex and autonegotiation
the protective cap over the plug.
(= state of delivery).
-
n Pluo - - the
- - media module onto the lug.
Ite: Activate the RM function of a MICE n Tiahten the 4 screws on the cornersif
a MACH 3000 the m i d i a module.
Check whether the switch pre-setting
suits your requirements (see chap. 1.8).
Pull the terminal block off the MlCE and
Assembly, startup procedure wire up the supply voltage and indicator
and dismantling lines.
0 Fit the MlCE o n a 35 m m standard bar to
1 UNPACKING, CHECKING DIN EN 50 022.
Check whether the package was deliver- IJ Attach the upper snap-on slide bar of
complete (see scope of delivery). the MlCE t o the standard bar and press it
Check the individual parts for transport down until it locks i n position.
mage. Fit the signal lines.
Fig. 8: Assembling the MlCE
3.3 STARTUP PROCEDURE

You start up the MlCE by connecting the
supply voltage via the 6-pin terminal block.
Lock the terminal block with the locking
screw at the side
line structure
bb. 6: Linienstruktur
rmg closed by MlCEw~lh

w w h RM on posirlon'ON' redundant ring
-...2t
4bb. 7: Redundante Ringstruktur

3.4 BASIC SE-TnNGS 4.2 SNMP MANAGEMENT
2 14- Note: The Web-based interface uses the
On the first installation of the MlCE you -Factory settings: All parameters which can plugin 'Java runtime environment version
have to enter the IP addressels). TheMICE be adjusted via management are pre-set to 1.2'. If this is not installed on your compu-
provides 3 possibilities t o configure the IP default values. You will find detailed ter, an installation via the internet is started
addresses (refer t o MlCE manual): descriptions i n the MlCE manual. automatically on the first start of the Web-
-Configuration via BOOTP (bootstrap pro. based interface. This installation takes a lot
tocol) of time. For Windows N T users: Because of
-Configuration via DHCP (dynamic host that stop the installation. Install the plugin
4 . 3 USER INTERFACE from the enclosed CDROM. For that start
configuration protocol)
The User lnterface (UI) can be used in
-Input via the V.24 interface. the program file j2rel-3-0-win-i.exe i n the
addition to the web interface.
Java table on the CDROM.
On the first installation of the MlCE you Access to the web interface is protected b y
have t o enter IP addresselsl. If you do not
3.5 DISMANTLING -a password. If you,do not enter a password,
have a WlOO terminal near the installation '.
0 In order t o remove the MlCE f r o m the place at your disposal, you can enter the IP ,:
only read access to the.MICE is possible.
tophat rail, press the MlCE downward and
addresses before the final installation. For
- Factory setting: password ,,privaten
pull it out from under the tophat rail.
that you need a VTlOO terminal or a
corresponding emulation 1e.g. MS windows
terminal). 5. Further support
4. Management The User lnterface starts after pressing any
key. . . In the event of technical queries, please talk
4 . 1 INTODUCTION - State of delivery: password ,.privateu to the Hirschmann contract partner respon-
The MlCE supports SNMP and Web-based
management and thus offers a extensive
- S y s t e m parameters sible for looking after your account or
directly to the Hirschmann office. You can
Among others various addresses can be
diagnosis and configuration functions for entered i n the window presented on the find the addresses of our contract partners
an easy startup procedure as well as exten- screen (IP address, netmask, gateway IP - o n the lnternet
sive network- and device information. The address) and the IP configuration mode can 1http~liwww.hirschmann.de).
MlCE supports the TCPIIP protocol family. be selected. Our support line is also at your disposal:
You will find detailed descriptions regarding Tel. +49(7127) 14-1538 (Fax -1542)
the SNMP management, functionality of the
User Interface, web interface, system moni- Answers to Frequently Asked Questions can
tors, software update and Management 4.4 WEB-BASED INTERFACE be found on the Hirschmann internet site
Information Base MIB i n the MlCE manual. In order t o open the Web-based interface
y o u need a Web browser (program which www.hirschmann.de
enables to read hypertext), for example the The FAQs are located under ,,Service" i n
Netscape Navigator/Communicator or the . the Automation and Network Solutions
Microsoft lnternet Explorer from section.
version 4.x on.
6. Technical data
General data
Operating voltage 24 VDC, -25% +33% safety extra-low voltage (SELV) (redundant inputs decoupled)
Buffer time min. 10 m s at 24 VDC
Potential difference between input Potential difference to input voltage, +24VDC: 32 VDC
voltage and housing Potential difference to input voltage, ground: -32 VDC
Current consumption w i t h media modules 0.9 A maximum, at 24 VDC
Overload current protection at input non-changeable fuse
Dimensions W x H x 0 120 m m x 134 m m x 99 m m 4.7 i n x 5.3 i n x 3.9 i n
Weight 1 kg 2.2 Ib
Ambient temperature 0 O C t o + 55 "C, 32 "F to 131 OF (with MM2 - 4FXM3: 0 OC to + 50 "C, 32 "F to 122 "F)
Storage temperature - 20 OC to + 80 OC -4 "F to 176 "F
Humidity 10% t o 95% (non condensing)
Atmospheric pressure 795 hPa minimum
Laser protection Class 1 conforming to EN 60825
Protection type IP 20
Radio disturbance characteristics EN 55022 Class A, CFR-47 Part 15 Class A
Immunity Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2 level 3
Electromagnetic fields EN 61000-4-3 level 3
Bursts EN 61000.4-4 level 3
Surge EN 61000-4-5
Conducted disturbance EN 61000-4-6 level 3
Mechanical service conditions Vibrations IEC 60068-2-6 Test Fc

Shocks IEC 60068-2-27 Test Ea
Network s i z e
TP port 100BASE-T/TX
Length of a twisted pair segment 100 m (328 ft) typ.
FIO port 10BASE-FL
system attenuation
501125 p m fiber (multimode) 11 dB
62.51125 p m fiber (multimode) 14 dB
Wave length 850 nm
F/O l i n e l e n g t h 10 BASE-FL (example)
501125 p m fiber (multimode) 2,6000 rn (8,530 ft) maximum (data of fiber: 3 dB/km, 400 MHzxkrn)
62.51125 urn fiber (multimode) 3.600 m (11.811 ft) maximum (data of fiber: 3.2 dB/km, 200 MHz*krn)
System attenuation
501125 prn fiber (multimode) 8 dB
62.51125 prn fiber (rnultimode) 11 dB
101125 prn fiber (singlemode) 16 dB
Wave length 1300 nm
FIO lip l e n g t h (example)
501125 p m fiber (multimode) 5 km (16,400 ft) maximum (data of fiber: 1 dB/km, 800 MHz+km)
62.51125 p m fiber (multimode) 4 km (13,120ft) maximum (data of fiber: 1 dB/krn, 500 MHzrkrn)
101125 p m fiber (singlemode) 30 km (98,420 ft) maximum (data of fiber: 0.4 dB1km)
Interfaces
MS2108 - 2 V.24 port external management
Signaling relay 1 A, 24 V maximum
Power supply
M M 2 - 2FLM4 2 FL-Ports (ST sockets, multimode, 10 MBiVs)
M M 2 - 4TX1 4 TP/TX-Ports (RJ45 sockets.101100 MBiVs)
MM2 - 4FXM3 2 FX-Ports (MTRJ sockets, multirnode, 100 MBiUs)
MM2 - 2FXM3 12TX1 2 FX-Ports (MTRJ sockets, multimode, 100 MBiUs) and
2 TX-Ports (RJ45 sockets, 101100 MBiVs)
MM2 - 2FXM2 2 FX-Ports (DSC sockets, multimode, 100 MBiUs)
MM2 - 2FXS2 2 FX-Ports (DSC sockets, singlemode, 100 MBiVs)
Displavs
. .
Device status 1 x green LED P - Power, internal supply voltage present
1 x green LED P 1 -Power 1, internal supply voltage 1 present
1 x areen LED P 2 - Power 2, internal supply voltage 2 present
1 x Fed LED FAULT - Failure, the indicator contact is open and indicates an error
1 x greentyellow LED R M -Redundancy Manager
Display status 1 x green LED LID - Datakink status
1 x green LED F D X - Full duplex
1 x green LED 100 - 101100 M b i t k
1 x green LED AUTONEG -Autonegotiation
1 x green LED RING PORT- HIPER-Ring port
1 x green LED LED TEST- LED test
2 x green LED for service use
Port status 4 x greenlyellow LED 1 t o 4 -The meaning depends on the setting of the display status.
Controls
3-pole DIP switch R M -activate redundancy manager functionality
R i n g P o r t - defining HIPER-Ring ports
S c o p e of delivery
MlCE MS2108 - 2 incl.
Terminal block for power supply and indicator contact
Labels, description and operating instructions
MlCE manual o n CD-ROM
Order number
MS2108 - 2
MM2 - 2FLM4
MM2 - 4TX1
MM2 -4FXM3
M M 2 - 2FXM312TX1
MM2 - 2FXM2
MM2 - 2FXS2
Accessories
Basics manual 039 624-001
Terminal access cable 943 301-001
Rail Power Supply RPS 60 943 662-001
Rail Power Supply RPS 120 943 662-011
Network Management Software HiVision 943 471-100
Hirschmann Electronics GmbH & Co. KG

Automation and Network Solutions
Stuttgarter StraRe 45-51
Germany
Tel.: ++49/71271 14-1538
Fax: ++4917127 / 14-1542
E-Mail: ans.support@nt.hirschmann.de
Internet: hnp://www.hirschmann.com
Printed in Germany
Subiect to ollcrationr
This is to certify that the undernoted product(s) haslhave been tested in accordance with
the relevant requirements of the GL Type Approval System.
Certificate No.
Company Hirschmann Electronics GmbH & Co. KG

Stuttgarter StraRe 45 51 -
Product Description Ethernet LAN components

Switches and Media Modules
MlCE
Environmental Category C, EMC I

Technical Data I Switches:
Range of Application -
MS2108-2: 8-port Ethernet IFast Ethernet Switch, 2 slots for Media Modules
Media Modules, twisted-pair ports:

- MM2-4TXi: 4 ports, IOOBASE-T(X), RJ45
Media Modules, FIO ports:
-
MM2-4FXM3: 4 ports, 100BASE-FX, rnultimode, MTRJ connections
-
MM2-2FXM2: 2 ports, 100BASE-FX, rnultimode, SC connections
-
MM2-2FXS2: 2 ports, IOOBASE-FX, singlemode, SC connections
Media Modules, twisted-pair and FIO ports:

-
MM2-2FXM312TXl:
2 ports 100BASE-FX, multimode, MTRJ connections
2 ports 101100BASE-T(X),RJ45
Software Version MlCE 2.0
Test Standard Regulations for the Performance of Type Tests 2001
Regulations for the Use of Computers and Computer Systems
Documents Tests according to table "iibersicht Baumusterpriifungen M I C E"
Manual "Beschreibung und Betriebsanleitung MICE", No. 9437..
Software Questionaire requirement class 3, dated 200-03-28
Remarks Application specific system requirements are to be observed for the network
layout.
Valid until
Page I of 1 Type Approval Symbol @ @

File No. 1.8.08
Hamburg, 2002-07-24
U
Germanischer Lloyd J. Wittburg M.Rinkel
This cenillcale is issued on llie basis ol 'Regulalions lor (he Perl0rn:ance of Typc Tesls, Part 0. Procedure'.
- ----.--.. .-^.-" -r..--..-."--..
L ..--..---. *-.-
. ...-
I------
UMAS V
ULSTEIN MULTIFUNCTIONAL
AUTOMATION SYSTEM VISION
USER'S MANUAL
ALARM & MONITORING SYSTEM
- Rolls-Royce
1
N-6293 LONGVA
NORWAY
Tel. +4770208200
Fax. adrn +47 70 20 83 51
Fax. sales +47 70 20 83 50
Hornepage: www.rolls-roycc.com
Enterprice no. 980 371 379
User's Manual 218 UMAS V Alarm System
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................. 4
PURPOSE 4
SCOPE........................................................................................................................................................................ 4
DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................... 4
REVISIONS .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
DISCLAIMER ............................................................................................................................................................... 4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................... 5
SYSTEM STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................................................... 6
HARDWARE ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
Electronics ............................................................................................................................................................ 6
Operator Stations ................................................................................................................................................. 6
Nehvork ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Main Nehuork ....................................................................................................................................................... 7
Sub Network ......................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 8
Feature 8
Display groups ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
SYSTEM STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................................................... 9
HARDWARE .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Main Cabinet I ................................................................................................................................................... 10
Main Cabinet 11.................................................................................................................................................. 10
SUB I/O Cabinets ............................................................................................................................................... 10
I/O modules (SIOX) ............................................................................................................................................ II
Alarm panels ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
Dead Man System ............................................................................................................................................... 12
Inter/ace ........................................................................................................................................................... 12
SYSTEMSTART-UP.................................................................................................................................................. 12
..
Inrtral Start-Up ................................................................................................................................................... 12
Restart (Re-Loading) .......................................................................................................................................... 12
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................... 13
OPERATOR STATION ................................................................................................................................................13
Keyboard .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Visual Display Unit 13
Group Pictures ................................................................................................................................................... 14
Customer Configurable Pictures ........................................................................................................................ 15
Alarm Sz~mrnaly. 15
Event Log ............................................................................................................................................................ 16
Trend .................................................................................................................................................................. 16
SYSTEMCONFIGUMTION ......................................................................................................................................... 17
Password ........................................................................................................................................................... 17
PARAMETER ADJUSTMENTS .....................................................................................................................................18
Digital Input ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
Analogue Input ................................................................................................................................................... 18
Dev . Point ........................................................................................................................................................... 19
Average Point .................................................................................................................................................. 19
SETUPGRAPHIC PICTURES ......................... . ...........................................................................................................
20
PRINTER FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 20
Alarm printer (I) ................................................................................................................................................20
Printer (2)........................................................................................................................................................... 20
PERIIWERAL ALARM PANELS ................................................................................................................................. 21
.
dep . Automation . Longva
User's Manual 2 1y UMAS VAlarm System
Panels ................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Menus ................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
Engine room panel ............................................................................................................................................. 25
ALARMS ................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Alarm Buzzers .................................................................................................................................................... 26
Buzzers in Peripheral Panel (PP) 26
Buzzer Reset (acknowledge) 26
TRANSFER OF WATCH RESPONSIBILITY ................... . . .......................................................................................... 26
Transferfrom ECR to Bridge ............................................................................................................................. 26
Transferfrom Bridge to ECR ............................................................................................................................. 27
AUTOMATIC ACTNATION OF ((CALL ALL ENGINEERS)) .............................................................................................. 27
DEADMANSYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................. 28
Dead man panel OMOFF .................................................................................................................................. 29
Dead man panel acknowledge............................................................................................................................ 29
PROCEDURE FOR CALIBRATION OF ANALOG INPUTS .................................................................................................. 30
Calibrations ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
PROCEDURE FOR INPUT OF NEW POINTS .................................................................................................................... 31
Digital input ....................................................................................................................................................... 31
PROCEDURE FOR DELETE POINT ....................... . .................................................................................................... 31
Delete point ........................................................................................................................................................ 31
PROCEDURE FOR ACCESS TO OTHER WINDOWS P R O G W M ........................................................................................ 31
PROCEDURE FOR INPUT OF BLOCKING ..................................................................................................................... 31
Digital blockingpoint ......................................................................................................................................... 31
Analogue blockingpoint ..................................................................................................................................... 31
WO SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................................................32
Siox modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 32
Siox technical specifications ............................................................................................................................... 34
MODBUS SIGNAL .............................................................................................. 34
CONFIGURATIONS FILES .......................................................................................................................... 35
PC FILES..................................................................................................................................................................
35
SCPU FILES.............................................................................................................................................................
35
PANEL FILES. . . . . . . . . . . . 35
GENERATE.EXE I FILES .......................................................................................................................... 36
GENERATE.EXE........................................................................................................................................................
36
FILES FROM ELECTRONICS ......................................................................................................................
TRANSFER 36
FILES TO DISKETTE .................................................................................................................................
UPDATED 37
SELF CHECK SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................. 38
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................................................... 40
GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................................................
40
SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................................40
OPERATOR STATION TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS ............................................................................................... 41
MAINUNITUN~OO TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS ....................... . . ..................................................................... 42
PERIPIIERALPANELS~DEAD M A N SYSI'EMTROUBLESHOOTING TIP 43
MAINTENANCE ..........................................................................................................................................44
.
dep. Automation . Longva
Page 3
User's Manual -220 UMAS V Alarm System
1 INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
The purpose of this manual is to provide the operator with enough information to operate the
UMAS V Alarm System in a proper manner.
SCOPE
The scope of the manual is to give the operator information about the operator station.
Note that all information in this manual does not apply to all installations. Earlier versions of
hardware and software will have only part of the functions installed and available. Some
installations will have limited functions by design.
DEFINITIONS
UMAS V - Ulstein Multifunctional Automation System Vision
REVISIONS
1 Date 1 Issued 1 Status I Rev. 1
1121.08.97
I
1I PSK
I
I First issue W S V 102 version.
I
10.0
I
I
I
I
122.09.97 1 GOO I Peripheral panel instructions added. I 1.0
1 25.02.98 1 JSF I Added graphic configuration. 12.0 I
1 26.08.98 1
I I
1 PSK 1 New revision 13.0

7.10.98
26.11.98
25.01.99
PSK
1 PSK
PSK
Added ftp operation under self check system
I Small adj.
Battery on Smart
13.2
3.1
3.3
1
08.03.99 PSK Added ack from Lauer Panel 3.4
25.10.99 GOO Maintenance routine added 3.5
12.10.01 AR Changed text in Transfer of Watch Responsibility 3.6
DISCLAIMER
The operator station software for UMAS V using InTouch running under Windows NT. This
software is not intended to run on a PC at the same time as other software is used. Ulstein
Automation will not be liable for any problems with either UMAS V or the PC, or subsequent
problems this may give.
Under no circumstances should this software be run on the primary operating station in any other
way than approved by Ulstein Automation.
Page 4
User's Manual 2 2\ UMAS VAlarm System
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The UMAS V is an integrated automation system for control and monitoring of ship equipment
and machinery. Tailor-made graphical pictures on a Windows-based man-machine interface
displays necessary information facilitating operation of the system. Dependent of the operational
requirements onboard UMAS V can consist of one or more of the following systems:
4 UMAS V Alarm and Monitoring System

- The ship's alarm and surveillance system giving information to the operator about the
machinery equipment's condition. Peripheral alarm panels with duty change watch system
and alarm indication are communicating on profibus serial network. These panels are
located in engine control room, on bridge, public rooms and cabins. A Dead Man System
with separate panels may also be interfaced as the engineer's safety system.
4 UMAS V Pump and Valve Control System

- The ship's control and overview system for cargo handling and machinery systems.
Graphical tailor-made mimic diagrams, ensuring ease operation display tanks and piping
systems.
4 UMAS V Tank Sounding System

- The ship's tank level gauging system. Electro-pneumatic tank equipment can be used for
level measuring as well as electronic sensors. Tank information is normally transferred to
external operator stations, but an operator panel located in the main electronic cabinet
takes care of local and emergency sounding.
In addition following systems can be interfaced:
4 Power Management System (PMS)

4 Load Calculator
+ Maintenance System
4 Miscellaneous Machinery Equipment (fans, pumps, valves, compressors etc.)
The UMAS V design is based upon a distributed configuration concept of software and hardware.
Distributed system cabinets communicate on a single or redundant Local Area Network (LAN -
Ethernet) connected to local and remote operator stations.
User's Manual 223 UMAS V Alarm System
SYSTEM STRUCTURE
HARDWARE
Electronics
Each system is controlled by a microprocessor, and can operate as a stand-alone system.
Input/output modules are used for gathering data from sensors and for process control.
Communication-ports are available for data exchange with other automation systems.
Operator Stations
UMAS V is a multi-user system where each operator station works independently. A back-up
functionality provides safe operation in case of failure on an operator station. By use of a multi-
screen system, each station can include two colour monitors. This option makes it easier for the
operator to manage several systems simultaneously. All information is common for all stations
and all screens. Necessary fail-safe-logic prevents dangerous situations to occur due to a faulty
operation.
The operator stations use a Windows NT based presentation program, providing a user friendly
man-machine interface. From the operator station the systems can be operated directly from
mimic diagrams, group displays and parameter displays. The system uses custom-designed
screens for ease of operation and clarity of user interaction.
User's Manual 2* '5 UMAS VAlarm System
Each operator station can include:

MaritimePC
One or two colour monitors
Keyboard
Pointing device (mouse or trackball)
Alarm printer
Graphical colour printer
UPS
0 Power Distribution Unit (24 VDC / 230 VAC)
Network
Operator stations and electronic units are linked together in an Ethernet network. The system can
also contain sub networks for communication with other automation systems.
Main Network
Twisted pair Ethernet network in a star structure. Redundant network may be included if required.
Sub Network
Serial lines with standard protocols.
Page 7
User's Manual 220- UMAS VAlarm System
2 ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM
The Alarm and Monitoring System is an integrated function for the Ulstein Multifunctional
Automation System, where the purpose of the system is to cover machinery and equipment
having functions necessary for the safety and manoeuvrability of the ship.
The Alarm and Monitoring System is designed to meet the requirements in the different
classification societies current Rules. Special attention is made for unattended machinery spaces,
where machinery alarms are relayed to the bridge and engineers' accommodation.
GENERAL
Text-based and graphical tailor-made pictures give a complete overview of the different systems.
Symbols and alarm texts appear on the screen at strategic locations so that abnormalities are
easily detected. A straightforward menu system makes it easy to select among all existing
pictures.
Features
Modularised I/O
Decentralised UO
Self-monitoring; i.e. equipped with internal watch alarms to monitor it's own faults
Simple and straightforward parameter adjustments; i.e. limit values, time delays, sensor
calibration etc.
Possibility to inhibit individual signals and listing of all inhibited signals.
Interlock function.
Group status, alarm summary and event lists.
Bargraph status presentation.
Printer for different types of reports and listing.
Action group function; i.e. input point status combinations give output action to openlclose
contacts.
Historical trends of analogue signals, inhibited and off-scanned signals, past events, running
hours etc.
Online configuration and calibration
Serial interface to external sub systems (i.e. Main Engines, Seismic Compressors etc.)
Page 8
User's Manual
22 5- UMAS V Alarm System
Display groups
Sixteen text based configurable display groups make the system flexible, and give the opportunity
to locate each alarm in its natural group.
Example:
ME. 1 Port Lub. Oil System Cooling System ME. 2 Stbd.

ME. 1 Exh. Temp. Fuel Oil System Electronics ME. 2 Exh. Temp.
Propulsion Port Bilge System Compressed Air Propulsion Stbd.
Miscellaneous Cargo System Spare System Failure
SYSTEM STRUCTURE
Main cabinet I : Main cabinet I1
Page 9
User's Manual 22c UMAS V Afarm System
HARDWARE
The number of cabinets, and other items can vary depending on the configuration of the system.
The main cabinets are supplied from primary 220V AC and secondary 24V DC battery back-up.
24V DC is distributed for system units as sub I/O cabinets and alarm panels.
A power distribution unit with a 24V DCl230V AC inverter unit ensures back-up power supply to
visual display unit (VDU) and printer for one operator station (normally in engine control room).
Main Cabinet I
Microprocessor unit (IUC) equipped with power supply and communication cards
Ethernet connection to operator stations
Digital input module for internal watch of power supply and temperature
Digital output module for control of lights and sirens
Digital and analogue I/O modules for gathering data from sensors
Local alarm panel
Main Cabinet I1
Microprocessor unit (SMART VO) equipped with power supply and communication cards
Digital input module for internal watch of power supply and temperature
Digital output module for control of lights and sirens
Digital and analogue 110 modules for gathering data from sensors
Local alarm panel
SUB U 0 Cabinets
Digital and analogue I/O modules for gathering data from sensors.
User's Manual 227 UMAS VAlarm System
U 0 modules (SIOX)
The VO system serves as interface and signal conversion between external instruments and the
computer. The system read SIOX modules connected on a serial siox bus. The modules are
mounted inside main cabinets andlor distributed in smaller cabinet nearer sensors. Several
module types are available for the following 110 signals:
Digital signals
Potential free inputs
Potential free relay outputs
Analogue signals
4-20 mA
* 0-20 mA
0-10 v
+I-1ov
PTlOO
PTlOOO
Thermocouple elements (Type J and K)
Alarm panels
Depending on the system configuration, alarm panels can be located in the engine control room,
on bridge, and in different cabins and rooms in the accommodation. Panels and main cabinets are
linked together in a serial network, and a standard profibus protocol is used for data exchange. An
alarm panel with direct link to the local microprocessor can be mounted in the door of the main
cabinets to act as a backup operator station. Each panel consists of a LCD (text), LED'S with
leading text, softkeys and a buzzer.
Features
All information is common for all panels
Display of alarms
Display of Bridge groups (Action groups)
Duty change watch system
Responsibility change ECR / BRIDGE
"Call All Engineers"
Control of Dead Man System (ONIOFF)
Possible to read input data (temperatures, pressures, etc.)
Acknowledge of alarms
Each panel's software defines the functionality and the limitations depending on the system
configuration.
-
dep.: Automation Longva
User's Manual 2 28 UMAS VAlarnz System
Dead Man System

A Dead Man System with separate panels can be interfaced as the engineer's safety system. The
panels, which are hardwired to the main cabinet, are equipped with LED'S, softkeys and a buzzer.
Interface
As an option the microprocessor unit can be equipped with different communication cards to
interface external subsystems. Several protocols for communication to main engine control
systems are available.
SYSTEM START-UP
The system has two built-in procedures for start-up:
- Initial Start-up (or ctcold)) start when installing the system)

- Restart (or & o t ~start after a system failure)
Initial Start-up
This procedure is performed during the installation of the system. When powering up the system,
application database is loaded from each configuration hard disk of the operator stations installed.
The booting procedure performs initial RAM memory allocation and system data is loaded fiom a
non-volatile memory in the main unit. System and point parameters are stored, in addition to
point descriptors.
The system will automatically be initialised and ready for operating when the VDU displays the
initial picture of the company logo. If a malfunction should occur during normal initialising and
loading sequence, a red text message d O M M ERROR ALARM SYSTEM)) will be displayed.
Restart (Re-Loading)
Restart of the system is performed automatically to ensure that the local databases are updated at
any time. Restart will take place immediately as a consequence of power failure either in the
main unit or in one of the operator stations or as a consequence of communication failure between
the main unit and one of the operator stations.
Page 12
User's Manual 2xCi UMAS VAlarm System
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
OPERATOR STATION
All operational hnctions can be carried out at any operator station, except alarm acknowledge
and point configuration, which can be executed from ECR station only. The operator
communication is guided by a menu system, using pointing device.
Keyboard
For convenient operator communication with the computer, the station is fitted with a standard
PCIAT ASCII keyboard. 4 function keys (F9-F12) makes it possible to acknowledge siren from
ECR.
Visual Display Unit
I Responsibilty
Watch Alarm display group:
-Grey: no alarm
Number of inhibit alarms
-Red alarms: in group
1 / -Flashing red: unsign. alarms
-
User's ~Manzial 23O UMAS VAlarm System
Group Pictures
Clicking on alarm display group field does the selection of alarm group pictures.
Status pictures for all configured alarm groups with horizontal bargraph indication of analogue
values. Pictures consist of 3 pages. &age No)) button will indicate with red if alarms in other
page. Each page can display 20 lines of alarm points.
Group no. 1 to 15 is dedicated to external alarm points and is organised as geographical group's
i.e. main engines, fuel system, etc. Group no. 16 includes all the internal system parameters.
Present alarms are displayed in red colour. Unacknowledged alarms are indicated with blinking
status. Acknowledged alarms returning to normal status will immediately be allocated to normal
position in the group list.
- Selection of customer
I configurable pictures
i ,
- Print page
Press fbr page acknowledge

>>.&..;::
,a;.-
t Error
ME 1 Cxllallsl Tewp
ME.l ExhausiTemp.
M t 1 ExhdmlTemp
ME 1 ExhallaTemp.
ME.l ErhausiTemp.
UE.l ExhaustTemp.
Cyllnder 1
Cylinder-
Cylmdur3
Cylmder4
Cylindsr5
Cyllnder6
H
H
H
H
H
470
470
470
4x1
462
470 Error
323
321
3zr
'C
'C
"C
'C
'c
-
-
Ermr
L Return from alarm
' (blue)
-
- Alarm (red)
-
I E . l ExhallnTenlp. Cylinder 1 Dev. D 59 t r r o r "C
ME.1 Ealmusl Temp. Cylindcr 2 Dev.
-
D 59 105 'C
I L . 1 Cxllallst lenlp. Cylinder3 Uev. D 59 Ertm "C Errur
-Mr.l+haustTernp. Cylinder4 Dev, ---- --D 59 --31 'C
-- --
\
. -
U 1 E x h a m T e m n . Cvllnder5 Dev D 59 35 "C
ME. Exhaust Temp. Cylinder6 Dev. D 59 36 "C
ME.\ExhaMTernp. Avoraga 357 .C
I- press for \ Press to list all information

acknowledge of the point
Page 14
Customer Configurable Pictures

Customer Configurable Pictures is a visual image of alarms dedicated to i.e. main engine.
Press for acknowledge

Alarm Summary
Alarm summary displays all alarms with text, time, date and status. Select picture from MENU or
press A from keyboard.
Alarm Surnrnarv
----
Indicates number of alarms
Pagc 15
User's Manzuzl 23 3 . UMAS VAlarm System
Event Log
Event Log displays all alarms events for a number of days with text, time, date and status. Select
picture from MENU.
Event Loa
Trend
By operating TREND from group picture, the trend picture will appear.
Click to select new pens and set

time and date
- Values at cursor position
Cursor position
'- Selected pens

(colour for each pen)
click to select new pens
i Time now
lnterval,lefi and right
User's Mrzncml 773 UMAS VAlarm System
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The selection of System Config. is done by clicking on System Config. from MENU. Access to
the set-up routine only by qualified personnel. Password is required. Program versions will be
displayed when pressing ABOUT. Version will be displayed for PC, PLC and IUC software. To
detect new siox modules on siox-bus press DETECT after installed. Bridge group text can be
configured by clicking on each bridge group text, max. 20 characters. Display group text can be
configured by clicking on each display group, max. 17 characters.
Timetdate adjustments
Password
Time-out of password.
After the password has been inserted, parameter adjustments will be allowed for 10 minutes.
2 levels of password, User and System -password. To activate password input enters trCtrl. PD.
Page 17
User's Manila1 4
P-3 UMAS VAlarm System
PARAMETER ADJUSTMENTS
Point parameters can be selected by cursor from group pictures by clicking on alarm text. For new
points, click on empty line on selected display group. Point parameters can also be selected from
graphic pictures by clicking on the lower part of the graphic symbol.
Digital Input
A1.Text on PC (1 5 sign first

for TAG , rnax 35 for name)
A1.Text on alarm panels (max 24)
TimeDelay before alarm
Channellio-number
(physical connection)
Inhibit, disable alarm function
Alarm at open contact from sensor
Update to confirm parameter changes
Text on screen (max 10 char)
Delete point
Status on blocking point when

Analogue Input
blocking activates (high = alarm)
Unit >rn-q,T&-:,I-;:'-:-I mq ...........

IEIPm .........:?.,'. 7.1
~-3 :&-,--I -
w-,&q:;-.-"
.7:TT,T;s; ';, , : HighILow alarm limit
max Scaling on PC bargraph
WTfx-.
-1 K-pJ
3 char
~* ~ , , j
f
pm:iy71
+
,'
:",i:.:
- - -
Scaling on signal , Input = dig. value
Value=eng.unit at corrsponding
User's Manual 2 3 ~ UMAS VAlarm System
Dev. Point
. .... . ....... -. . . . . . .
-m"T.I
- 1 .hw,,; '...
~
1
-- .I
, ,
, ; ., - " : ,
-4
, 60,m_iidD' Tsi;;;: t$i*;,hDBI; - Corresponding average point
. . . _
. .... ..........
ME.1 ExhansiTemp. Cylin I 0.-m
Average Point
Max deviation point to a average point are 20
dep.: Automation Longva -
Page 19
SETUP GRAPHIC PICTURES

Before a graphic point in customer configurable picture will function, the point must be attached
to the correct group and line number. Find the alarm group and line number i.e. group 5 line 1.
Before configuration of graphic password is required, select the correct graphic symbol and click
on the input field to the right of the symbol. Insert group and line number + UPDATE.
To activate graphic, select another picture and back again to graphic picture.
For average points the input field is at the upper left comer
For failure alarm in system CPU 2 the input field is below the MENU button at the top of the
group alarm picture.
The attachment can be saved to file by pressing Text Files: SAVE from system configuration
picture.
PRINTER FUNCTIONS
Alarm printer (1)
Alarm printer 1 will print changes in alarm condition. Into alarm, out of alarm, acknowledge etc.
From system configuration Error messages from printer can be disabled.
Printer (2)
Printer 2 will print all pictures with print button on.
Rolls-RoyceMarine AS
Page 20
User's Manual 2 32 UMAS V Alarm Systent
PERIPHERAL ALARM PANELS
Panels
The alarms routed to bridge panel are defined as a maximum of 16 priority groups.
Alarms for internal system supervision are defined in one specific group, normally group no. 16
SYSTEM FAILURE.
Additional hnctions on the bridge panel:

Display activated alarm w. Bridge Group
Alarm buzzer.
Ext. Alarm buzzer.
Alarm buzzer acknowledges buttons (F6 and F7 labelled ACK.).
Dimmer
LED for Dead man system ON indication.
LED for BRIDGE and ECR control
User's Manual
2 38 UMAS VAlarrn System
Menus
Info picture (at start-up)
WELCOME TO ULSTEIN
PANEL CONTROLLER FOR UMAS V
verl.2 1999
A* REDUCE LOAD ACTIVATE M M

A* COMMON ALARM 2 4 Alarm picture , A=alarm, *=unsigned ,M=moore
SYSTEM FAILURE 0 0 2 = n o of unsign. al. , 4=tot alarms in group
-1 alm menu up down call dead resp up/down scroll tkrough groups
I
FI=Previously F2=Bridge Group Alarm
F3=lnfo F4=Call all engineers
1
; NE ; :
FI=Previously
SYSTEM;OR UMAS v @,
FZ=Get spes. point
F3=Deadman system F4=Responsibilty
1
FS=Call one anel FG=Next
FI=Previously F2=Not Ack Alarms

F3=Call all engineers timer
Page 22
0 CALL ALL ENGINEERS
0
Deadman system ON/OFF
Deadman : ON
brG menu up down set cancel x
V
Responsibility Change
Engine room: Unattended en. room
Status : wait
info menu up down set cancel duty
I
Watch changover system

On duty : Electrican
1 brG menu up down set cancel resp
Status : Error Value : 06.000

Po.no : 01001 Limit : 1.0 L o w
CALL TO SPESlFlED ENGINEER WAIT

Call : Bridge
1 brG menu up down call cancel x
Page 23
User's Manual 24. UMAS VAlarm System
@
TIMER DEADMAN SYSTEM
1 1
TIMER CONFIGURATION
Time delay attended eng. : 1.01
Time delay unattended eng. : 1.01
info menu up down set next x
High Temp Cabinet 6ri:lO Num: 1

L o w Press Lub Oil 6ri:lO
L o w Press Fuel Oil 6ri:lO Tot: 12
brG down t o
220 V Cabinet UN900 6ri:lO Num: 1

L o w Press Lub Oil 6ri:lO
L o w Press Fuel Oil Bri:lO Tot: 5
User's Matzual 9..4 UMAS V Alarm System
Functions
Functions reached via the (Menus))of the panel:
Watch changeover can be transferred between bridge and ECR station. The watch
responsibility is displayed at LCD lights; also ((ON DUTY)) in the respective cabin
panel and ((ON))in cabinlmess panels will light.
On duty can be selected from ECR panel
Dead man system can be set ONIOFF from ECR panel
Dead man timer values can be adjusted (password) from Ecr panel
((CALLALL ENGINEERS)) via the menu system. Emergency call to all watch panels.
To be used in a situation where an alarm has not been acknowledged by the engineer on
duty within a reasonable time. The message ((CALL ALL ENGINEERS)) will be
displayed on all panels and the buzzers are activated. Acknowledge from panel's will
reset buzzers.
The ((CALL ALL ENGINEERS)) sequence can be cancelled by activation of cancel on
panel.
When system is in ((UNMANNED ENG.ROOM)>, the ((CALL ALL ENGINEERS)) will

automatically be activated as follows:
If the Engineer ((ON DUTY)) does not reset the buzzer on Cabin or Messroom panels
within a preset time delay. (Typical time delay 3 - 5 min.)
If the Engineer ((ON DUTY)) has reset the buzzer on Cabin or Messroom panel, but
does not reset the Hodrotating light on ECR panel within a preset time delay. (Typical
time delay 3 - 5 min.)
Engine room panel

The engine room panel is equivalent to the other panel, except the following functions:
No light dimmer
Horn and rotating alarm light reset in engine room in parallel with the (KESET
BUZZER))button.
Panel can ack alarms
Panel can display acknowledge alarms
dep.: Automation- Longva
Page 25
User's Manual 24-3 UMAS VAlarm System
ALARMS
Alarm Buzzers
Buzzers in Peripheral Panel (PP)

Alarms (with delay) activates buzzer on bridge, ECR and the cabin room panel on watch (duty).
Alarm buzzer in messroom panel and other living room panels will also be activated.
Buzzer Resct (acknowledge)

0 ECR-buzzer must be reset separately. Alarm acknowledges on ECR panel will cause
buzzer reset on all other panels (if not acknowledged separately).
Bridge can only reset bridge buzzer.
Messroom panel can only reset buzzer on messroom panel
TRANSFER OF WATCH RESPONSIBILITY
Push buttons on ECR panels, with transfer of responsibility indication. Selection of attended or
unattended engine control room. The transfer of responsibility can only be initiated from engine
control room stations.
Transfer from attended to unattended ECR.

The procedure for transferring watch responsibility from attended to unattended ECR:
Observe that "Attended Engine Room " text on LCD display and that ECR responsibility LED is
indicated on bridge and ECR panels.
Press RESP + upldown + SET on ECR panel and observe that "Unattended Engine Room" text is
blinking on LCD display and that audible buzzer is activated on bridge panels.
Acknowledging on Bridge panel will transfer the watch responsibility to engineer on duty.
Observe that buzzer resets, unattendedlBridge responsibility LED is indicated and that steady
"Unattended Engine Room" texts are shown on LCD display on both engine control room and
bridge panels.
Check that it is possible to reverse the procedure after initiating the transfer of responsibility by
operating CANCEL on ECR panel. This should cause the procedure to abrupt and the watch
responsibility to remain in ECR.
User's Manzlal 243 UMAS V Alarm System
Transfer from unattended to attended ECR

The procedure for transferring watch responsibility from unattended to attended ECR:
Observe that "Unattended Engine Room" text on LCD display and that mattendemridge
responsibility LED is indicated on Bidge and ECR panels.
Press RESP + upidown + SET on ECR panel and observe that "Attended Engine Room" text is
blinking on LCD display and that audible buzzer is activated on Bridge panels.
Acknowledging on Bridge panel will transfer the watch responsibility. Observe that buzzer resets,
ECR responsibility LED is indicated and that steady "Attended Engine Room" texts are shown on
LCD display on both engine room and bridge panels.
Check that it is possible to reverse the transfer of responsibility procedure after initiating, by
operating CANCEL on ECR panel. Ref. the procedure for transferring watch responsibility from
attended to unattended ECR.
AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION O F ((CALL ALL ENGINEERS))
The system has a built in function for automatic activation of ((Call All Engineers)). The function
is active in bridge control if:
- The alarm is not acknowledged on cabin panel on watch or in ECR panel within a preset time
delay after an alarm occurs.
- The alarm is acknowledge at the panel in watch, and not acknowledge in the ECR panel within a
preset time delay.
When function is activated, ((Call all Engineers)) will be activated on all peripheral panels.
DEAD MAN SYSTEM
Panel layout (Dead man ON-OFF / Dead man reset).
The dead man system is an integrated part of the main unit. Two timers are used to verify that the
engineer is on duty: T1 adjustable from two to 60 minutes and T2 adjustable from zero to three
minutes from panels (with password).
The dead man system timer must be acknowledged in the interval of timer T1, otherwise a
rotating alarm light and a typhoon in the engine room will be activated. If acknowledged within
the interval of timer T2 the alarm light and typhoon will be reset. The timers T1 and T2 will also
be reset. In the opposite case the dead man alarm will be activated on bridge panels.
-
Page 28
User's Manual 24-57 UMAS V Alarm System
Dead man panel ONIOFF

From panels (DM.SYS. ON)) and tDM.SYS. OFF)) will be activated. When (Attended
Engine Room)), the dead man system will automatically be activated. At ((Unattended
Engine Room)) the dead man system will automatically be activated when an alarm
occurred.
Lights for dead man system ON or OFF indication.
e Alarm lamp indicating timeout on timer T1 (warning after typical 27 min) and T2
(typical 3 min), i.e. the system has not been acknowledged within the timer T I andlor
T2 intervals.
Lamp test button.
Dead man panel acknowledge

Button taESET DM.SYS.n for acknowledges within the intervals of timer T1 and T2.
Lamp indicating dead man system ON or OFF.
Alarm lamp indicating timeout on timer T1 (warning after typical 27 min) and T2
(typical 3 min), i.e. the system has not been acknowledged within the timer T1 andlor
T2 intervals.
Lamp test button.
dep.: Automation- Longva
Page 29
User's Manual 24
6'
- UMAS VAlarm System
PROCEDURE FOR CALIBRATION OF ANALOG INPUTS

Calibrations
Before calibration of UMAS V, make sure that sensor calibration is correct.
Select the point on UMAS V, which is to be calibrated.
Input LowMigh is a digital input from sensor.

Raw input is present digital value from sensor.
Typical values:
4-20 mA signal: 1116 - 4394: 0- 100 bar (range of sensor)
PtlOO signal: 324 - 1324: 0-100 "C
Thermocouple: 300 - 1300: 0 - 1000
Modbus signal: 0 - 100: 0-100
Use a calibrator to i.e. pressurise (heat) the sensor to a low range known pressure (or temperature)
i.e. 0 bar. Click on parameter Value Low and insert 0, click on parameter Input Low and insert
the present raw value (i.e. 11 17) and click Update.
Increase the pressure to the upper range i.e. 10 bar. Click on parameter Value High and insert the
actual value (10 bar), click on parameter Input High and insert the present raw value (i.e. 4394)
and click Update.
The point is now calibrated. It is of course important to use values for Value Low: close to sensor
low point, and value for Value High: close to sensor max. value. The accuracy of calibration will
then be better.
Range Low: Start point of bargraph on screen.

Range High: End point of bargraph on screen.
-
Page 30
User's Manual 24 7 UMAS VAlarm System
PROCEDURE FOR INPUT OF NEW POINTS

Digital input
Select the display group the new alarm point belongs to. Click on an empty line, where the new
point will be placed. A new picture will appear and Type point and alarm or monitor has to be
selected.
Type point: Digital, analogue, deviation, average
Alarm will give alarm; monitor will only indicate status.
Other data for point see Parameter adjustments and 110 System
PROCEDURE FOR DELETE POINT

Delete point
Select the point to delete by clicking on text, and enter delete.
PROCEDURE FOR ACCESS TO OTHER WINDOWS PROGRAM

After password press: Ctrl + left shift + w.
Message in alarm list: Exit to windows possible!
It is now free to access other program in windows.
PROCEDURE FOR INPUT OF BLOCKING

It is possible to block alarm point by using other point, both digital and analogue, monitor and
alarm. Error on blocking point will not influence on blocking.
Digital blocking point

For digital blocking point it is best to have a NC signal at blocking condition.
1.e. motor stop gives a NC contact. Failure in wiring will not give blocking condition.
It is normal to block alarm for the first sec. when the motor start. Time delay will start when point
is going into alarm condition, so therefore select alarm on Open for the blocking point.
Text Normal: Stop, Text Alarm: Run
Find the blocking point number (i.e. 1372). Select point and look in Point Configuration data.
For the point to block, select Point Configuration data and key in: Blocked By: point no (i.e.
1372) and Blocked Logic: Low/Normal
Analogue blocking point

For analogue blocking point select HighILow and limit and use Blocking logic on point to block
to select blocking. Remember into alarm is depending on time delay on blocking point.
User's Manual 2 43 UMAS VAlar~nSystem
I10 SYSTEM
Siox modules
General
UMAS V can have more than one System CPU (SCPU). TUC SCPU has Ethernet connection.
Smart 110 has to be connected to IUC SCPU by a serial link (profibus).
Siox modules is connected by a 2-wire siox bus and controlled from SCPU. An adapter K32 is
converting from RS232 to siox bus. When modules are communicating, a red LED at each
module connected will be flashing.
Channel is a number indicting physical connection of wires into modules from the sensor, and can
be configured for each point.
Number system:
IUC no. 1 Smart 110 no. 1 Smart 110 no. 2
Channel: 1 100-4999 Channel: 10100- 14999 Channel: 15 100-19999
All modules will be labelled with a UN number ref. dwg's to the specific plant.
2 last numbers indicate channels on the different siox modules, channel 1 always on the right end
of the module.
Example:
ontroll
UN: 11 UN: 12 UN: 13 UN: 14 UN: 15 UN: 16 UNr 17

1101- 1201- 1301. 1401- 1501. 1601- not.
1121 1264 1318 1418 1521 1625 1715
Ad,: 1 Adr: 2 Adr: 3 Adr: S Adr: 5
User's Manual Q4q UMAS VAlarnt System
- ~
Adr: 1 Adr: 2 Adr: 3 Ad,: 1 hdr:5 Adr: 6 Ad,:? Adr: 8
User's Manual 9J73 UMAS V Alarm System
Sior technical specifications
Supply: 24VDC (18-32)
S48 Analogue points:

Current: 30mA
Type: * 10 V, 0 - 10 V, 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA, thermocouples, Ft100, PtlOOO
Resolution: 12 bits
S45 Digital points:

Current: 16mA no load
Input : 18 - 32V DC, 7 mA
Output: 18 - 32V DC, 0,5 A
S27 Digital:
Current: 20mA no load
Input: 18-32V DC, 7 rnA
Output: 18-32V DC, 100rnA
MODBUS SIGNAL
General
UMAS V can read TO by use of modbus RTU protocol. The modbus register is configured over to
channel number in generate.exe.
Page 34
User's Manual 9--f-1 UMAS V Alarm System
4 CONFIGURATIONS FILES
FILES
For configuration of system it is saved in different files. Files for PC configuration is saved on PC
and files for SCPU is saved in respectively SCPU. The files for PC and SCPU are depending on
each other and must be of the sane revision.
After on-line configuration of plant the changes can be saved into files by pressing
TextFiles: Save from System Config. picture.
For new files from factory, they can be loaded into the system by pressing Text Files: Load from
System Config. picture.
PC FILES
The files on PC is saved on c:\ and all is named *.txt. There are about 80-90 files.
X is for 8 files 1-8.
For VDU configuration:

L StatXtxt, LimitX.txt, Range-HiX.txt, RangeLoX.txt, TextX.txt, TxtNorX.txt, Txt-AlX.txt,
~iit~.txt
For Graphic connections:

A-graphX.txt, analogue points, D-graphX.txt, digital points
For text in groups:

Display.txt, display group text, Bridge.txt, bridge group text
SCPU FILES
The files on SCPU are saved on each SCPU. These files must be handled by generate.exe
See GENERATE.EXE1 FILES
PANEL FILES
The files on Lauer panels are saved on each panel. These files must be handled by SW for Lauer.
The files contain bridgegroup text.
User's Manrial 2 $3. UMAS V A larin System
5 GENERATE.EXE / FILES
GENERATE.EXE
The files for plant configuration are saved on WC, Smart10 and PC.
The PC configuration, text for PC screen type point i.e. is stored in InTouch application. They can
be saved to disk by pressing Save Text Files from System Config. picture. The files will be saved
on c:\. The files on TUC and smart10 will be saved on electronic unit after an Update (after 15
min.) from Point Configuration or manual Save IUC files from System Config. picture.
The files from electronics must be transferred to PC after changes on system (changed a lot).
TRANSFER FILES FROM ELECTRONICS
1.
Start generate.exe from System Config.
-or fiom windows menu, use Procedure for access to other windows program
and Start and Generate
- or fiom explorer, and double click on c:\datafile\exefile\generat.exe
2.
Select File Open Project, double click on FileName and select directory i.e.
c:\datafile\nnnnx\V 08.104\ by pressing on directory up one level and select directory on
window until highescversion is selected (V-08.104 higher than V-07.104) and select Umas-V.txt
and press Open. Press OK and modules will appear on the screen. Press OK on window
messages.
3.
Select FilesTransfer - LoadtSend all project files Create new version? Press OK
Press Connect from new window, text in lower part of window change to Connected OK.
4.
Press Get Files and files will be transferred to PC.
5.
If SmartIO on plant select Files Smart1 and press Get Files.
6.
Message at finished: Finished OK.
Page 36
UPDATED FILES TO DISKETTE
To get updated files to a diskette follow this procedure:
1.
Go through "Transfer files from electronics"
Insert a empty diskette in drive a:
3.
From generate.exe select File - Copy project to diskette, and press Start Copy
It will take a few minutes; (if not enough space use explorer and copy all except excel directory).
4.
From System Config. picture press Text Files: Save . It takes a few minutes, green flashing field
stop flashing when finish.
5.
Use explorer and copy all files to a:\xxxx\V-Ox.nnn\txt text directory on diskette.
Press Type on explorer, and select all *.txt files. Select first and simultaneous press left shift and
mark last txt file with mouse, all txt files will be blue. Copy to clipboard and select
a:\xxxx\V-Ox.nnn\txt\ and paste.
User's Manual 25.k UMAS VAlarm System
6 SELF CHECK SYSTEM
COMPUTER SYSTEM
The components listed below are continuously monitored:

Ethernet comm.
Software Process Running in electronic
Program execution (Watch-Dog)
Ethernet:
The operator is warned with in clear text messages on the VDU,
cComm. Error Alarm System!)),when connection between PC and electronics fails.
Process Running:
The different process in CPU will update status lamp on STATUS card (left in PEP-rack in main
electronic cabinet or DOUT on Smart 10). Error is indicated with LED 0 stop to flash and get
dark. LED 1-6 indicate a binary number for the process with failure
(LED 1 + LED 3 = lxl+Ox2+1x4 = 1+0+4 = 5).
1 : Ioman 4 :Am 7: 16: Start (before V104.004 : 11)

2 : Intch 5 : Siox 8 : Profibus
3 : Umm 6 : Panel 9 : Modbus ME1 (10 : 2)
Main CPU / IUC power off for over 1-2 months:

If power off for app. 2 mounths the configuration files can be destroyed on IUC. The LED on
status card will all be dark even at power on CPU.
The files has to be transferred from PC to KJC:
Key in password and press Ctrl+Shift+w to access windows

Press Start Button and Run and key in ftp and press OK
A window showing ftp> inside will appear.
TO connect IUC write open 193.213.231.101 <ENTER>. FTP write a message and ask for user,
key in: super <ENTER>. FTP ask for password, key in user <ENTER>. If connection is OK the
message Connected OK will appear.
User's Manual R y r UMAS V Alarm System
The correct path to conf. file must be selected. The path will normally be
c:\datafile\xxxxY\V-01.104UUC, if more revisions V-01.. .V-10 select the highest revision (use
explorer to find the correct path)
Xxxx is plant no. To select path with ftp key : lcd c:\datafil\ xxxxY\V01~103\IUC<ENTER>.
FTP acknowledge for path if correct command. Now the files can be transferred.
Each file must be transferred by the command: send [filename] <ENTER>

Find filename with explorer under path c:\datafil\ xxxxY\VOl-103UUC
Send all files on IUC.
Quit ftp program.
After RESETIUC the UMAS Valarmplnnt will start (reset button orpower off - on).
Watch-Dog:
If the system halts the result will be a watchdog time-out and the system will activate the
Siren/Horn, and LED 7 on status card will be switched off.
Page 39
User's Manzlal 2 YL UMAS VAlarm System
7 TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL
If there is a problem with UMAS V, please try to identify the symptom. Check if the symptom is
listed below. The proposed action after each symptom is listed after priority.
Should it be necessary please contact our
Service Department.
Ulstein Automation AIS.
Phone. +47 70208200
Fax. + 47 70 20 83 51
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Before ship is set out of operation it is recommended to transfer all configuration files to PC.
It is also recommended to change battery on SmartIO's when power off for more than 130 days.
The battery is guaranteed for 140 days (at power OFF on SmartIO). Check battery by measuring
the voltage. Below 2.5V change battery.
Page 40
OPERATOR STATION TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
Action
Alarm message Error UNxxx Check unit with failure, ref. dwg's. Check power and
wiring to unit.
VDU dark. Check voltage to VDU and PC.
Switch offlon power supply to both VDU and PC.
Check cabling between P C and VDU.
-~ .~
Message on VDU ctComm. Error Alarm System !!n Wait for 2 minutes.
Check if SCPU in UN900 have stopped.
Try to restart PC in ECR.
Restart both SCPU in UN900 and PC in ECR (also PLS
if P&V Control System is integrated).
Check cabling between operator station and UN900.
Also T- and end -terminators.
Open for access to other windows program, meltcpip and
Intouch view must run. Switch to other win. Program for
error message to sign.
Read status in meltcpip driver. If not configured open
cfg. File under driver directory (rneltcpip.cfg).
From DOS window press "ping 193.2 13.23 1.10 1" and
the IUC shall reply OK. If not try ping 193.213.231.107
Check red light on CPU card UN900 over col (if
continuously red probably earth failure on coax?).
Ref. drawings for Power and Comm. Distribution

1 PC has stopped. Frozen picture or dark VDU. Try to restart PC.
Try switch off printer restart PC
--
I Printer does not work. Check that printer is in ((ON-LINE))state and not out of
paper.
Switch offlon power supply to printer and retry.
Check printer cable/connections.
Check paper feedingltray.
Restart PC
Page 4 1
User's Manual 2 y CY UMAS VAlarm System
MAIN UNIT UN900 TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
jymptom Action
1 CPU has stopped (Red LED indicator (H) in front Check fuse Fx.
of CPU-card is illuminated.) w Check all power supplies 220V AC, 24V DC and
5V DC.
* Try to reset system by disconnecting power supply to
CPU (Push reset bottom in front of CPU card or Remove
and replace Fuse Fx)
Ref. drawings for Power and Comm. Distribution.
CPU stops and restarts periodically. Check 5V DC supply.

Check temperature above modules.
Check settings of thermostat (recommended 15-20 OC)
* Horn and Rotating light continuously activated. Check VDU on operator station for Alarms~Error
messages.
Check fuses for supply to relays. (Fx) K3, K4.
Check function of watchdog-relay. (Kw) LED 7 must
light
To disconnect supply to horn, remove fuse Fx/Fx.
LED on status card dark, after power off for some See Chapter Self Check System Check Main CPU/IUC.
months.
Page 42
User's Manual 3yy UMAS V Alarm System
PERIPHERAL PANELSIDEAD MAN SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
jymptom Action
Check buzzer.
Check cabling between UN900 and panel.
L C A P L C continuously switch on panel Order a new panel.
1 No response from ECRiBridgelCabin panels.

Y/I Check error led not light.
Check fuses to panel.
Restart panel(sj (Power ofvon).
( Restart SCPU UN900
Check UN900 CXM-PFB12 card, tkltx light black.
Remove profibus cable. If lighting now, profibus cables
short-circuit.
Page 43
User's Manual 2 60 UMAS VAlarm System
8 MAINTENANCE
This section covers check lists for regular use on board in order to obtain propper function of
UMAS V Alarm System. According to given test procedure, maintenance and periodical testing
are to be carried out and recorded. The intension of systematic maintenance and function testing
is to show in detail how components and systems are to be tested and what is to be observed
during tests. Columns showing test dates and verification of tests carried out are included.
Page 44
User's Manual 26' UMAS VAlarm Systertz
Check List for Weekly Scheduled Maintenance

hipping Company :
hip Name :
:hecklist No.:
lame of Engineer :
bate :
Question Yes No
Are buzzers and alarm panels distributed in operational condition? 0 a
Action taken Completed
DateISignature
Procedure
An alarm status can be initiated with a test signal connected to a selected input channel, or from
YO-Overview picture on ECR operator station.
Alarm Buzzers
Check that the alarm status activates buzzers on bridge, ECR and the cabin room panel on duty,
Alarm buzzers in mess room panel and other living room panels should also be activated.
Check that buzzer reset on the cabin room panel on duty will cause buzzer reset in mess room
panel (or other mess room panels).
Check the ECR-buzzer. This must be reset separately. Check that alarm acknowledges on ECR
panel will cause buzzer reset on all other panels.
Alarm Lamps /Panel Indication

Check on alarm panels that unacknowledged alarms are indicated with blinking LED on
functiodcontrol key for acknowledge F6 and that corresponding alarm group text are indicated on
LCD display.
Buzzers and LCD indication is always activated in ECR panel, but also on bridge panel if system is
in unattended machinery space control.
Observe that the cabin room and mess room panels presents alarms, dependent of watch condition.
Page 45
User's Manual 26 2- UMAS V Alarm System
Check List for Weekly Scheduled Maintenance

Question Yes No
Has a visual inspection found the alarm system condition satisfactory'? 0 0
DateISignature
Procedure
The frequency of filter replacement should be determined individually, depending on dust
accumulation and operating period.
Note: Filter replacement must be carried out in good time. A soiled filter mat will cause the
temperature to rise inside the enclosure!
The filter mat can be regenerated by washing or blowing out.
Pagc 46
Check List for Monthly Scheduled Maintenance

;hipping Company :
;hip Name :
:hecklist No.:
(ame of Engineer :
)ate :
Question Yes No
Has a close-up inspection of the alarm system, preferably within reach of hand,
been carried out to a sufficient extent without visible deficiencies?
a a
DatelSignature
Procedure
A visual inspection of all equipment is to be carried out. If necessary, clean and dry by use o f a
vacuum cleaner and a rag. Check the alarm cabinet UN900 inside and outside for corrosion /
cleaning (humidity, dirt etc.) on electrical and electronic devices.
Question Yes No
Has the alarm cabinet UN900 correct electric power supply? a 0
DateISignature
Procedure
The alarm system is continuously powered and has an automatic changeover to a 24V D C stand-
by power supply in case of loss of normal 230V AC power supply. Check that the system is fully
operative and that both the 230V AC and the 24V DC supply are connected.
Use a multimeter and check correct voltage on 24V DC to IUC (CPU-card). Low or missing 24V
DC, will cause full or partly stop in CPU. Both abnormal conditions will be detected by the watch
dog relay and activate siren and rotating light (PowerICPU Failure). Perform an earth failure test
by measuring the voltage betwecn each pole and earth. Check that the voltage is floating.
Page 47
Check List for Monthly Scheduled Maintenance

Question Yes No
Have the function of fan unit on cabinet door UN900 been inspected and 0 Ll
found in order?

DateISignature
Procedure
Enclosure thermostat S1 is used to control the temperature inside cabinet UN900. When the
temperature inside cabinet exceeds the limit sat on thermostat, the fan starts and the cabinet is
cooled via the infeed of filtered external air and the dissipation of heated internal air.
Check the fan function by adjusting the thermostat limit to room temperature, and see that the fan
unit on cabinet door starts.
An equivalent thermostat S2 is used to monitor the temperature inside cabinet UN900. When the
temperature inside cabinet exceeds the limit sat on thermostat; an internal watch alarm is activated
on the alarm system.
Check the internal watch alarm function of cabinet temperature by adjusting the thermostat limit to
room temperature, and observe that an alarm is given.
-
dep.: Automation Lonqva
User's Manual 20- UMAS VAlarnt System
Check List for Every 3rdMonth

Scheduled Maintenance
hipping Company :
hip Name :
:hecklist No.:
Jame of Engineer :
)ate :
$0. Question Yes No

1 Safety in general: D O
Are electric cable arrangements properly installed and insulated, no loose wiring?

DateISignature
Procedure
Check whether all cable and wire connections are still firmly connected.
Vo. Question Yes No

u Are the Internal Voltage Watch Alarm part of the alarm system
in operational condition?

DatelSi,onature
Procedure
The alarm system is continuously monitoring all power supplies connected. Absence of power
supply will be detected and alarm activated. Check voltage alarms by simulating power failures.
Error messages are presented on the operator station screen in the Alarm Summary display, but can
also be monitored by means of selecting alarm display group no. 16 - System Failure.
230V AC (Supplv 1 Primary)

Simulate fault on 230V AC to cabinet UN900 by removing fuse F8 I
Error message:
"Internal Watch of 230V AC Supply UN900"
Pagc 49
User's Manual UMAS V Alarm System

24V DC (Supply 2 Secondary)
Simulate fault on 24V DC to cabinet UN900 by removing fuse F82
Error message:
"Internal Watch of 24V DC Supply UN900"
Supply to Power Distribution Unit (PDU) UN960

Power Distribution Unit UN960 consists of a Mastervolt inverter and Filax voltage switch. Both
230V AC mains supply from emergency circuit and 24V DC supply from the ships batteries are
connected to PDU to insure distribution of unintermpted power to operator station in ECR. The
operator station is normally supplied from mains power supply through PDU. But in case of loss of
mains power supply, the voltage switch will automatically switch to inverter, which is online
connection to supply from batteries.
Unless both supplies to PDU are simultaneously missing, the operator station will have no
reduction of system performance. The PDU has internal watch of both 230V AC mains supply and
24V D C supply. Check inverter function by disconnecting 230V AC to UN960.
Error message:
"ECR Power Fail 230V AC UN960"
Reconnect 230V AC and simulate inverter faultlmissing 24V DC to UN960 by switching off
inverter unit.
Error message:
"ECR Power Fail 24V D C UN960"
Supplv to Power Distribution Unit (PDU) UN961

Power Distribution Unit UN961 consists of unintemptable power sources (IPS) supplied with
230V AC from emergency circuit. The purpose of the UPS'S are through additional AC/DC
powers to provide continuous 24V DC supply to UMAS V systems during black-out period of
230V AC from emergency circuit. Simulate voltage watch alarm UN961 by disconnecting the
230V AC supply. Use a multimeter and check that 24V DC is still distributed to prevent reduction
of system performance.
Error message:
" Internal Watch of 230V AC Supply UN961"
A thermostat S2 is used to monitor the temperature inside cabinet UN961. When the
temperature inside cabinet exceeds the limit sat on thermostat; an internal watch alarm is activated
on the alarm system. Check the internal watch alarm function of cabinet temperaturc by adjusting
the thermostat limit to room temperature, and observe that an alarm is given.
EI-1.01-message:
"Internal Watch of Cabinet Temperature UN961"
- - ~
-
Pagc 50
User's Mnnml 2 e UMAS V Alarm System

24V DC Supply to Peripheral Panels
Simulate fault on peripheral panel supply by removing fuse F3 inside cabinet UN900.The
consequence will be that ECR and cabin panels are not operative. Bridge panels will automatically
be connected to backup supply to maintain operability.
Error message:
"Internal W a t c h of 24V D C Peripheral Panels"
24V DC Backup Supply to Peripheral Panels on Bridge

Means are done to monitor loss of backup supply to peripheral panels on bridge. Simulate fault by
disconnecting 24V DC supply from terminal list UN923.1.
Error message:
"Internal W a t c h of 24V DC UN923.1"
Supply to Operator Stations

The consequence at loss of supply to an operator station is that connected UPS will supply output
power in some limited time period (minimum 30 minutes) to prevent reduction of system
performance. Simulate fault on supply to an operator station by disconnecting its 230V AC supply
to the UPS.
Error message:
"Internal W a t c h of Supply to n", n: UN911..UN915
Yo. Question Yes No

9 Have functional testing of critical alarms been carried out and found in order?

DateISignature
Procedure
Critical alarms are defined as low lubricating oil pressure alarms for rotating machinery and water .
levels in boilers. Set them in alarm condition and observe that corresponding alarm point releases
alarm on operator stations and peripheral panels. Check also that outputs for rotating light and
horn are activated.
Alarms activated by failure in propulsion and steering systems should also be taken into
consideration when testing critical alarms.
User's Manual 2ds UMAS VAlarm System
I/O System ......................................................... 3 1, 32

Input ............................................................ 18, 30, 34
IUC .................................................. 17, 32, 36, 38, 39
ABO 17
K
Adju ......................... .. ................................ 18
Alarm Summary ....................................................... 15 Keyboard ................................................................. 13
Analog ....................................................... 18. 32. 34
ASCII ....................................................................... 39
Average . 19 Modbus .............................................................. 30. 34
B P
Blocking ...................................................................32 Panels ................................................................2 1.4 3
Buzzer ................................................................
26. 43 Password .................................................................. 17
C Printer ................................................................
20. 41
PtlOO .................................................................30. 34
. .
Cahbratlons .............................................................. 30
Call ...........................................................................
27 R
Channel ....................................................................32 Reset ........................................................................26
...
CHECK ....................................................................38 Respons~b~l~ty ..........................................................26
CONFIGURATIONS ...............................................35
CP 32, 38, 42
SCPU .....................................................32, 35, 41, 43
Siox ....................................................................32, 34
Siren ........................................................................
39
STATUS .................................................................. 38
Delete .......................................................................3 1 System Config .............................................17, 35, 37
. .
Devlatlon ..................................................................I9
Digital ..........................................................18, 3 1, 34 T
E Thermoelement ........................................................ 30
Transfer .......................................................26. 36. 37
ECR ..................................... 13. 21. 25. 26. 27. 41. 43 TREND ....................................................................
16
Ethernet ....................................................................
38
Event Log ..............................................................16
UMAS V ...................................... 4. 30. 32. 34. 39. 40
FILES .......................................................................
35
FTP ..........................................................................
39 VDU .......................................... 12.26.35.38.41. 42
G Version ................................................................... 17
W
Generate ................................................................... 36
Graphic .....................................................................35 Watch-Dog ........................................................ 38, 39
.
dep . Automation .Longva
Page 52
RolIs-Royce
mml
User's Manual ""' UMAS v ~ u r n &
p valve ~ v n t r o l ~ y r t e r n
Pump & Valve Control System
USER'S MANUAL
Aukra Industrier AS
Yard No. 110
Date Issued Status Rev.

18.02.2003 BKM First Issue 0.0
(7 126PVOM.doc) page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS................................................................................................................. 2
I UMAS V P & V DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................. 4
2 OPERA TION ..................................................................................................................................5
3 SYSTEM COMPOSITION............................................................................................................. 6
. 3.1 TOP MENU .......................................................................................................................................... 6
- 3.2MAINMENU ....................................................................................................................................... 8
4 VALVE OPERA TION ................................................................................................................... 10
- 4.1VALVETYPES. ................................................................................................................................. 10
- 4.2 P R E W M G CONDITIONS - VALVES ..................................................................................... 10
- 4.3 MOTOR CONTROLLED VALVE - BHS ......................................................................................... 11
- 4.4 REMOTE ............................................................................................................................................ 11
5 PUMPS .......................................................................................................................................... I 2
. 5.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 12
. 5.2 ELECTRIC ONE SPEED PUMPS ..................................................................................................... 12
. 5.3 ELECTRIC TWO SPEED PUMPS .................................................................................................... 12
6 TIME REGISTRA TION...............................................................................................................13
7 TANKSOUNDING SYSTEM (DSF)............................................................................................I 4
. 7.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 1 4
. 7.2 REMOTE SOUNDING ..................................................................................................................... 14
. 7.3 TANK SYMBOLS .............................................................................................................................. 15
. 7.4 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................ 15
. 7.5TANKOVERVIEWWINDOW ......................................................................................................... 16
- 7.6 TANK INPUT ..................................................................................................................................... 17
8 DSF MENU (Tanholmding Menu) ............................................................................................ I 8
- 8.1 BACK TO SOUND ............................................................................................................................ 18
- 8.2 DENSITY MANIAUTO ..................................................................................................................... 18
- 8.3 REMOTE ............................................................................................................................................
18
- 8.4 REMOTE ACTIVATE ....................................................................................................................... 19
- 8.5 REMOTE ACTIVATE ONIOFF ........................................................................................................ 19
- 8.6 BUZZER ON /OFF ......................................L O
. 8.7 TOTAL ...............................................................................................................................................
20
1Rolls-Royce
mm3
User's Manual 2?I UMAS VPump & Valve Confro1System
9 BHS .BULK HANDLING SYSTEM ..........................................................................................

21
. 9 . 1 T A K S ............................................................................................................................................... 21
. 9.2 COMPRESSORS ................................................................................................................................ 21
. 9.3 C O m O L L I N G THE: COMPRESSORS .......................................................................................... 22
. 9.4 PREWARNING .................................................................................................................................. 22
10 ECONOMYMETER ...................................................................................................................23
. 10.1 INPUT SIGNALS ............................................................................................................................. 23
. 10.2 CALCULATION .............................................................................................................................. 23
. 10.3 MEASUREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 24
. 10.4 SETTING UP THE ECONOMYMETER ............................................................................ .: .......... 24
11 ROLL INDICATOR .................................................................................................................... 25
12 CARGO /STORA GE SYSTEM .................................................................................................26
13 PRE WARNING SYSTEM - P& V Prewarning ........................................................................27
14 PRINTER ....................................................................................................................................28
15 CONFIGURATION .P& V Config ............................................................................................29
. 15.1 TANK GROUP ................................................................................................................................. 29
. 15.2 TANKS ............................................................................................................................................. 29
. 15.3TANKNAME................................................................................................................................... 30
. 15.4TANKGROUP ................................................................................................................................. 30
. 15.5 PRINTOUT LABEL ......................................................................................................................... 30
. 15.6 NUMBER OF TANKS ..................................................................................................................... 30
. 15.7 FLANGE NAMES / VALVE NAMES ............................................................................................ 30
. 15.8 VALVE ALARM DELAY TILE .................................................................................................... 30
. 15.9 FILES ................................................................................................................................................ 30
16 EMERGENCY VALYE OPERA TION...................................................................................... 31
User's Manual
1 UMAS V P & V DESCRIPTION

23 % .A .
, a ., hml swm
UMAS V P & V is a system for operating pumps and valves from one or several workstations. This
system presents a graphic display of tank information, and has a reporting system that gives
warnings in case of system errors.
1 workstation consists of:

-Colour monitors
-Keyboard
-Pointing device (mouse/trackball)
-Buzzer ( acoustic warning)
Each workstation is connected to a computer. If there is more than 1 computer, the computers
communicate on a Computer-Ethernet network. The computers communicate with a common
control cabinet on a four-conductor (cord) serial communication.
In the control cabinet, UN 940 there are electronics controlling digital and analogue in- and
outputs.
The communication between the workstations and the PLC is monitored. In case of malhnction a
red warning will appear at the top off the screen (flashing):
Com. Error Pump & Valve (UN940) : Error on communication to P&V Control Cabinet,
UN 940.
P&V Prewarning : Prewarning in P&V Control System, Click on the red
flashing P&V Prewarning - button to check failure
list.
Valve Emerg. Operate : Indicates that Emergency Valve Operation has been
chosen from P&V Control Cabinet.
In order to access tank data, the UMAS P&V is connected to the Tanksounding Cabinet UN980.
This communication works by serial connection.
User's Manual 265 UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
2 OPERATION
The man-machine interface (MMI) is controlled by a computer running on the operating system
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. The workstation operation is based on a pointing device (a mouse or a
trackball). The mouse controls a pointer on the screen. Sliding the mouse over any surface in the
direction moves the pointer is to move. The following lines describes the basics mouse techniques
used with Windows applications:
Point
Move the mouse until the tip of the pointer rests on the wanted item.
Click
Press and release the left button without moving the mouse.
Double-click
Click on the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Right-Click
Press and release the right button without moving the mouse.
Press
Press and hold down the mouse button.
Drag
Press and hold down the mouse button, then move the mouse pointer.
Release button when the drag operation is finished.
If several screens are applied at the same computer, moving the mouse can move the pointer from
screen to screen. The keyboard is for input of numbers and letters.
(Keyboard operation is the same as for Microsoft Windows.)
Operating the UMAS V P&V system is based on several windows, one for each system.
One particular window is always on the screen, "TopMenu". TopMenu is placed at top of the
screen and contains the most urgent information.
For buttons and input-fields, a white quadrant will appear around them. To activate the command,
click.
User's Manual % & UMAS YPump dr Valve ControI System
3 SYSTEM COMPOSITION
3.1 TOP MENU

The top menu will always be visible. This menu displays the most urgent information
--
I
Acknowledge button
Duty 1 Responsibility
im Date / Time
Alarm groups
Buttons used for choosing desired alarm group.
Recent Alarms 1 Ack Button
All alarms will be displayed in these fields. The alarms can be scrolled up and down with the
scroll buttons. Alarms can be acknowledged with the "Ack" button.
Responsibility
Who currently is having the responsibility for watch over the alarm system.
Duty
Where the alarm system is monitored.
Inhibited Alarms
Displays the number of alarms that is inhibited.
DateITime Field
Displays the date and time.
Stability
Key information about stability
Pump Status
Displayed as green when any pump/compressor is running. Press symbol to enter the
"Pumps Overview" window.
Passwords
Press this button to enter the operation password. There are two levels of access to the UMAS
system. Each level has its own password.
Buzzer symbol
Visible when the buzzer is active.
User
1. Status - Tanksounding Unit UN 980.

This field displays information about the tanksounding unit (UN 980). The tanksounding
unit can operate in two modes: SOUND or REMOTE. There is also a sign to inform that the
communication between the tanksounding unit and the PLC is broken down (COM), and an
error sign (Error).
2. Pump & Valve Fail - P&V Prewarning button

If there are any unacknowledged failures (Pre-Warnings) in the Pump & Valve system, this
button will blink red. The button will remain red as long as there are any failures in the
Pump & Valve system. In normal mode (no failures or all failures acknowledged) the button
will be grey. If this button is clicked there will be shown a list over the failures present in the
system. In case of no failures the list will be empty.
3. Trim Status
The "Trim Status" field shows the trim angle of the vessel and how this value is measured.
4. Roll AnglelList
The Roll Anglekist field shows the list of the vessel.
User's Manual
2F d UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
3.2 MAIN MENU
Menu Button:
The MENU button in the lower right comer of the top menu opens the main menu.
The different process se-gnents are to be selected from this menu.
Example: By clicking "WBDW Cargo", a controllable window of the W B D W system will appear
on the screen. The W B D W window will display thc pipelincs with valves and pumps indicated, as
well as a dynamic bargraph, and numbers indicating the volume percentage and maximum volume
for each tank. Valves and pumps can bc opcrated using the pointing device. To view another
window, simply sclcct thc main rncnu again and thcn choosc the window by clicking its button.
When the system starts running, an ovcrvicw window will appcar on thc screen in addition to the
top menu. This window does not contain any dynamic "tags", which mcans it is not using any
User's Manual UMAS V Pump k Valve Control S w m
capacity of the computer CPU for updating. For smoother CPU performance when the workstation
is not operated, select the overview window by clicking the UMAS logo in the lower right comer of
the main menu.
User's Manual 2'c‘t9 UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
4 VALVE OPERATION
The valves will be displayed on the screen with following status:
White = Closed
Blinking white = Changing from closed to open
Green = Open
Blinking green = Changing from open to closed
Blinking red = Alarm condition
To operate a valve, point at the valve and click. The valve will go to the opposite position.
4.1 VALVE TYPES:
1. Single coil valves:
Voltage out = open

No Voltage = closed
2. Dual coil valves:
This valve has two different outputs, one for open and one for close. The coil voltage is latched.
The difference: loss of power will cause valves with one coil to return to the closed position, while
two-coiled valves will remain in the same position as before.
4.2 PRE WARNING CONDITIONS - VALYES
Prewamings will be displayed in the P&V Prewaming List as a result of the following conditions:
1 - Feedback is "open" while the command is "close".

2 - Feedback is "closed" while the command is "open"
3 - No feedback
4 - The feedback is both "open" and "closed".
The valve flashes red to indicate the alarm condition.
The alarm signal is delayed, in order to give the valve enough time to change position before the
alarm is set. The delay time for valve prewarning is adjustable from the P&V Config window.
page 10
User's Manual UMAS V P u m p & Valve Control System
4.3 MOTOR CONTROLLED VALYE - BHS
Motor controlled valves are operated by pressing down the buttons labelled "+" or "-". This will
make the motor run, and the valve will blink during operation. Feedback from the valve is
displayed on the screen as 0-loo%, where 100% equals valve fully open. Valves with feedback
switches for openlclosed, displays this with colours:
green = open
white = closed
yellow = mid possision
4.4 REMOTE
When the user opens a valve connected to a tank, UMAS P&V will order the tanksounding unit to
sound this tank. The tanksounding unit will go to REMOTE mode (This function may be disabled).
page II
User's Manual !2gb UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
5 PUMPS
5.1 GENERAL
PUMP SYMBOL COLOUR

On the screen:
Pump stopped = WHITE

Pump running = GREEN
Pump standby = YELLOW
5.2 ELECTRIC ONE SPEED PUMPS

Click on the Pump symbol, a pop-up window will
appear on the screen. From this window Start and
Stop can be activated.
5.3 ELECTRIC TWO SPEED PUMPS

Click on the pump symbol, a pop-up will appear on
the screen. From this Start-Low, Start-High and
Stop can be activated.
5.4 PUMPS - PRESSURE /SUCTION
The pressure from the pump is registered and presented

on the screen as a green dynamic bargraph on black
background. Maximum pressure is displayed as a full
column, and the analogue value is displayed above the
column. The pressure graph starts at minimuddown 0
-
bar - maxlup 16 bar (40 bar for Mud-pumps). The
suction from the pump is registered and presented on
-
I Suct~on
the screen as a greenlcyan dynamic bargraph on black

background. Pressure is green, and suction is cyan.
Analogue value is displayed above the column.
Analogue input signals below aprox. 3mA will givc an prcwarning in thc P & V Prewaming list.
(7 126PVOM.doc) pagc 12
User's Manual Lg 1 UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
6 TIME REGISTRATION
When equipment controlled by UMAS is running (signal on the RUN input), the UMAS P&V
register the time. The number of hours this equipment has been running will be displayed in the
Pumps Overview window.
7 F r e s M a l e r Pump
8 Elecsir Agilalor t
9 ElecblcAgilalor2
10 Elecmc Agilalor 3
11 Elecmc Agitator 4
12 BHS Compressor 1
13 BHS Compressor 2
15 AC-UnitAccamadauonAC-1
16 AC.UnilEngine Control Room AC-1
17 SupphFan Englne Room $2 R w
18 SupptjFan Engine Room S 3
19 BowThrusler
20 CompassThruster
21 slem Thruster
22 Sewn 011 Pump Slemmrusler
23 S b Sen0 LO pump port Main Gear
24 Seating Gear Pump 1
25 Seating Gear Pump 2
26 Searing Gear Pump 3
27 SearinoGear Pump 4
28 HoiWalerBoiler
By pressing the Print-button in the top menu, the running hours will be printed.
Running hours can be adjusted from the Pumps Overview window by clicking on the hours for the
desired pump and enter the new value (In order to do this, password must be entered).
The running hours can be written to a file on the computer by pressing the "Save to C:"-button as
shown in the illustration. The file can be read by pressing "Load from C:"- button, and the
running hours will be updated with the file values. This should be done if the PLC is reset,
changing eprom etc.
User's Manual 26'2- UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
7 TANKSOUNDING SYSTEM @SF)
7.1 GENERAL
During normal operations the tanksounding unit will be in SOUND. All tanks will be sounded in
sequence. After the tanksounding unit has completed sounding a tank it will send the following
information about the tank to the UMAS P&V:
- tank number
- system status
- measure status
- level
- density
- volume
- maxvolume
- trim
The UMAS P&V will receive this information and immediately update the mimic and numerical
values in the windows.
7.2 REMOTE SOUNDING

When opening a valve connected to a tank, UMAS P&V will immediately order the tanksounding
unit to sound this tank. The tanksounding unit will switch to REMOTE mode (command) and
sound just this tank. If a tank has more than one valve connected, opening any of these valves will
cause the tanksounding unit to switch to REMOTE status.
When opening several valves at the same time, the tanks connected to these valves will be sounded
in sequence. If the valves are closed, the tanks will be omitted fiom the remote command. This is to
ensure that only tanks that are currently loadedlunloaded are updated, which makes a more rapid
updating possible.
The tanksounding unit will always go to remote mode when
valves belonging to tanks are opened. The exception is if the
-DSF-COMMANDS
BACK TO
SOUND 0 I command "Remote Activate" is switched to OFF. The top
menu present the Tanksounding status @SF-Status):
Tanksounding: - Sound
DENSITY 0 M a n 0 Auto
REMOTE
- Remote
ACTIVATE 0Off @ o n - Com.
- Error
BUZZER @Off OOn
I
To cancel REMOTE mode, click on the DSF-Status field at
MAN-TRIM-VALUE: 1 0:OO 1 I the top menu, and press "Back To Sound" from the
DSF-input window.
page 14
User's Manual 233 UMAS V P u m p & Valve Control System
7.3 TANK SYMBOLS
1. Valve
The valve controls the tanksounding system to go to remote or to sound. If any valve that is
connected to a tank opens, the tanksounding system goes into remote status.
2. TankName
The name of the tank, in accordance with the system drawings of the vessel.
3. Max Volume
Max Volume displays the maximum volume that this particular tank can hold.
4. Actual Volume
The actual volume field displays the volume of
fluid in this tank. I 2. Tank Name
I
5. Percent Vol.
The percent level field displays the volume in
1 3. Max Volume I
percentage of maximum volume.
6. Percent bar
The Percent Bar graphically displays the percent
level. When the bar is all green the tank is full.
u
1 I
5. Percent Vol.
6 Percent Bar
When the tank is empty, only the black
background is shown. If the tank alarm is set due
to high or low level, the colour of the bar will
1-
change to red.
7. Densitv
The density field displays the density of the fluid in the tank. In the left side of the density field,
there is a letter showing how the density is measured. There are two ways of measuring this
value. The system can compute the value or the user can enter the value. If the tank alarm is set
due to high or low density, the numbers in this field will change colour to red.
7.4 CONFIGURATION
The user can configure the tank properties by clicking the tank symbol (Password must be entered).
This will display a pop-up window with alarm limits for percentage and density. Clicking the
displayed numbers will open a pop-up window where new values can be entered. There are also
buttons for enabling 1 disabling these alarms.
page 15
User's Manual 2g8- UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
7.5 TANK OVERHEW WINDOW
In the "Tank Overview" window all sounded tanks are

displayed with a tank level symbol.
1. TankName
The name of the tank
2. High Level Limit

Slider for the high level value. This slider can be
dragged up or down for changing the high alarm value 1 6. Percent Bar
for this tank. This is not a very accurate way to adjust
this value. On the slider there are shown
a number that displays the current limit.
I 7. Low Level Limit
8. Density /
3. Tank Number
The number of the tank, in accordance with the tank list.
4. TankGroup
The tank group this tank is member of.
5. Tank Volume
The Tank Volume.
6. Percent Bar
Displays the percentage volume graphically.
7. Low Level Limit

Slider for the low-level value. Functionality as for the High Level Limit slider.
8. Density
The density of the fluid in the tank.
page 16
User's Man~ral 2g-S UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
7.6 TANK INPUT

Clicking a tank will make a pop-up window appear (Tank Input). From the pop-up the following
adjustments can be done (this is only possible if correct password is entered):
r ALARM-LIMITS [dl 1
- Alarm limits
- EnableIDisable alarm
- Update man.density
page 17
User's Manual UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
8 DSF MENU (Tanksounding Menu)

Click the Tanksounding-Menu field in the TOP-MENU, and a pop-up for Tanksounding-
commands (DSF-input) will appear. Following commands can be operated:
- Back to Sound
- Density MadAuto
- Remote Activate OdOff
- Buzzer OdOff
- Man. Trim Value
8.1 BACK TO SOUND

Clicking on "Back To Sound" orders the tanksounding unit to go to SOUND mode. That means
sequential sounding of all tanks, and termination of the REMOTE command. Opening a valve after
"SOUND" command activates remote command for all open valves into tanks.
8.2 DENSITY MAN/A UTO

Use this command for changing between man / auto density. The tanksounding unit will measure
the density for tanks that supports auto density. If the tanksounding unit is calculating density
automatic, an A (Auto) will appear before density value in tank symbols. Otherwise an M
(Manual density) will be displayed.
8.3 REMOTE
A window called "Remote" displays the status of the tanksounding unit. All tanks are listed in this
window, and those with status REMOTE will be listed in yellow. Activate this window by pressing
"R" on the keyboard or from the button in Monitoring-Menu window (Tank Overview + Menu)
labelled "R". If "Remote Activate" = OFF all tanks can be set to remote mode by clicking on the
desired tank. Click on the tank again to make the tank go back to sound mode.
page 18
User's Manual
28+ UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
1 Forepeak 29 STAB. 2
2 Forepeak 30 STAB. 3
3 DBWISB 31 STAB. 4
4 DBNV IPS 32 SETTL S
6 DBM2PS 34 OVERFL.
7 DBNV3SB 35 SERVI. S
8 DBNV3PS 36
9 DBNV4SB 37
10 DBNV 4PS 38
11 DBMSSB 39
12 DBNVSPS 40
13 DBW6SB 41
14 DBW6PS 42
15 WNG 7SB 43
16 WNG 7PS 44
17 WNG 8SB 45
18 Wng 8PS 46
19 WngTC 47
20 TANK 1SB 48
21 TANK IPS 49
22 TANK 2SB 50
23 TANK 2PS 51
24 TANK 3SB 52
25 TANK 3PS 53
26 TANK 4SB 54
27 TANK 4PS 55
28 STAB. 1 56
8.4 REMOTE ACTIVA TE

When the tanksounding unit is in remote mode (REMOTE ACTIVATE ON)
and it is necessary to update tanks without activating any valve, this can be done
by pressing the button labelled "Remote". The command activates remote mode
for tanks without valves in the selected group e.g. "FO Settling.
. . .
8.5 REMOTE ACTIVATE ON/OFF

Normally when a valve connected to a tank is open, the UMAS V P&V give the tanksounding unit
order to sound just this tank. It is possible to set the remote activating OFF, and the tanksounding
unit will not enter remote mode when a valve is opened.
"RemoteAct" - Off will increase the update time for tank data, and is not recommended. The
tanksounding unit will sound all tanks in scquencc. "RemoteAct" - OFF set the Standby parameter
in the tanksounding unit passive (see Ttanksounding UnitIDSF manual).
For using Standby with the tanksounding unit (see DSF manual) set the "RemoteAct" - ON.
(7126PVOM.doc) page 19
User's Manual 2g8 UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
8.6 BUZZER ON/OFF

This command selects the buzzer connected to the TANK alarm group ON or OFF.
8.7 TOTAL
An overview of the total volume in each group is shown in a window called "Total".
Activate this window by pressing "T" on the keyboard or from the button in "Monitoring-Menu"
window (Tank Overview + Menu) labelled "T".
WBnnnl 281 87 m3
FW 322 04 m3
FO 400.91 m3
BASEOIL 80.78 m3
MUD 159 37 m3
Fo Flow. i
O.O" m3I
page 20
User's Manual
28 r UMAS V Pump & Valve Con!rol System
9 BHS - BULK HANDLING SYSTEM
TANKS 1. Tank Name
Tank Name
The name of the tank.
Pressure 1 3. High Alarm I

Shows the pressure in the BHS tank.
Bargraph and value.
High Alarm
Adjustable high alarm setpoint. Measured
in percent of full tank. n 4. Comments
4. Comment field
Custom comments regarding the tank content.
9.2 COMPRESSORS
1. Compressor Name 1.Compr. Name
The name of the compressor. 2.Pressure Graph
2. Pressure Bargraph
The pressure bar is a visualization of the 4.Compr. Status
compressor pressure.
3. Pressure Value
Compressor pressure in numbers.
4. Compressor Status
The compressor status field shows the state of the compressor. This is indicated with colour and
text.
Function Colour Text

Stopped White Stop
Running Green Run
Standby Yellow Stby (if available)
User's Manual UMAS V Pump & Valve Conhd System
9.3 CONTROLLING THE COMPRESSORS
Compressors are controlled equally to pumps. Click the status field of the compressor to open the
pop-up window.
Standby Mode (if available).

When a compressor is started, it will compress air into its air tanks. When the desired pressure is
reached the compressor stops and enters standby mode. The compressor will remain in standby
mode until the pressure falls below the pressure limit. Then the compressor switches back to run
mode and compresses air into the tanks until the wanted pressure is reached again. The standby
hnction is h l l y controlled by the compressor starter and therefore not accessible from the screen.
Yet, the starter gives feedback to the P&V Control system for monitoring when it has entered
standby mode.
9.4 PRE WARNING
By use of level alarms an acoustic warning can be activated if selected.

Status is displayed as Buzzer: ONIOFF
On the screen, when a tank is in alarm condition, the bar will change to red.
After acknowledging of the alarm, the buzzer will be reset.
page 22
User's Manual 2c11 UMAS V P u m p & Valve Control System
10 ECONOMYMETER
...
... ....,
- .- - ......
?
.. . i
i
.......
...
. . ..... .*---- .--- -- "--.--'
.Speed
10:15:00
. Fuel Cons.
1k21
; , 3'. ,
. : , m . .:.' . :.,
The economyrneter monitors information of economic importance based on several signals

received from the automation system.
IO.1 INPUT SIGNALS

The input signals to the economymeter are each engines fuel-rack position, which is used to
calculate the order, flowmeter input for each engine, which is used to monitor consumption, and
input from the speed log, which is used to calculate the speed and the distance travelled.
10.2 CALCULA TION

The economymeter use the input signals to calculate current readings as fuel consumption for each
engine, total consumption for both engines, the spced of the vessel, consumption/hour, and
consumption 1 n.milc. Calculated values givc a good indication of cconornic values, but be aware
that they are slightly incorrect.
page 23
User's Manual UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
10.3 MEASUREMENTS
The economymeter is equipped with two separate, but identical measurement fields, named Trip
and Accumulated. These fields contain information about measured he1 consumption for each
engine and total for both engines, travelled distance, average consumption / hour and n.mile. Each
field can be separately reset by pressing the Reset button. You will get a warning and a possibility
to cancel the reset if desired. The Trip field is meant to be used as a counter for each trip, while the
Accumulated field is meant to be used as a long-time counter.
10.4 SETTING UP THE ECONOMYMETER
By pressing the Setup button, you will enter the economyrneter setup menu. From this menu you
can set the following parameters:
Max Speed: Calibration of the maximum speed of the vessel. This information is used to control
the speed graphs 100 % value. You can set the maximum speed in to ways:
1: Point the cursor at the value in the display, and click the left mouse button. You can now
enter the new maximum speed.
2: Run the vessel at maximum speed for about 5 minutes. Then point at the "Max-Speed"
button and click the mouse. The calculated current speed will now be used as max speed.
Max Fuel Consum~tion: Calibration of the maximum fuel consumption of the vessel. You can
do this in two ways:
1: Point the cursor at the value in the display, and click the left mouse button. You can now
enter the new value.
2: Run the vessel at maximum fuel consumption for about 5 minutes. Then point at the
"Max-Cons." button and click the mouse. The calculated current consumption will now be
used as maximum consumption
page 24
User's Manual Icf 3 UMAS V P u m p L Valve Control System
11 ROLL INDICATOR
, , . ,
" ' L o I Perlod I

Stability
M a r bs:PS
A w a a e zrne
0.0
an s i
'i
I
The Roll Indicator window presents the vessels rollangle and rolltime.
- Rollangle = List in degrees

- Rolltime = Time from max rollangle at port side, to max rollangle at starboard and back to port.
- Average timetangle is the average of 8 roll periods
In addition to this, the sounding of the stab tanks and a graph (missing in the example) presenting
the recommended level in the stab tanks are shown in this window. The basis for this calculation is
the average rolltime.
A short User's Guide is also available by pressing the button labelled Users Guide.
page 25
User's Manual
2-q4- UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
12 CARGO / STORAGE SYSTEM.
Cargo I Storage Tank Measuring Report.
Group Sum
.I-
Setp.1 Setp2
WBiDW
--
FW a 1
'
FO
BASEOIL = I
MUD = 1
BRINE = I
= !
3 r - ?
.A. .&
Flowmeter Fuel Oll L
Flow-meter Freshwater L
This may be used during loadinglunloading to register the amount of fluid cargo loadedfunloaded.
It is also possible to set alarm limits for each group. The alarm limits is measured in cubic metres
and can be enabledfdisabled.
SETP. 1 (setpoint no.1) : Click on SETP.l, UMAS Pump & Valve Control will then register
the volume in each group and present the result on the screen. At the
same time SETP.2 and Sum will be reset. (Clicking on Setp.1 behind
each group will read and reset only for the desired group).
After loadinglunloading, select the group to be calculated (FW, Ballast, FO, HFO, etc.)
by clicking on SETP. 2 behind the desired group.
Press "PRINT" to receive a printed documentation of the "CARGO SYSTEM

MEASURING REPORT".
Select and print can be donc scveral times, and it will rcfer to Setp. 1 until Setp. 1 is selected again.
A report for all tanks in thc systcm can bc printed from the Tk.Lcvc1 window.
(71 2GPVOM.doc) page 26

User's Manrrol UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
13 PREWARNING SYSTEM - P&V Prewarning
~nnt i Pump &Valve PreWarning
In the top menu P&V Prewarning is shown as a rectangle (red flashing in case of prewarnings).
Click the rectangle and the prewaming list above will appear on the screen. The prewarning list can
also be activated from the main menu, P&V Prewarnings.
Ack List will acknowledge all failures in the PreWarning List.
Ack List
Ack Selected will acknowledge the selected prewarning.
Colour overview for message texts in Prewaming-list:
RED - Prewarning condition, unacknowledged

u A c k Selected
GREY - Prewarning condition, acknowledged.

BLUE - Prewarning restored but not acknowledged.
Prcwarning messages will not disappear until the error status is gone and the error is acknowledged.
(7 12hPVOM.doc) page 27
User's Manual 2~6". UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
14 PRINTER
The colour printers are usually connected to computer 1 (PC1) in the control room.
(Printers can also be connected to PC2, PC3 etc).
Alarm printer:
The OKI 280 prints alarm events. This printer is only connected to PC1 on LPT2.
User's Manual
ma- UMAS V Pump & Valve Control System
15 CONFIGURATION - P&V Config
By pressing the P&V Config button in the main menu, you will activate the P&V Configuration
window.
The P&V Config window presents information about:

- TankGroup
- Tanks
- Flanges
- Several input for configuration the MMI- application.
15.1 TANK GROUP

10 Tank groups are displayed and the names can be changed. Change name by clicking on the
desired group and a pop-up window will appear. Click on "Group name" and the new group name
can be written (max. 8 letters).
15.2 TANKS
Each tank is presented with Name, TK.Namc and Groupplacement. The number left to the Name is
the "Channel no." in the tanksounding unit. Changes can be done to the desired tank by clicking on
it.
User's Manual
15.3 TANKNAME
' UMAS Y Pump & Valve Control System
New tank name can be written (max 8 letters)
15.4 TANK GROUP

Click on the desired group. Reset = No group
15.5 PRINTOUT LABEL

The name of the vessel and the shipping companys name and address can be edited from the
"P&V Config" window. This information will show at the printouts.
15.6 NUMBER OF TANKS

MaxTanks is the number of tanks the tanksounding unit is sounding. If the number is wrong the
group window will be incorrect.
15.7 FLANGE NAMES / VAL W NAMES
Flange Name onloff: Toggle flangenames visibility in system windows.
Valve Name onloff: Toggle valvenames visibility in system windows.
The parameters for Flange- and Valvenames are common for all computers in the system.
15.8 VALVE ALARM DELAY TIME

This parameter sets the time from valve error until prewaming condition. This is an approximate
value in seconds, depending on the cycle time of the PLC. The time must be set longer than the
valve action time (fiom open to closed position or opposite).
15.9 FILES
For savingAoading Tk.Names, Tk.Nr and Tk.Group

Configuration, click on "Files". The configuration data can
be saved to a file or read from a file on the computer.
Group Config will be reset when changing Eprom on the
PLC. The files will be stored on C:\ and named Name.txt,
TkName.txt and Gr.txt.
User's Manual
2 37 UMAS VPump & Valve Control System
16 EMERGENCY VALVE OPERATION

In case of PLC malfunction the PLC outputs can be diverted to the emergency switches in the
control cabinet. This is done by turning the emergency switch (key) to on. If the emergency control
switch is turned ON during normal operation, the user will be informed in the P&V prewaming
system. The emergency operation cards are placed in a 19" rack in the control cabinet. Each switch
is labelled with its valve number, and refers to the mimic drawings. Each valve has an indicator
(LED) showing if it is open (green) or closed (red).
CAUTION!
Single coil valves will switch to the position according to the switches in the panel when the
emergency key is turned. Activating the emergency control without being sure of the position
of the valves 1 switches may cause danger.
page 3 1
mm3
Rolls-Royce
Service Manual UMAS VPrimp & Valve Control
I Open
Document class:
Document number: 1
Title:
UMAS V PUMP & VALVE: CONTROL SERVICE MANUAL.
Summary:
Date Issued by Checked Approved Status Rev.

23/04/98 AA First issue.
18/12/98 AR Change some text 01
Page 1 of 9
Rolls-Royce
Service Manual UMAS VPump & Valve Control
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hardware ........................................................................................................................................................... 3
Software ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
WV-Logger ........................................................................................................................................ 3
Move applikation to backup directory ................................................................................................ 3
Backup Streamer ................................................................................................................................. 4
UMAS V P & V Restore Pros. Seagate Tape Store 3.2 GB (TR-3) streamer .................................... 4
Windows NT 4.0 Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Daterrime Properties .......................................................................................................................... 6
Regional Settings ................................................................................................................................ 6
Svstern ................................................................................................................................................. 8
Page 2 of 9
Service Manual UMAS YPump & Valve Control
Hardware
The PC is a Pentium 200 MHz with 1Gb HD, floppydrive, CD-ROM and Seagate Tape Store 3.2 GB (TR-3)
streamer. The two screens are connected to the PC with a vga dsub double Y-cabel. Screen no. 1 (to the left) is
connected to the cable marked "B" and screen no.2 (to the right) is connected to the cable marked "A".
The mouse and keyboard is connected like the dwg. on the back of the PC indicates.
The ethernet cards is connected by a coax and at both ends of the coax a terminate resistor must be mounted, if not
the windows will not start.
Software
Start up of the PC will take app. lminute before UMAS V P & V picture appear.
The Software on the PC are usually located like this :
C:\ : Root on PC
C:\Bkup : Backupdirectory for application program
: Backup program for Streamer 1Tape
: Copy of Windows NT 4.0 installation program
~acku~directory for hardware drivers and software
Intouch Ver. 6.0
Application program UMAS V P & V 7126,2 screen Ver. 1
C:\Meltcpip Meltcpip driver
C:\Ternp : ~ernpbr&yfiles directory for Windows NT 4.0 operating system
C:\Winnt : Windows NT 4.0 operating system
The logger program records all problems or errors to a disk file and to the screen for analysis.
Exit to Windows NT4.0 Operating system
If you need to do sytem configuration or replacing the applikation with a newer vesion you will need to exit the
applikation and use the Windows NT 4.0 operating system. To do this you must first enter highest password level
(level 3). Then press Ctrl+SHIFT+W. You are now able to close the applikation. FromUMAS V P & V pictures,
press and release the Windows key. Left-click on the Start button and then right-click on the viewer button. To close
application left-click on Closc. You should now be able to use the operating system.
Move applikation to backup directory
Page 3 of 9
Service Manual 3~7 UMAS VPump & Valve Control
To start Windows NT Explorer just right-clik on the start-button and left-click on Explorer. Now you can browse
between different directies on your harddisc. Left-click on the plus sign to see underdirectories and left-click on the
minus sign to hide underdirectories. Open the directory C:\Intch60. Point at the at the applikation directory an press
and hold the left mousebotton. Hold the button while you move the pointer to the C:\Bkup directory. When it is
highlighted, then release the left button and the applikationdirectory will be moved.
Backup Streamer
On both the PC'es there is a streamer mounted. The streamer is a Seagate Tape Store 3.2 GB (TR-3) streamer. To
start the backuplrestore program from windows, double-click on the Backup Exec-ikon on the Desktop
and the streamer program will start.
A menu will appear and backup / restore can be activated.
UMAS V P & V Restore Pros. Seagate Tape Store 3.2 GI3 (TR-3) streamer
NB! Before restoring the application it is smart to move the old application to the backuo directory C:\BKW. To
start the restore program from windows, double-click on the Backup Exec-ikon on the Desktop and the streamer
program will start. The window should now look something like this:
I
1. Select Window + Tapes.
2. Select Operations + Catalog a Tape. Choosc Partial and press OK. The tree on the tape will appcar.
Page 4 of 9
Service Manual
30 4- UMAS VPump & Valve Control
3. Now you can browse between different directories on your tape. Left-click on the plus sign to see
underdirectones. To mark files to restore just left-click in front of the application directory. A black X will
appear in front of the selected files.
4. Select Restore button.
5. Press OK and the restore process will start.
6 . When Restore process is done, press OK and close program.
[ki ... . ,
. ...
&store
.
Page 5 of 9
Service Manual 3t.T UMAS VPzmlp & Valve Control
Windows NT 4.0 Setup

Enter Control Panel by pressing Start, select Settings and single click on Control Panel. Make sure that the settings
are as the following pictures
DatelTirne Properties
Regional Settings '8 Regional

Settings
- * .
Repond Seltngs, ] Gntency 1 T m
.-
) Dale -I ln&<&e-s
. - I _ $1
May p o g m r tdct~mnalsstbp Chanquq Ihs R e g d
Sdbt allecto the way these pcgwns cisdaj and sort ddes. he-%
anwcy, and rumbas II
Service Manzial UMAS VP~irnp& Valve Control
1
Regional Sett~ngs Number Currency Tlme 1 ] Dale ] Input Locales]
fl= Universalcwency symbol

I lone style IHHmm ss 3 i
(jmency yrnbd: kt 7
-Positive curency format U11 7
4 syrnbot 1 7
-
Nq&e cunency format 1
fl 11 v
-
PM syrnbot 1 7
D i d g o u p i w syrnbot I -
NO. d hilsjn group r3 -
1 1
~e&nal Settugs Nwnber Currency Tine 1 Date 1 l n p t Locales1
r IndaUedinpa locales and !zyouls - -
-- 1
1! Input locales
Short date
Short date sample: 1111mi i
i I
-
Date separator:
Long &
=,
i
1
II
I I
i Ddault inputlocak: N o w e g m pokrnalj 5 C L
Long date sarnplr 11 ~ i s r r m h IT-?
r I
~ o n date
g dyla Id MMMM yyyy v
I
[ O K 1 Cancel I hn;jy 1
Service Manual @-* UMAS VPump & Valve Control
System System
General I Paformance I EnvircmmeA

Statup/SMdown HardwareProlilen ] UrerPnomes General 1 Perfcureme Enw
- SHem S l a l w -
SvsternVaables
Startup I ' ~ m d o w sNT Workstal~onVemon4 OW' .V_labk---

ComSpec
-_JV&e
C \WINNTbystern?53cmd exe
.---A
*
NTRESKIT C WTRESKIT
NUMBER-OF-PR
0s Wlndows-NT r .
OsZLibPalh C \WINNTLryslem32\mZ\dll. =I
-
User Vanabler for advetla
Vaable I Vahe - I
TEMP C \TEMP
TMP C\TEMP
PC-Name
The PC-name can be changed from windows :
From Desktop:
0 Right-click choose Properties
Start Nethvork
Computer Name : PC1 ( PC2 P C 3 )

Workgroup : Workgroup
Default Logon Name : PC1
If more than one PC they will communicate on Ethernett cards, and the PC will be named like this:
Engine-room : PC1
Bridge : PC2
Office : PC3
Page 8 of 9
Service Manual
3ae UMAS VPump & Valve Control
Win.ini
[InTouch]
MultiScreen=l
MultiscreenHeigh~600
Multiscreenwidth=800
(For multiscreens cards, will center keyboard (pop-up) in Intouch to the working screen).
Page 9 of 9
m
Rolls-Royce
Operating/service/technicalmarzzlal UA U Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Trrnksozatding
I( Document class: I Open 1

Document number: 65147
Version number DSF 61 2
-
Title:
ULSTEIN DATASOUND FRONTEND 1 UMAS V TANKSOUNDING for Tanktender
Summary:
I Operating, Service and Technical manual
Date Issued by checked- Approved Status Rev.

930426 oga First issue. 00
160296 oga New default parameter 01
160396 oga New analog out system 02
211 196 oga 56 tanks + depth 03
Emm
RolIs-Royce
Operating/service/tecIznicnl nzanunl UAU Datnsound Frorztend / UMAS V Tnnksonnding
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General description....................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Function............................................................................................................................. 3
1.2 System construction ........................................................................................................ 5
1.3 Operating ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Error messages................................................................................................................... 10
1.5 Service mode..................................................................................................................... 13
1.6 Calibrating. 16
1.6.1 Calibrating the level: ...................................................................................................... 18
. 1.6.2 Calibrating the density: ............................................................................................... 19
1.6.3 Calibration of analoge instruments: ............................................................................ 20
1.6.e Setting the tank analoge out channel: ......................................................................... 21
1.7 Testfunctions .................................................................................................................... 22
I . Parametervalues.................................................................................................................. 24
1.8.1 Value parameters (using F3): ........................................................................................ 25
1.8.2 Tankparameter (tank 1- 56 + 4 depth): ......................................................................... 27
1.8.3 IIS modulee parameter ................................................................................................... 28
1.8.4 Parameters for digital output modules DO16: ............................................................ 29
1.8.5 Parameter for other module types (Analoge Output): ........................................ 30
1.8.6 Parameter for other module types (Analoge Output): ........................................ 31
1.9 Parameter description........................................................................................................ 35
1.9.1 Parameters for analoge ouputs .................................................................................... 40
Startup procedures. tank parameters ......................................................................................... 42
Technical description................................................................................................................... 46
3.1 Pneumatic part.................................................................................................................... 46
3.2 Processor unit..................................................................................................................... 46
3.3 Microterminal....................................................................................................................... 47
3.4 Software ............................................................................................................................... 47
3.5 Material list ........................................................................................................................ 48
3.6 Technical data ..................................................................................................................... 49
Serviceing ...................................................................................................................................... 50
4.1 Errors during startup .......................................................................................................... 50
Interfacing the DSF t o an external computer............................................................................. 53

5.1 Using a PClAT as external computer (operator) via current loop ............................. 53
5.2 INT 803 internal configuration: .......................................................................................... 54
Microterminal connection ............................................................................................................ 55

6.1 Microterminal Configuration ............................................................................................. 56
1 Flowchart sound sequence ........................................................................................................ 57
Dep. Automation .Longva
mm
Rolls-Royce
manrlal
Opel-ating/service/teclz~zical UAU Datasozmd Frontend / UMAS V Tanhonrzdirrg
General description.
Datasound Frontend DSF612 is a microprocessor controlled sounding unit for measuring level
and density on shiptanks.
Level, volume, weight, volum utility and depth values are calculated and transfered to external
the Tanktender ballast control system and an optional PC operating unit
via a serial line.
Several commands can be sendt to the DSF for
selecting tanks to be sounded, what type of sensor to be used
and what type of information which is wanted.
A microthninal can be connected to the DSF via a switch in the Frontend cabinet,
disconnecting the PC operator unit.
It is used for test, calibration and sewice purposes.
During development of the system, efforts are made for

making a simple, reliable and inexpencive unit, which also can be integrated with other computer
systems via the serial line.
The system can be configurated for different sensors and tanktypes.
The sensors are connected to 110 modules which can be installed
to suit the customers demands.
.1 Function.
The tanks are sounded in sequence using the constant air principle.
The DSF can work in one of the following modes,
controlled by commands from an external computer:
- SOUND mode (sequence)

-REMOTE mode
- STANDBY mode
After power on, the system will always operate in SOUND mode.
Tank 1 to the maximum tanknumber will be sounded in sequence

and continuosly updated until1 a new command is received.
Tanknumber, tankstatus with errorcodes, datatype and

measuring values are transferred to the external central computer (CC) via the serial line.
= RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technicalntanzlal UAU Datasozmd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
If the DSF receives a command for sounding one or several tanks, DSF will start working in
REMOTE mode.
Only the selected tanks are sounded.

The transfer of information will then be much faster because of shorter sounding sequence time.
During both working modes, DSF can receive a command

for meadring the depth values.
The datatype information will inform the external computer

about what type of level is received, the normal tank level or depth level.
The system status information will reflect any error condition

via a number code from 0- 9.
Everything is normal when the number is less than 3.
A command with tank number 00 will return the DSF to

the default SOUND mode.
If the DSF is configured for the standby function,

and the system has been in SOUND mode for a certain time,
the DSF will enter the STANDBY mode.
The measurements are stopped periodically to reduce
wearing on the valves.
rn
Rolls-Royce 315
Operating/sewice/technicalntanital UA U Datasoztnd Frotttend / UMAS V Ta~tksoitnding
.2 System construction.
Datasound Frontend 612
Block diagram
To Operator #2 PC or Ext. Computer
Microterminal TM2500 I
I To Tanktender PLS system
I x x ========== I I
I X X X X X X X I I I
I I I I
I I I
I I I
I I 1 20 mA Current loop
I I
I I Alarm output
I I I
I I I
1-1 I
I I I
1 24 v/5 V 1 20 mA CPC 8 I 11s
I Power I serial CPU I PI0
I Supply I Intf. I Adapt
I I .I
I I
-1-1-
I I
1 Switch
I I
Select Microterminal or
Operator 2, PC
Pneumatic unit I
I I I I I -
Analog - - - - - Digital - - -
Valves, transducers e.t.c
- RolIs-Royce
1
Operating/sewice/technical manual UAUDatasound Prontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
The system is based on Eurolog processor cards,

Eurolog industrial interface modules (11s) and a microteminal.
The units are mounted in a standard 19' rack.

A 24 volt/ 5 Volt power, supplies the current for the processor card and the IIS modules
A serial adapter transforms the Eurologs RS232 interface to
a four wire current loop signal with galvanic isolation.
This will result in a high noise and trancient immunity.
Only a four wire shielded cable is required between

the DSF 2nd the external computer.
The system is buildt for custom flexibility.
Analoge and digital IIS moduler can be equipped as needed.
With the microterminal the parameters can be adjusted for-theanyactual configuration.

All parameters are protected against noise, power drop outs and
unauthorised use.
A password code is required before any changes can be done.
The parameters are located in a special memory type called EEPROM
which retains the information also without power supply to the unit.
When the system is startet, the parameters are compared with the physical configuration.
If the configuration is valid, the system will start in a normal sound sequence.
If the configuration is not valid, there will be an error message on the microterminal.
A second operator PC may be connected to the Frontend at the same serial channel normally used
for the microterminal.
The microterminal is then disconnected, setting an operator switch in position
"Operator 2".
No output will appear on the microterminal display.
For test and calibrating of the system, the switch must be set in position:
"MTTY" (microtcm~inal)
The system will then restart the Frontend unit.
,,:\?,\K\T,,,>k?",:?.!!r ,,,,Y2\::d,\!.~!t\o;?6:>~ C! <!,X
1Rolls-Royce
m
Operating/service/technical~nanual U A U Datasound Fronterzd / U M A S V Tanksortnding
Important!
After finishing the test and calibration, the switch must be returned to the "Operator 2" postion if
2 operators are installed.
If only 1 operator is installed, the switch must always be in position "MTTY".
3 Operating
The DSF may be locally operated, using the microterminal

in the op&ating mode.
..
It is directly connected to the processor card via a RS232 serial line
if the operator switch is set to position "MTTY" (microterminal).
The parameter changes are also done, using the terminal but in
the service mode.
I
I
I
I
I
ear
After power up start with the MTTY connected, the display will show:
"DS.FRONTEND 612"
The DSF may also be restarted during operation by pressing the keys: clear. Entcr in
sequence.The terminal is now in operator mode and may be used for local operating.
m
RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical nzanual UA U Datasound Frorltend / UMAS V Tankso~cnding
The keys has the following meaning:
> < is used for moving the display when more than 16 characters is sent to the
display. (normally not needed).
sp = space key
del = deletes last character
clear-= command reset, display shows: "OPERATOR MODE"
0- 9 = numeric keyboard for input data
- =minus sign
. = decimal sign
Enter = terminates inputdata , executes functions
The function keys has the following meaning in operator mode:
F1: LOCAL TANK F2: SOUND

F3: MDENS F4: ERROR ACK
F5: SCHANGEIMANSEL F6: PASSW.
F1, LOCAL TANK:

With this function, one single tank can be sounded.
The level and density is presented on the display.
Pressing Fl will display: "Tanknum >".

The wanted tanknumber is entered via the numeric keyboard.
Then press the Enter key.
If the tanknumber is valid, the display shows:
"Tanknum = nn" where the tank number is nn.
If it is not valid, the display wil be: "WRONG VALUE!".
A typical local sound dislay will be: " 1 11.72m 1.000"

Here the tank number= 1.
The level is 1 1.72 meter and the density is 1.000
The tank is continuosly sounded while updating the display.
This local sounding will not influcnce on the information sent to the external computer.
The selected tanks will be sounded and the information returned,
independent of the locale operation.
H.\P\'\i>r.*30und!n'i\LU!~ii\L?PP\:~U;i:770~,~~
imB3
RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technicalnlanzlal UAU Datasolrnd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozinding
The process however, will be somewhat slowed down because of

the local tank is sounded between the other tanks.
To avoid slowing down the system for a long period,

there is a timeout when several minutes are elapsed without local operation.
F2, SOUND:
If the F2 is used, the display will show the information for each tank when it is ready.
In sequence mode, all tanks will be displayed.
In remote mode only the tanks selected from the external computer is presented.
The local operator can not change the tanknumbers displayed.
The oper&or can however change the type of information displayed by pressing one of the
numeric keys.
Information type
tanknumber, analoge value for level and density
" , level in meter , density with 3 decimals
" ,volume i m3
" ,maximum volume
" ,volume percent with 1 decimal
" , weight in ton
" , temperature (option)
" ,trim ,list
" , draft ,maximum depth
" , alarm limit low, high
F3, MDENS:
This function is used for setting the manual density value for a tank.
The tanknumber must first be selected using the F1 key.
The display shows then: "TK 1 MDENS>". if tank number 1 is selected.

The density value is entered without any decimal sign.
A density value of 1.000 is entered as 1000.
To be valid, the values should range from 600 to 3000
or else there will be an error message: "WRONG VALUE".
This function is a part of the operator mode and do not
require the password code.
The density value is used for calculating the tank levcl.
F4, ERROR ACK:

When the F4 key is pressed without any errors registrated in the system, the display will show:
"SYSTEM OK".
Rolls-Royce 318
Operating/sewice/technical man~ial UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksoz~nding
When an error encounters in DSF 612, the error number will be stored in a table followed by an
acoustic alarnl from the terminal.
If F4 was activated at the time when the error was detected,
the display will show how many errors that is registrated.
As an example: "ERRORS > 1" .
Pressing the F4 now, will display the first error message.

ex.: "ERROR TANK 1".
If more t$an one error is stored in the table, each press on the
F4 key will show the next error message until1 all errors are
acknowledged. The display will then again show: "SYSTEM OK"
If an error encounters when using another function key,

there will be an acoustic alarm and the F4 led will be lit.
.4Error messages.
When acknowledging the errors using function
key F4 ERRORR ACK, an error message is presented on
the display.
Each error will have an error code number,which depend on
the type of error.
Code Description
'0' = DSF system OK sounding
'1' = DSF OK STANDBY
'2' = not used
'3'= Tank error
'4'= communication error
'5'= Watchdog error
'6'= Checksum error Eprom
'7'= " " EEprom
'8'= IIS module error or signal error
'9'= Parameter error
If the code number is >3 then a serious error has occurred.

The first digital output marked A0 which is normally activated, will then be deactivated (the
output goes from 24 to 0 volt)
If an alarm central is connected to the output via a relais,
an open contact will indicate serious error on the Frontend or
the power supply is missing.
The error code is also sent to the external computer via the serial line if the program is running.
ImZa
Rolls-Royce
Operatitzg/sewice/technical manual UAU Datasozlnd Frotztend / UMAS V Tanksounding
Description of the error messages on the LCD display:
"LOAD EEPROM" EEprom must be loaded from Eprom
"WRONG MTYPE 2" module number 2 from left in the

rack unit is wrong module type compared with
the paraqeter.
The module type or the parameter must be changed.
"ERROR! NO MOD 3" No physical module in position 3

as configured in the parameter. Mount the module or change the actual parameter.
"ERROR! NO MOD 1" No physical modules in the system.

Check the cable and the contacts concerning the IIS adapter.
Check the 5 volt power supply to the modules.
"ERROR MODULE 1" Undefined error on module number 1.

Check the module and all connections
Change the module if necessary.
"POWERFAIL MOD 4" 24 voltage missing on module 4

Check the 24 voltage on the front connector.
"LOW VOLT MOD 2" To low 5 Volt < 4.85 volt on module 2
Adjust the power supply to 5.0 volt
"EPROM ERROR! " Wrong checksum on the Eprom.

Program error or defective Eprom. Install new Eprom with program.
"EEPROM ERROR! " Wrong checksum for the EEprom.

Try changing one parameter. If still the same error appears, make a note of all the parameter
values that has been changed.
Install ncw EEprom.
Load default parameters from Eprom.
Load the old parameter values from the micro terminal keyboard.
Restart the system.
1Rolls-Royce
Em3
Operating/sewice/technical manztal UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksoztnding
"WATCHDOG ERROR!" The microprocessor has been restarted due to

an error in the program or caused by external noise and transients.
If the error is repeated several times,
the CPC 8 CPU card must be checked for hardware errors.
The system must be protected against uinintendent influence by screened cables, filters and metal
cabinet housing.
"COMM.ERROR !" Wrong format on the command message from the external
computer.
The error may be caused by noise picked up on the serial line.
If the error is repeated, it is not possible for the external computer to receive the wanted
information from DSF.
Check the cables and connectors.
If necessary, install some noise protection on the serial line.
"ERROR TANK 1" Measuring error on tank number 1.

The error will appear if the measured value is less than the normal minimum analog value from
the trancducer.
This normally indicates break in the cables or defective transducer.
F5, SCHANGE:
When 2 sensors are mounted at the same level in the tank and there is some problems with the one
normally used, they can
be changed by using the F5 fimction key.
The tanknumber must first be selected with the F1 key.
Pressing F5, the display will no~mallyshow: "TK 1 SCHANGE>OV.

The normal sensor is then being used.
Pressing the '1' key, will change the display to "TK 1 SCHANGE>l".
The other sensor will then be used in the tank.
Pressing '0' will restore the orginal sensor as active.
~ ~ ~ \ ~ A % \ T ~ ~ k 3 o ~ n ~ I L ~ t~> .q~ O\l."c >.c ,
r ~ ~ ~ U , ~ ~ . ~ ~ \ ~ ~ ~ ~
[Rolls-Royce 32,
Operatiizg/sewice/techl2icnl ~nanzlal UAU Datasozind Frontend / U M A S V Tanksozmding
F5, MANSEL:
Pressing the function key one more time, will display: "TK 1 MANSEL>OW.
If the actual tank is configured for automatic density, the values will be measured and calculated.
Pressing the 'I' key will change the display to: "TK 1 MANSEL>lV.
Now only the level will be measured and calculated for the tank.
A manual density value will be selected.
Pressing the '0' key, returns the tank to the automatic density function.
The function which also can be remotely controlled from the PC, is used for
setting an auto density tank in manual mode.
If the den:ity is known, this will reduce the measuring time.
If the F5 key is pressed once more, the display will show:
"TK 1 SCHANGE>OW again.

In this way the same key (F5) is used for both functions.
F6, PASSW:
This function is used for inputting the password code before
entering the service mode for DSF 612.
The code consists of 5 numbers.
Pressing F6 will display: "PASSWORD #".
The correct number is then inputted without showing the numbers.
After the last number, press the Enter key.
If the numbers was correctly loaded we will see:
"SERVICE MODE"
If the code is entered with the wrong numbers:
"WRONG PASSWORD!".
The procedure must then be repeated until1 the code is accepted.
5 Service mode.
The system is always in operator mode after startup.
For configuring the system, parameter setting and testing
the service mode must be entered.
The function keys will now bc uscd for othcr purposes.
F1: TABLE F2: MEMORY

F3: VALUE F4 : TRACE
F5: CAL/TEST F6: 0PR.MODE
Operating/service/techltical~nanual UAU Dataso~mdFrontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
Description of the functions:
" F l " is used for loading the tank tables.
Pressing the key will display: "Tab.Tk. 1 ROW 0".
The tanktables supplied by the shipyard is used for calculating

the current volume of the liquid in the tanks based on
the measured tank levels and depth levels.
The tables are organised in 11 rows for each tank.
Each rownrepresents a certain level and the corresponding
volumes for 3 fixed trimvalues.
For even keel, trimvalue stern -2.5 and head 1.0,
the level in the tables are measured from the bottom of the tank.
The table values is entered while taking the tank shape into consideration.
The correct volume values are found using an interpolating technic.
Using the F1 key and the numeric keys, all table values can be entered into the system.
F1+ 1 selecting tanknumber

F1 + 2 selecting rownumber 0- 10
F1 + 3 level in mm. for this row
F 1 + 4 volume even keel " " "
F1+ 5 volume trim -2.5 " " "
F1 + 6 volume trim 1.0 " " "
Each time the F1 key is pressed, the display will show the current tanknumber and row number.
The volume values in the table must have the correct format for the current tank.
The volume format is dependent of parameter 200+ tanknumber.
Parameter values:
< 10000 volume values in m3 * 100, display w/ 2 decimals
>= 10000 volume values in m3 * 10, " w/ 1 "
>= 20000 volume values in m3 " n o "
"F3" is used for reading and changing all the value parameters.
The display shows: "VALUE #".
The parameter number range is from 1 - 4000.
ImYH
Em3
Rolls-Royce 9.3
Operatitzg/senice/tecltzicalt t l n t l ~ l a l UAU Dntaso~mdFrotltetzd / UMAS V Tatzkso~ltlditzg
After inputting the parameter number, the display will show:
The parameter number 1 has the value 1001.

A new input value can operate in the range of 0- 65000.
Pressing the Enter key, the value is stored in EEprom memory and the display is updated with the
new value.
Press the Enter key once more to advance to the next parameter number.
If no new value is loaded, each press on the Enter key will increase the parameter number by one.
The parameter numbers and corresponding values are listed in

a table, see section 1.8
Note !!!
Before changing any parameter value, the influence
on the system must be considered.
"F2" is used for debugging and test purposes.

Pressing the key displays: "MEMORY ADR:"
The 16 bits hexadecimal adresse (4 characters) is entered
using the function keys and the numeric keys.
As an example, input the adress 8030 and press Enter.
The display can be: "8030 00 05 04 03".
The stored data values from adress 8030 through 8033 hexadecimal are shown on the display as
the hexvalues: 00,05,04, and 03.
After activating the F2 key, MEMORY function the first time, all the function keys will represent
the hexvalues: 'A'-'F'.
Only the data value on the shown adress can be changed.

In this example the value 00 can be changed by inputting a new hexadecimal value.
:
1RolIs-Royce
Emm
Operating/sewice/techr2ical ntan~tal UA U Datasomd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
Note !!!
Memory changes must not be changed without considering the consequences on.the systems
operation.
Pressing Enter only, advances the display to the next adress.

The '-'key will show the previous adress.
The MEMORY function is left by using the Clear key.
"F4" is also used for debugging and testing purposes,

tracing 4 memory adresses for any change in their data values.
Pressing the function key the first time will show: "TRACE ADR." After inputting the
hexadecimal adress and pressing Enter,
the display will show the adress and the four data values
as in the MEMORY function.
The values however, can not be changed.
Each second, the system will test the four data values for any changes.
If one or more of the values has changed, the new values will appear in the display window.
The input adress must be in the variable memory range from 8000 through 9FFF hexadecimal.
(RAM)
The function is left by pressing the Clear key.
Pressing the "F6" key the system will return the system to the operator mode.
The display shows then: "OPERATOR MODE"
The calibration of the system is divided into 3 sections:
- Level calibration
- Density 11
- External Instrument "

- Setting the analog out channel
Before the calibrating of tank level can be done, the system must be configured for the manual
density mode.
This is done by setting parameter 4 to the value= 0.
1Rolls-Royce
mE3
Operating/service/technical manzial UAUDatasozrnd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozmding
The correct density for the tank medium is entered into the system using the function keys F l and
F3 in Operator mode.
The Service mode is then entered, using the correct password code.
All calibration is handled by the function key F5.
"Cal/TestWis displayed.
During calibration, no tank information is sent to the external computer.
1RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical rna~znal UAUDataso~tndFrontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
.1 Calibrating the level:
The actual tank is selected by pressing F5 and '1'.

with the following display: "Tanknum >".
The tanknumber must be within the valid range from

tanknumber 1 through the maksimum tank sounded or
the message: "WRONG VALUE!. will appear.
A valid number is displayed as: "Tanknum = nn". where

nn is the tanknumber.
Then the minimum analog value should be measured while the tank is empty.
Press F5 and '2'.
The display will be: "TK 1MINS nnn"
Here the nnn is the decimal value for the minimum level in the empty tank.
The value will be stored in the EEprom parameter table.
Then the tank must be filled until1 a certain level with a known liquid.
That is, the density must be known and previously loaded.
F5 + '3' displays: "TK 1LEV.> "
The correct physical level must then be inputted in mm.

After pressing Enter the scale factor for the transducer is calculated by the program and stored
The value is displayed as: "TK 1 ADCNST4892".
This terminates the level calibration for the tank.
If several tanks are using the same transducer, only

one of the tanks needs to be calibrated.
The two level parameters can then be copied to the other tanks,
loading the values manually through the parameters
300 and 400 + tanknumber.
m33
Rolls-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical ~nanzlal UAU Datasozmd Frontend / UMAS V Tanbozmding
.2 Calibrating t h e density:
The system must then be set in automatic density mode by

setting parameter 4 to value= 1 and sensortype= 3.
using parameter 700+ actual tanknumber.
See the later parameter description.
First select an empty tank.

The tankkmber is entered using F5 and key 1.
Then press F5 and key 4.
The minimum analog value for density is measured, stored and
displayed: Tk 1MIND nnn is the minimum analog value, here for tank 1.
The function must be repeated until1 the value is stabile.
A medium with known density is then filled into the tank.

After some stabilising time, the calibrating can be camed out.
The ship must be in a stable position for best results.
Press F5 and 5 .The display will be: Tk 1DENS.>
Input the known density value * 1000 without any desimal sign and press Enter.
The display is: Tk 1 ADCOND nnnn
nnnn is the calculated scale factor for density.
The procedure must be repeated until the values are stabile.
The density calibration must be carried out for each

differencial transducer.
Tanks using the same density transducer can have the same
density parameters.
That means updating parameter number 500- and 600- -t tanknumber.
Level and density calibration can be checked by using the F2
function.
Rolls-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical ~nanzlal UA U Datasormd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksomding
.3 Calibration of analoge instruments:
If the DSF 612 is installed with analoge outputs for external instruments, the system must be
calibrated for correct indication.
The instruments are supposed to be internal calibrated before
connection to the DSF system.
Two types of information can be displayed.

..
- Tanklevell depth level.

- ~olume'utilisationin percent of maksimum tank volume.
For dept measurement only, the level can be displayed in meter with 2 decimals.
Calibration procedure:
Use the micro terminal to read the current level or volume %
for the actual tank.
Best results are achieved when the value is close to the maximum value for the tank.
Parameter 50 must be set to the maximum value for the tank.

Parameter 52 selects the type of IIS analog output module:
0= A 0 4 module (default)
1= DAI 16 module
Parameter 53,5435 and 56 must be set to the analog output channel used for depth Fore, Aft,
Stearb and Port.
57 is the type of analog output for the tanks:
O= no analog output
1= level
2= ~ 0 1 %
Parameter 58 is adjusted for showing the correct tank volume % values on the instruments
59 is used for adjusting the deptvalue output on the instruments.
60 is used for the correct tank level output.
We suppose that the tanks are all using the same instrument type,
using only 1 scaling parameter.
Also the depth instrument are supposed to be of the same type,
using one common parameter.
EEEl3
RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewiceAechnicalmanzlal UAU Datasozlnd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozmdiizi;
.4 Setting the tank analoge out channel:
After selecting the calibration tank with F5 and 1,

pressing the 6 key will show the analoge output channel for the tank.
The default value is 0, which means that the tank has no analoge output.
An analoge output number from 1 to the maximum (par. 50) may be selected.
We suppose that the tanks are all using the same instrument type,
using the same scaling parameter for all tanks.
Also the depth instrument are supposed to be of the same type,
using one common parameter.
rn
Rolls-Royce
Operating/sewice/technicalmanual UA U Dataso~tndFrontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
.7Testfunctions.
In service mode, 2 test functions can be activated for the DSF:
Analog input test
- Digital output test
The analoge test starts by first selecting the tanknummer

via F5 &d '1'. Then press F5 and '8'.
The analog input value for the selected tank will be continiously measured and can be displayed
as: " 1s4068 d 0".
" 1" is the tanknumber, here tank number 1.

" ~ 4 0 6 8 "represents the analoge value from the level transducer.
"d 0" shows the analoge value from the differencial transducer if it is installed for density
measurement.
Normally the value will be 0 for level measurements.
This function is useful for controlling the transducer, cables and analoge module.
The longe time stability can also be checked by studying the values.
The digital output test starts by pressing F5 and then '9'.

All the digital outputs are then activated in sequence,
except for the first output AO.
This output is used for signalling system error to an external alarm central.
Normally without errors, it should be activated.
The led A0 would be lit= ON= 24 volt output.
Each output will be on for about 0.5 seconds.

This function can be used for controlling the digital output modules and cable breakage.
After one test sequence the system will start normal
sounding mode.
During calibration and tests, no valid information is sent to the exernal computer system
In stead a standard format message is sent with tanknumber= 0,
signalling that the DSF is not in the normal measuring mode.
m
Rolls-Royce
Operating/sewice/technicalmanual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tankso~tndin~
The operating functions can also be observed via the leds

on the output modules.
The 16 channel analoge module A116 has no channel indication.
All the tankvalves are electrically controlled by the digital outputs.
The outp& A1 is used for controlling the airsave valve if it is installed.

Output A2 is reserved for level alarm, giving a 24 volt 1 second pulse when an alarm-occures.
A3 is reserved for future functions.
A4 is the first output for the airing valves.
If there is more than one valve register in the system,

each register must have one airing output.
In the same way each transducer must be connected to one
valve register.
The airing valves will be activated when another tank in the register is selected.
In Fast Sounding Mode, the system will start measuring the tanks much faster than normal.
The following conditions must then be met:
- The parameter 7 must be set to 0.

- Only one tank in each register must be selected.
- Manual density
- Not in Local mode
All the airing valves will be closed.

The tank valves will be held open during the measurements.
8 , . , ~ A K , ~ , ~ " ~ ~ O L ~ J ~ ~ . C ~ \ ~ , , ~ ~ ~, SAC L~ ~ ~ , \ " ~ ~ ' : ~ . . ~ !
- Rolls-Royce
1
Operating/sewice/technical manual UA U Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
The parameter values for the DSF are stored in a non volatile and write protected memory of type
EEprom.
Dependent of function they are divided in several groups:
- System parameters
- Tankparameters
- IIS moduleparameters
During startup of a new system, default values for the parameters can be loaded from Eprom, the
program memory.
~ ~. <
I ~ : \ D A ~ \ ~ J ~ ~ ~ O U ~ . ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ \ ~ 0: ! r~x J & ~ . ~ ! ~ \ O Z S ~ > > .
[Rolls-Royce
Erm
Operating/sewice/teclrnicalmanual UA U Datasounil Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozmding
1Value parameters (using F3):
Common system value parameters DSF version 612.:

parnum. def.va1. description
16 number of tanks to be sounded incl. depth

1 sensor groups (1 group for each transducer)
17 digital valve output for tank 1
1 1= one or more tanks with two airbells
1 1= datatype level/volume to external computer
1 1= external computer, 0= local sounding only
1 1= no fast sounding
65 minimum level in mm. for valid sounding
3 number of analoge samplings for averaging
1 * 100 mS analoge sampling time
10 "100 mS before start sounding sequence
1 * 100 mS closed airvalve before open densityvalve
10 * 100 mS open density valve before measuring
if = 0, then separate stab. par. 801-856
5 * 100 mS delay before level measuring
1 * 100 mS closed airvalve before open level valve
10 * 100 mS open level valve before measuring
if = 0, then separate stab. par. 801-856
5 * 100 mS before sounding next tank, (airing)
600 " 100 mS time before normal sounding in fast mode
20 * 100 mS before tk= 00 to ekst.comp when calltest
6000 * 100 mS before trim measurement in remote mode
600 "100 mS maximum time in local sound mode
2 *O. 1 % low alarm hysteresis
5 *0.1 % high " "
0 number of digital alarm outputs
49 output number for the first alarm output
0 tanknumber used for depth measurement fore
0 1, , I, I,
aft
0 I, ,I ,I
stbd.
0 I! ,I It
port
2 autotrim: 0= none, 1= on command, 2= always
1 stern= 1 head= 0
0 manual trim value in mm.
0 stear load value " " ( rise of keel )
0 1= default autotrim
0 1 = default autodensity
1Rolls-Royce
cima
Operating/sewice/iechnicalrnanztal UAUDatasound Fronterzd / UMAS V Tanksozmding
40 1 standby aktive= 1, passive= 0

41 30 min. before standby mode
42 120 min. in standby mode
43 - 4 min. sounding during standby
45 0 O= airvalve active closed 1= active open
46 0 O= no airsave >O =min air off
47 . 0 " " =min air on
50 0 maximum analog outputs

52 0 0= A04, 1= DAI 16 module
0 analoge output number for depth fore

0 " " " " " aft
0 " " " " " stbd
0 " " " " " Port
0 O= no, 1= level, 2= vol% tank daoutp
1070 analoge outp. scale factor for tanks
20080 l! 9l M U U
for depth
16000 ll V W $I
for level
V I
90 1 source tanknumber for copying parameters

91 0 destination " ,I
100 0 test parameter, 0= no tests
999 0 loading of default parameters if 12345
Emm
RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical manrtal UAUDatasorrnd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozrnding
.5 Tankparameter (tank 1- 56 + 4 depth):
par.num default description
1000 manual density, may also be changed in operator mode,

using: F3 MDENS.
50 volume format and bellheight abowe bottom
8 17 min. decimal ad value level transducer.(4mA)
4966 scale constant for level transducer
817 min. decimal ad value density transducer.
4966 scale constant for density transducer
101 sensortype and groupnumber for actual tank
5 minimum density level and stab.tid * 100 ms
10000 maximum tank volume, dep. of volume format
100 low alarmlimit * 10 in %
900 high " ,, I,
--- IIS module parameters, see: following pages

0 alarm output numbers for high/ low alarm
tank table parameters
RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewr'ce/technical manual UAU Datasozuzd Frontend / UMAS V Tankso~mding
.6 IIS modulee parameter

Parameter for analoge input module AI16I:
priority 0= not installed, 1= installed
moduletype ( 53= AI161)
module number of this type
module logic adress used by the program

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress
priority 0= not installed, I = installed

moduletype
module logic adress
Em3
Rolls-Royce
nzanrlal
Operating/sewice/tech~lical UAU Dataso~lndFrontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
4Parameters for digital output m o d u l e s D016:

par.num/type default description

moduletype (4= DO16 1A 5= DO16 2A module)

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress
priority 0= not installed, I= installed

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress
[ Rolls-Royce
m
Operating/sewice/technical manzlal UA U Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
5Parameter for other module types (Analoge Output):

moduletype

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress

moduletype
module logic adress
priority 0= not installcd, I = installcd

moduletype
module logic adress
E3B3
RolIsmRoyce
Operating/sewice/technicalmanual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
0 priority 0= not installed, I = installed

0 moduletype
1 module number of this type
24 module logic adress
0 priority 0= not installed, 1= installed

0 moduletype
1 module number of this type
25 module logic adress
CW:
h~\Chl-\T,~ni~011ndln'r\Uh~:.Jh!.iII\L~Si6L?_~i
Ezm
Rolls-Royce
6Parameter for other module t y p e s (Analoge Output):
module 1:
1301 AIGAIN 00 analoge input gain 00= 1
1302- AIINP 64 input sinaltype 64= current input
1303 AITIME 04 converting time 04= 2.5 mS
1304 A ~ O L 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 d u n i p o l a r
1305 -. AICHANS 8 channels used
module 2:
1306 AIGAIN 00 analoge input gain
1307 AIINP 64 input sinaltype
1308 AITIME 04 convertion time
1309 AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity
1310 AICHANS 8 channels used
module 3:
1311 AIGAIN 00 analog input gain
1312 AIINP 64 input sinaltype 64= current input
1313 AITIME 04 convertion time 04= 2.5 mS
1314 AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 d u n i p o l a r
module 4:
1316 AIGAIN 00 analog input gain 00= 1
1319 AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 mA1unipolar
module 5:
1321 AICHAN 00 analog input gain 00= 1
1324 AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 rnAhnipolar
EmzB
Rolls-Royce
module 6:
AICHAN 00 analog input gain 00= 1
AIINP 64 input sinaltype 64= current input
AITIME 04 convertion time 04= 2.5 mS
AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 mAIunipolar
AICHANS 8 channels used
module 7:
A~TIME 04 convertion time 04= 2.5 mS
AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 mA/unipolar
AICHANS S channels used
module 8:
AITIME 04 convertion time 04= 2.5 mS
AIRPOL 0 rangelpolarity 0= 0- 20 mA/unipolar
AICHANS 8 charnels used
,, : \ D , < \ ~ . , : > k 3 o " ~ ' ~ , - . o , " A ! ~ J A ! . ? ~ < , ! > ~ : ~ ~ ,0> :
.L!-:
1Rolls-Royce
Operati~zg/sewice/techrticalmanual UAU Datasozmd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozmding
Exstra parameters for analoge out modules type A 0 4 :

(A04 module 1)
1341 AOPOL 00 analoge output polarity
1342 AORANGE 128 current range, default 4- 20 mA
(A04 module 2)
1343- AOPOL 00 analoge output polarity
(A04-module 3)
(A04 module 4)
1348 AORANGE 128 current range, default 4- 20 rnA
(A04 module 5)
(A04 module 6)
- RolIs-Royce
Operatin,o/sewice/techizical nlanzlal UAU Datasoztnd Frontend / UMAS V Tankso~inding
.9Parameter description.
Moduletype id.number Description
Dl16 1A 02 Digital input module
D116 2A 03 I, I, ,I
DO16 1A 04 " output "

DO16 2A 05 <-- DSF
1, ,I I,
A1161 2A 53 " <-- DSF new type

A 0 4 1A 49 Analog output "
DAI 16 58
PT100 1A 50 Temperature " (option)
Analoge module gain factor AIGAIN:

Type par.value Description
GAIN 1 00 Analoge gainfactor =1 <-- DSF
GAIN1-25 16 = 1.25
GAIN4 32 I,
=4
GAIN16 48 =16
Analoge input signal for type AIINP AI88:

VOLTIN 00 8 voltage sinals
CURRIN 64 8 current signals <-- DSF
REF 10 128 input= 10.0 Volt calibrating
REFGND 192 input= 0.0 Volt "
Analoge input signal for type AIINP AI16I:

Type par.verdi Description
CURRIN 00 16 Str~minnganger <-- DSF
CURRIN 64 I, ,I ,I
REF10 128 input= 19.8 mA calibrating

REFGND 192 input= 0.2 m.4 "
Analoge convertion time AITIME:

IT156 00 convertion time 156 u s
IT3 12 01 312 US
IT625 02 625 u s
ITIMS 03 1.25mS
IT2MS 04 ,1
2.50 mS <-- DSF
IT5MS 05 5.00 mS
IT1 OMS 06 10.00 mS
IT20MS 07 20.00 mS 9,
= Rolls-Royce
inatzzial
Operati~zg/sewice/teclznical UAU Datasozlnrl Frontertd / UMAS V Tanksoundin,q
Analoge input rangelpolarity AIRPOL:

AI020UNI 00 0- 20 mA / unipolar <-- DSF
AI420UNI 16 4- 20 mA / unipolar
AI020BIP 3 2 0- 20 mA / bipolar
AI420BIP 48 4- 20 mA I bipolar
Description of system parameters:

1 is the total number of tanks in the system including
the depth measurements as special tanks.
The maximum value is 60 representing 56 normal tanks and 4 depths..
2 is the number of sensor groups.

That means, the number of valve registers with transducer for level and density.
As a minimum, only 1 group is necessary for measuring the levels of all tanks with one register
and one pressure transducer.
If more than one transducer is installed, each group needs one analoge input connected to the
actual transducer.
The A1161 module can read 16 analoge input channels.
It is possible to install one analoge input for each tank,
resulting in a system with very fast sounding responce,
however with a higher cost.
If the system is configured for density measurement,
this tanks must be installed with two analog input,
one for level and one for the density transducer.
3 specifies which digital output is used for the first tank valve.
4 is normally 0 for level measurement only.

If one or more tanks are used for measuring density, this parameter should be set to 1.
Even if only one tank is used for density sounding, two digital outputs and two analoge inputs are
reserved for each tank.
This is done for making the configuration and cabling of the system easier.
1Rolls-Royce
Emm
Operatiizg/sewice/tech~lical~nanrial UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksoztnding
5 is the parameter for the default datatype to the external computer:
Parameter value:
O= analoge values for level, density, depth and teperature
1= level, density, volume, maxvolume, low, high limit,trim,temp
2= spare
3= spare
4= spare
5: spare
6= spare
-. 7= spare
8= spare
9= parameter number and parameter value
6 . this parameter is normally 1.

Data is then sent to the external computer after sounding
the tank.
If the DSF is used as a stand alone sounding system,
this parameter should be set to 0.
No data will then be sent to external systems.
The microteminal is used for operating the DSF.
7 default value is 1 = no fast sounding.

If = 0 and the conditions are met, the DSF will start fast sounding.
When the parameter is 1, only normal sounding would be camed out.
8 is the minimum level above the sensor bell for valid sounding
results.
The default value is 65 mm.
If the measured level is less than 65 mm, the output value will be set to 0.
This function will avoid unstable values on the display when
the level is to low for stable sounding values.
9 is the number of analoge samplings for each tank.

The correct value is then obtained through averaging the measured values.
The default value is 3.
10 is the time between each analoge sampling.

Default value is set to l = 100 mS.
m
Rolls-Royce
Operating/service/technical inanzial UAUDataso~indFrontend / UMAS V Tanbozinding
11- 17 is timing parameters for the sounding cyclus.

Study the list for the common system value parameters.
The parameter 13 and 16 is the stabilising time before reading the analog values for density and
level.
If for any reason some tank needs longer stabilising times,
parameter 13 and 16 can be set to 0,
Individual stabilising times in * 100 ms. must then be set in parameters 800 + tanknumber.
18 is the time between each normal sounding when the system is in fast sounding mode.
The default value is 600= 60 seconds.
19 is set to 20= 2 seconds.

This is the time elapsed between each time a telegram with tank number 00 is sent to the external
computer.
DSF. is then in calibrating mode, meaning that no valid measuring information are produced.
20 has the default value 6000= 600 sec. = 10 min.

This is the time between trim /list measurements when in
Remote mode.
In normal Sound mode, the trim/list will be calculated after finishing the total sound sequence
and before starting
sounding the first tank again.
21 is default 600 = 60 seconds or 1 minute which is the timeout for local sounding using the
microterminal.
When sounding one ore more tanks locally and not pressing any key on the microterminal, the
DSF will automatically leave local mode and return to the standard sound mode.
22 default 2, is the hystereses in % for the low alarm limit

23 " 5, " "
I, I,
high " "
24 number of digital alarm outputs, default is 0= none.

25 default 49, digital output number for the first alarm output.
30- 33 is the tanknumbers used for depth measurements.

The value O= no depth measurement.
Depth tanknumbers must be located after the normal tank numbers.
The maximum tanknumber (par. 1) is the number of normal tanks plus the depth measurement
tanknumbers.
For both trim and list. four tanknumbers must be used.
,,:\~,\.:,T~-~*>OL::~~~"\~,,~.~JJJJ.J;J,D;FL~>.~~.~~
RolIs-Royce
Operating/seivice/iechnical manual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
34 is set to:
0 if the system is using manual trim values.
1 automatic measured depthvalues on external command
2 " ,, always
The depth values are used for calculating the trim and list values.
35 is set to 0 if the manual trim value is positive (ahead)

or set to 1 if the manual trim value is negativ (stem).
36 represents the manual trimvalue in mm, default is

0= Even Keel
37 is the rise of keel value if used, default = 0 = none.
40 1 = standby function active, 0= standby disabled
41 minutes before starting standby function from SOUND
42 minutes in STANDBY
43 minutes in SOUND between STANDBY periodes
45 airvalve polarity, 0= active closed, 1= active open
46 minutes air OFF if conditions are met and parameter is >O
47 minutes air ON
1Rolls-Royce
Em&3
1Parameters for a n a l o g e ouputs.
50 is the maximum number of analoge outputs for external instruments.

If no analoge output modules is installed this parameter must be set to the default value= 0.
52 is the analog output type of IIS module.
0= A 0 4 Uefault) with 4 12 bits analog outputs

1= DM16 with 16 analog output channels 8 bits 0- 20 rnA
53 analoge channel depth fore

54 analoge channel " aft
55 analoge channel " stbd
56 analoge channel " port
If no instrument is connected .to depth measurement the corresponding parameter should be set to
0 which is the default value.
57 denotes which type of information is to be displayed on the tank instruments:
0 = no information (default).
1 = tank level
2 = volume percent utilisation.
58 is the scaling factor for the tank vol.% displays.
59 is the scale factor for depth value level displays.

(see: The calibration of instruments)
60 is the scale factor for the tank level displays
90- 91 is used for copying all parameters from one tank to

another one.
The source tanknumber must be input to parameter 90, default

value is tank number 1.
91 must be set to the destination tank number.
Rolls-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical rnanual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
The copying starts when parameter is changed from the default value which is 0.
After transfer of data, the parameter 91 is automaticly set to 0 again, ready for the.next copying
demand.
In this way, similar tanks can have their parameters duplicated.
Normally it is sufficient to calibrate one of several tanks, using the same transducer.
The others can then have their parameters copied from the calibrated one.
Note!
If the destination tanknumber is 57- 60, only the level parameters are copied, not the Tank table
parameters because the depth tanks do not have volume calculation.
999 is used for transferring all the default values from Eprom memory to EEprom.
This must be done only once, normally before the factory tests.
Then the parameter can be adjusted for the customer.
WARNING!
This parameter must never be used after the system is installed and calibrated.
All the parameter changes will then be lost.
- RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technical rnanzml UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
2 Startup procedures, tank parameters.
The switch in the valve cabinet shoulde be turned over from

"MAN" to "AUTO".
The system is then supplied with 24 Voltage.
On the microterminal one can observe the self test, followed by

"Test Ok!" on the display for a momemt.
Aftersome seconds "DS.FRONTEND 612" is displayed, indicating that the DSF system is up
and workjng properly.
If the system is startet the very first time, the display will
show ''LOAD EEprom!.
The default values must then be loaded into an empty EEprom, before the sounding sequence can
start.
Press F6 and key in the password codenumber.

If the number is valid, pressing Enter will
display: "SERVICE MODE"
Press F3 = "VALUE #" and input parameter number 999 + Enter.

Then the value 12345 and Enter.
WAIT! is shown while transferring the parameter values.
After 15-20 secondes the text "EEPROM LOADED!" is displayed.
Default values are stored in EEprom and new values can be entered as required.
The sound sequence is running when the leds on the front of the DO16 modules are lit in a
sequence.
Turning off and on the power supply will from now on

show the startup message: "DS.FRONTEND 612".
I
The first parameters to enter is for configuring the IIS chain and the modules.
This must be done in the Service mode with function key F3.
First the number of analoge input modules must be determined,

selecting the type A1 161.
At least one analoge input module must be installed.
That is, parameter number 1201 must be set to 1, enabling the first module.
If two analogc input modules are to be used, the

parameter 1205 is set to 1, enabling the second module of this type.
For 3 modules parameter 1209= 1 and so on.
E3iz3
Rolls-Royce
Operating/sewice/techm'cal nranzlal UAU Datasozmd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
The type number for the first module is located in parameter 1202
A11 61 has type number 53
Parameter number 1206 is used for the second module in the chain,
1210 for the third and so on for all installed modules..
The parameter 1203, 1207,121 1 and so on is normally not changed.

They represents the module number of this type.
Also the module logical adress, parameter 1204, 1208, 1212,
do not need to be changed for most systems.
In the same way, the number and type of DO16 digital modules is configured.
As a default two DO16 modules are enabled, setting parameter 1233 and 1237 to 1.
The third DO16 module is enabled by setting parameter 1241 to 1.
After configuring the modules, the system must be restarted

by turning the power offlon or pressing the keys Clear .Enter
in sequence.
If the configuration is correct, no error messages will appear.
All the modules will then be scanned continuosly by the program.
This can be observed on the green leds marked Msel on the modules.
The analoge and digital test can the be performed, testing

all the module functions, see: Testfunctions.
Now it is the time for adjusting the system parameters.

The default values are selected for a typical system,
minimizing the customers adjustments.
The maximum number of tanks inclusive depth tanknumbers and

the number of analoge groups must first be changed.
Depending of the application, the other parameters must be adjusted if necessary.
See:. Parameter values.

If the manual density mode is used, and the current value is different from the default value, it
must be entered for each tank into parameter 100+ tanknumber.
The density is entered without decimals * 1000.
Default value for all tanks is: 1000= density 1.000.
Tanknumbers used for depth measurements are normally using

the density value 1.020
The paramcter value is then 1020.
i4 \ D , \ i \ 7 r n r l o ; ~ l : ? s ' , Y . : : ? . , \ L E E \ : ~ I i 6 ! 2 2 O ! . ~ J ~ J ~ :
- Rolls-Royce
1
Operatin~/service/technicalnranual UAU Datasortnd Frontend / UMAS V Tmksonnding
The volume format and bellheight is combined in

parameter 200 + tanknumber:
The bellheight is inputted in mm. from the bottom of the tank.
Volume format: No desimals = 20000 + bellheight

" " 1 " =10000+ "
" " 2 " -- o + "
Parameter 300,400,500 and 600 + tanknumber is loaded via the calibration functions.
They can'also be changed directly on line during the sounding
process for fine adjusting the measuring values.
Parameter 700 + tanknumber combines the sensortype and groupnumber for the actual tank.
A group number must be allocated for each level transducer.
If only one level transducer is used, the default
group value= 1 can be used for all tanks.
Sensortype: 0 + groupn. = no sensor, tank is not used

" 100 + " = 1 sensor for level measurement
" 200 + " = 2 sensors at the same leve1,for backup
" 300 + " = 2 sensors at different level for density
The default values are: 101 = one group and one sensor for level measurement only.
The groupnumber is then the analog input channel for level measurement. Groupnumber 1
corresponds to the first input on the analoge module.
For density measurements of one or several tanks,

the parameter 4 must always be set to 1.
The sensortype must be 3 (par. 700= 300+ groupnumber) for the tanks with density sensor.
The sensor groupnumber is the analoge channel number for the density transducer.
;
The groupnumber+ 1 is the analoge channel for the level transducer.
The level must be above the density sensor and above
the minimum density level (see par. 800-- ) for autodensity measurements.
On the microterminal, this is indicated by an "A" when using
the F2 , SOUND function.
The next free analoge channel to be used will then be the groupnumber+ 2.
Note! For automatic density, 2 analoge input channels are used.
- RolIs-Royce
1
Operating/sewice/technical nzaniial UAU Dataso~rndFrontetzd / UMAS V Tanksozmding
First time the Frontend is started, the manual density value is used in the calculations.
When an automatic density value is once measured, this value will be used fromnow on, even if
the conditions for automatic density measurement is no longer met.
Parameter 800 + tanknumber combines the minimum density level and the individual stabilising
times.
The stab. time values are inputted in * 100 ms and
used only if the system parameter 16 is set to 0.
The minimum density level is inputted in dm. level above
the bottom of the tank * 1000.
The defakt values for all tanks are: 0005,
resulting in no minimum density level.
The individual stab.time is 500 mS.
As an example, the value 10040 means:

The minimum density level is: 10 dm.= 1 m.
The stabilise time is: 4000 ms.= 4 seconds
Parameter 900 + tanknumber is the maximum volume of the tank.

The value is dependent of the volume format for the actual tank.
Parameter 1001 + tanknumber is the low alarmlimit * 10 %

Parameter 1101 +- tanknumber is the high alarmlimit * 10 %
The default values are 100 and 900 which corresponds to

10.0 and 90.0 volume percent.
Parameter 1401 -t tanknumber is the digital alarm output numbers.

The low alarm output number is the value < 100
The high alarm output number is the value > 100
As an example: If the parameter value is 0201,
the low alarm output number is 01, and
the high output number is 02.
The default value is 0.
No alarm output can then be activated for this tank.
The calibration can then be done for 1 tank in each group.
See: Calibrating.
Systemparameters and DSF function can be controlled by observing the sounding results from
all tanks and comparing them with known values.
, ,,,".,,,,",,".,,,,,
' 6 0,IIc.:
LEm
RolIs-Royce
Operating/sewice/technicnl manztal UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V T a n k ~ o z t n d i n ~
3 Technical description.
.I Pneumatic part.
The pneumatic part of the system is based on the constant air principle.
The sensors are selected using electrically controlled valves.
Level and density is measured using air pressure transducers.
If the DSF system is not working properly, it can be turned off,
setting the switch in the valve cabinett to "MAN".
The valves can then be manually operated and a manometer is used for reading the level.
Knowing the density of the tank medium, the correct level can be calculated.
The volume can be found in tanktables.
The air consumption is: 1- 4 nllmin in each tank.
.2 Processor unit.
19' rack
Powersupply 2415 volt
Eurolog processor card CPC 8 with all memory
IIS analoge input modules of type A11 61
IIS analog output modules A 0 4 (optional)
IIS digital output modules type DO16
IIS P I 0 interface
20 rnA current loop interface adapter
cables and contacts
The computer rack is normaly mounted in the valve cabinet,

resulting in short cables and high noise immunity.
Analoge and digital modules are installed as required.

The microterminal is used for all configurations.
The A11 61 module can handle a maximum of 16 transducer signals.One DO1 6 module can control
16 valves.
The IIS module interface is mounted directly on the CPU card replacing the standard ZSO P I 0
circuit.
A flat cable is connected to the interface and to the first module in thc IIS chain.
This is usually an analoge module.
.o,
,t: \ ? A Y , ~ . ~ " . ~ > O . : C , , , > ~ ; \ - , , ! ~ ~ , \ ~ F , ~ \ " ~ , ~ , ~ .d<X
1RolIs-Royce
mm3
Ooeratin~/sewice/technicaI~nanual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozlndin~
.3 Microterminal.
The microterminalen type TM2500 is mounted in the front of the computer rack or in the cabinet
door.
It is connected to the CPC 8 card via an operator switch to the serial port contact J2
using the RS 232 interface.
Power supply 5 volt is also supported by the CPC 8 card.
The ~ommunicationspeed is 1200 bitslsecond.
.4' Software.
The general driver routines for the CPC 8 card is optimized 280 assembler code for maximum
performance.
The communication routines are based on the cards interrupt facilities.
Application dependent software is mainly produced in the high level language C for maximum
portability and easy maintenence.
The base model of Datasound Frontend 612 consists of the following program modules:
- General routines for parametering, control

and error handling of the IIS modules.
- Sounding routines for various modes
- Communication routines
- Test and simulating program
- Checksum calculation for Eprom og EEprom
Level calulation based on measurements and parameters
- Program for local operation
Em33
Rolls-Royce
O~eratin~/sewice/technical
rnanual UAU Datasound Prontend / UMAS V tank sound in^
.5 Material list.
1 pcs. 19' rack for power, cpu card and modules
1 " powersupply 2415 volt 10 A type PEU-106-C Powerbox
1 " CPU card type CPC 8 4 rnHz Eurolog
1 " Eprom 27C256 < 250 nS 32 kbyte Various
1 " EEprom X28C64 D 200 nS 8 kbyte Xicor
1 " Ram HM6264P < 250 nS 8 kbyte Hitachi (or others)
1 " IIS pio adapter type HPIO for CPC8 Eurolog
1- 8 pcs. IIS A1161 analog input module ,
1- 8 " IIS DO1 6 2A digital output modules ,,
1- 4 " IIS A 0 4 analoge output modules ,I
1-4 IISDAI16 " 9, !I
Phoenix contacts for IIS modules:
For front connections (2 on each module):

type MSTB 2,511 8-ST-5,08 art.nr. 1757174
For 5 Voltage supply (1 on each module):
type GMSTB 2,512-ST-7,62 " 1766990
1 pcs. current loop adapter type MIC-24lCLff Data Equipment
1 pcs. Microterminal type TM2500 Burr Brown
1 pcs. Operator Switch 3 ways, 4 pole
Various cables and contacts.
Emm
RolIs-Royce
Operating/service/technical manual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
.6 Technical data.
Voltage supply: 18- 32 VDC
Current consumption at 24 Volt,

is dependent of installed IIS modules: 0.7- 1.5 A
- Consumption at 5 Volt (dep. of modules): 2.5- 5.0 A
Akbient temperature in the cabinet: 0 - 55 degrees
Relative non condensing humidity: 20 - 95 prosent
Micro processor type: Zilog 280 8 bit
Program memory: 32 kbyte Eprom type 27C256
Variable memory: 8 kbyte ram type HM6264-P
Parameter memory: 8 kbyte eeprom type X28C64D-20
Card type Eurolog CPC 8, ECB bus compatible
Bum-in CPC 8: 72 hours at 60- 70 degrees
System clock: 4 Mhz
Serial innterface: 2 fill1 duplex RS 232 channels on the CPC8 card.
TM2500 microterminal and external PC data:
RS232, 1200 bitslsec., 1 start, 8 data bit, 1 stop, no parity
Interface for the operator PC, external computer

via 20 mA passive current adapter
II\31\X\TankiOuni(lnli\W::,'IL?!i\3i<LL2~0: SLY
1RolIs-Royce
=
Operating/sewice/techizicalmanual UAU Datasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozmding
- Tanktender data:
2400 bitslsec., 1 start, 8 data bit, 1 stop, even panty.
The baudrates can be changed on the CPC 8 card using the 4 bit dipswitches SllS2:
4 Serviceing.
.1 Errors during startup.
When starting DSF, applying power to the system, the

text "DS.FRONTEND 612" should appear in the display window.
The leds on the DO16 modules should be activated sequencly.
If this is not the case, then observe the following:
Error symptom 1:
There is no information on the LCD display.
Possible cause 1:
Check that the switch in the valve cabinet is in position "AUTO".
The fuses must be controlled and changed if necessary.

Measure the power supply input voltage to be about 24 volt DC.
If the voltage is present, but no green led indication on the power supply card, then change the
card.
The trim pot. on the front of the card should be adjusted
until1 5- 5.1 volt output during maximum load.
1Rolls-Royce
cma
Operating/sewice/technicalmanzlal UAU Datasozlnd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksortndin,o
Symptom 2:
All the voltages are correct, but no responce is detected on the microterminal.
The leds on the modules is showing normal activity.
Data communication is working.
Cause 2:
Check the cables to the microterminal.
It must be correctly connected to the J2 serial contact.
Observe h e pin 1 position.
The baudrate for serial channel J2 should be 1200 bitslsecond.
Dipswitch S2 should then be set to:
on : x
off: xxx
Turn off/ on the power supply and observe the self test function on the microterminal.
The display should be "VO1.O1 Test OK" for some seconds.
Then the DSF programmet should take control and
change the display to: "DS.FRONTEND 612"
If the lcd display is still blank, check the 5 volt supply
to the terminal.
Change to a new terminal if also the 5 volt is present.
Symptom 3:
The microterminal is working, but the sounding sequence dos not start.
No data is sent to the external computer.
Cause 3:
If it is the first startup of the system after production,
the default values must be loaded into EEprom.
See the startup procedure.
Then chcck thc cables to thc modules.
1RolIs-Royce
Symptom 4:
DSF is working but there is no communication to the external computer.
Cause 4:
Check the serial cables.
Disconnect one of the four signal connections.
Insert a milliampere meter in serial with the signal.
17- 22 mA should be measured in each of the signal cables.
Control the connections to the current loop adapter.
It should be directly coupled to J1 contact via a flat cable.
Check the baudrate switch S 1.
The baudrate must be the same used for the external computer.
The internal switch in the adapter unit should be set
to position DCE.
The baudrate for serial channel J1 should be 1200 bitslsecond.
Dipswitch S 1 should then be set to:
on : x
off: xxx
Symptom 5:
The system is working properly, however some tankvalues are wrong.
Cause 5:
Control the parameteres for the actual tanks.
The calibration must be checked and eventually repeated.
Manual density value must correspond with the tank density.
Control the analoge and digital connections for the tanks.
The signal must be correctly connected to the valves and transducers.
The operation of the different valves must be controlled.
Each flowmeter must be adjusted for the correct airflow.
1RolIs-Royce
mm3
Operatiizg/sewice/technicalmanual - UAU Datasozmd Pronteitd / UMAS V Tanksounding
5 Interfacing the DSF to an external computer.
CPC 8 Contact
IDC J1 MIC-~~/CL/P to exst-comp.
RS 232/20 rnA
.. flat cable-LL
1 Tx+ 3
I* Tx - 4
1 Rx+ 5
-.
25 ------------- RX - 6
-
The internal switch in the adapter should be in DCE. position.
The 4 wire cable to the external computer must be screened.
The MIC 24 handles only passive current loop and depends on an active current loop interface in
the other end of the cable.
The loop current should be in the range of 17- 22 mA measured in serial with the signals.
.I Using a PCIAT as external computer (operator) via current loop
PC serial port INT 803 Contact

corn1 RS 232/ 20 mA to DSF
flat cable -'
1 2-- 3
1. 1- 4
I 3 5
25 4 6
r
T-T
II
220 VAC A
Connection to a standard AT 9 pins dsub contact is done, using a standard 9/25 pins interface
cable.
H - \ D A X \ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ O ~ ~ J L ~ G \ Y . \ ~ ' J I O! .I ? da-
! I \ ~ ~ F ~ I ~
[ Rolls-Royce
lzmm
Operatirzg/sewice/lechnical nzanual UAUDatasound Frontend / UMAS V Tanksoundirzg
.2 INT 803 internal configuration:
X X X X X
terminal
INT 803 is set up for active current loop with internal 220 VAC.
supply -
m
RolIs-Royce
Operating/seivice/technicalnlanzlal UA U Datasozlnd Frontend / UMAS V Tanksozlnding
6 Microterminal connection
Operator Switch MIC-24

Adapter
OP.2 25 pin
MTTY
Microterminal
CPC 8 25 pin TM 2500
IDC J2 cannon 9 pin
I
RX 3 2- 2 TX
3 RX
GND 13 7 7 GND
RTS 7 41- OP.2
C 5 CTS
1
CTS 9 5- 6 DTR
+12V 17 '
MTTY
- 12V 19 10
GND 1 - 1 -~----- 1 GND
to DSF d supply
MTTY
1RolIsmRoyce
lmm
Operating/sewice/technicalmanual UAU Datasorind Frontend / UMAS V Tanksounding
A 3 way, 4 pole switch is used for selecting the Operator 2 or

the Microterminal.
The DSF will be restarted, due to the power drop in the middle
switch position.
The microterminal is 5 Volt powered from the CPC 8 card.
.I" Microterminal Configuration
Before using the Microterminal it must be configured for the actual application.
The parameter changes will be stored in the terminal even if the power is missing.
The setup menu is activated by pressing the '.' key when the power is connected to the terminal.
At start the display will show: VW = N.
N is a number from 0- 7, representing the LCD contrast value
Normal Description:
VW : (0-7) 0 Maximum contrast
TM : (0-1) 0 Character mode
TD : (0-3) 0 0 mS delay
BR : (0-2) 1 1200 Bitstsec. (2= 9600)
DF : (0-4) 4 8 bit no parity
HS : (0-2) 0 no handshake
LE : (0-1) 0 no local echo
EN : (0-3) 1 CrRet ends the input
KC : (0-1) 0 No keyclick
KR : (0-1) 0 No repetition on the keys
CU : (0-2) 1 '-' = cursor symbol
The keys '<' and '>' shows next parameter.
F1 stores the parameters.
'Enter' return to normal terminal mode.
1Rolls- Royce
Emm
Operatin,o/sewice/technical ntaizual UAU Datasozmd Frontend / UMAS V Tanbo~lnding
1 Flowchart sound sequence.
start
C
autodensity?-----.-----------------.--
II < - - - - - - - - . - - - - - - - - - - - -
-. I
I<--..------------
close air valve density I close air valve level (
close air valve level I delay par. 15 I
delay par. 12 I open tk. valve level I
open tk.valve density I delay par. 16 I
open tk-valve level I read advalue level I
delay par. 13 I close tk-valve I
read advalue density I open air valve level I
close tk-valve density I delay par. 17 I
open air valve density I I I
delay par. 14 I I I
read advalue level 1
close tk.valve level I
open air valve level I
delay par. 17 I
I I

Wca-21 Rolls Royce - Umas V PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wca-21 Rolls Royce - Umas V PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

-- -

I Exit & Back

INTERNAL WlRlNG ALARM

INTERNAL WIRING PUMP &VALVE

INTERNAL WIRING TANKSOUNDING

INTERNAL WIRING LOCAL CONTROL

TERMINAU WlRlNG DIAGRAMS PANELS1

CUSTOMER : Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Ship Technology

LOCATED IN ENGINE CONTROL ROOM ECR :

-Operator Station 1 Consisting of:

-Additional Equipment Mounted in ECR Console:

-Equipment Mounted in Bridge Consoles:

LOCATED IN ENGINE ROOM:

SECTION 1, SYSTEM DRAWINGS

One-Line System Configuration block diagram 38038301 PECl

SECTION 2, DIMENSION SKETCHES

Details for Earth Connections lay out 4Ml443Ol EC I

SECTION 3, INTERNAL WIRING ALARM CABINETS

Alarm System Main Cabinet lay out 3M327001 PECl

SECTION 4, INTERNAL WIRING P&V CONTROL CABINET

P&V Control Cabinet lay out PECl

SECTION 5, INTERNAL WIRING TANKSOUNDING CABINET

UN980 Umas V Tanksounding lay out 4M327201 PECl

SECTION 6, INTERNAL WIRING LOCAL CONTROL CABINET

(Y\uau_sOOI'dok dnk mlkn auknl 1O.umns nln111A7IZ6~u1nnsalnrn~.doc)

SECTION 7, TERMINAL / WIRING DIAGRAMS PANELS 1 POWER SUPPLY

UN914 Power Supply Operator Station wiring diagram 3E155619 ECI

SECTION 8, FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST

Test Procedure Alarm documentation Fatproc.doc C

SECTION 9, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Amos Maritime PC data sheet

SECTION 10, UMAS V SPECIFICATIONS

UMAS V Alarm System User's Manual documentation urnsvo-35 CI

CHIEF ENGINEER CHIEF ENGINEER 1. ENGINEER ELECTRICIAN MESS ROOM I

ENGINE CONTROL ROOM

UN91 1 . 3 UN91 1.4

UMAS V UMAS V UMAS V TANKSOUNDING

DEAD MAN SYSTEM P'O''b"S

mmtTrrrr mmtmm mrrrtrmTl

AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS UMAS AUTOMATION SYSTEM

tUN911.9 FROM EMERGENCY

CL8lES BCTNIH PRINICR. UWITW. KilBOUID. ULWP AND PC

YARD 10 YOUHI THE DIiIEREHI IlEUS DELIKRED ACCORDlNG

AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS UMAS V ALARM SYSTEM

&@as Dept. Automation - Longva

YiWD TO MOUNT M E DIFFERENT I K M S DELIVERED ACCORDING

/\U CAQLES 1 0 BE USED. MUST BE OF 9ilIELDED W E (RCOP).

FOR PROFIBUS CAQLE RECOMMENOAnON, PLEASE CONFER OUR SEPAQAIE

ALARM AND DEAD MAN PANELS

ETHERNET TWISTED PAlR ETHERNET TWISTED PAlR

I I I I I AUKRA INDUSTRIER AS UMAS V ALARM SYSTEM

Date Issued Status

I Cable data on Ethernet and Profibus modified. 10.2

3 ETHERNET TWISTED PAIR

8 CONTROL OF SOLENOID VALVES

9 DIG. FEEDBACK SIGNAL (FROM VALVES I STARTERS).

10 ANALOG SIGNAL (FROM VALVES I TRANSMITTERS)

Type: LAN 10 base 2 DEC Coaxial

3 ETHERNET TWISTED PAIR

A recommended category 5 cable is Indzatrial Etlzernet FC Marine Cable from Siemens:

Type: Twisted pair, shielded, 2 ~ 2 ~ 0 . mmz

A recommended catego~yG cable is LAN~nark-6F2TP Cat.6 LSZH from Nexans

Type: Twisted pair, shielded, 4x2x0.55 mm2